SE190823C1 - - Google Patents

Info

Publication number
SE190823C1
SE190823C1 SE190823DA SE190823C1 SE 190823 C1 SE190823 C1 SE 190823C1 SE 190823D A SE190823D A SE 190823DA SE 190823 C1 SE190823 C1 SE 190823C1
Authority
SE
Sweden
Prior art keywords
contacts
card
arm
unloading
closed
Prior art date
Application number
Other languages
Swedish (sv)
Publication date
Publication of SE190823C1 publication Critical patent/SE190823C1/sv

Links

Landscapes

  • Control Of Vending Devices And Auxiliary Devices For Vending Devices (AREA)

Description

Uppfinnare: R L Ditmer, E C Dobberstein och L K Sandor Prioritet begdrd frdn den 16 november 1956 (USA) Foreliggande uppfinning hanfor sig till en anlaggning for uppteekning av data genom perforering av pappersremsor med olika koder och sarskilt till en databehandlingsanlaggning, som fir i stand att uppteckna data, vilka tagas fran en avlasningsanordning eller frau en rnaskin, som styres Iran ett tangent-bard, shsom exempelvis ett kassaregister, en bokforingsmaskin eller en raknemaskin, i ratt foljd ph remsan. Inventors: RL Ditmer, EC Dobberstein and LK Sandor Priority as of November 16, 1956 (USA) The present invention relates to a data recording facility by perforating paper strips with different codes and in particular to a data processing facility capable of recording data taken from a unloading device or from a machine controlled by a keyboard, such as a cash register, a bookkeeping machine or a razor, in a straight line following the strip.

For att klargOra uppfinnin,gen, visas den i samband rned en apparat, som an.vandes vid detaljfOrsaljning for uppteckning av till varje transaktion harande data, sasom exempelvis data for identifiering av forsaljaren ()eh kanden eller kontot saint en beskrivning av varuslaget och dess forsaljningspris. Remsan, ph vilken dessa data upptecknas, kan senare analyseras medelst en raknemaskin eller medelst andra anordningar, sa att varden ph forsaljningsvolymen, lagerhallning eller andra Onskade uppgifter kunna erhallas. Det kommer att Mart visas att den beskrivna utforingsformen endast ar en av ett Herta' utfOringsfermer for olika omrhden. In order to clarify the invention, it is shown in connection with an apparatus used in retail sales for recording data relating to each transaction, such as, for example, data for identifying the seller () or the account or the account with a description of the type of goods and its retail price. The strip, the pH at which this data is recorded, can later be analyzed by means of a razor or by other devices, so that the value of the sales volume, stock holding or other desired data can be obtained. It will be shown to Mart that the described embodiment is only one of Herta's execution forms for different areas.

Den i det foljande beskrivna uppteckningsanlaggningen Sr avsedd att anvandas tillsammans med kort eller kvitton, fran vilka avlasas fasta informationer, da sa Sr mojligt. Dessa fasta informationer finnas i kodform pa korten i form av ett flertal kolumner av perforeririgar, vilka avlasas av avlasningsanordningen och uppteeknas pa remsan. Anvandandet av perforerade kvitton eller kort minskar vasentligt antalet operationer, som maste utforas av den, som skoter anlaggningen, eftersom del enda erforderliga Sr insattandet av kvittot eller kortet I avlasningsanordningen. Harigenom forenklas arbetet och sparas ansenlig tid saint minskas i stors ta utstrackning felkallorna vid uppteckningen av en transaktion. The recording system Sr described below is intended to be used together with cards or receipts, from which fixed information is read, then Sr said possible. This fixed information is in code form on the cards in the form of a plurality of columns of perforating rows, which are unloaded by the unloading device and recorded on the strip. The use of perforated receipts or cards substantially reduces the number of operations that must be performed by the person who scoops the plant, since the only part required is the insertion of the receipt or card into the unloading device. This simplifies the work and saves considerable time, which largely reduces the error calls when recording a transaction.

Tidigare Sr det kant att anvanda sig av ett hokfOringssystem med en avlasningsanordning for halkort, ett par skrivmaskiner, som automatiskt phverkas och styras av de avkanda korten att Ora upp fakturor respeklive inventeringskorl, en remsstansande en-het, S0111 paverkas bade av hhlkorten och skrivmaskinerna, saint en programmeringsanordning, som styres av en stansad programremsa sã att systemets olika delar sarnverka ph rat" salt. De halkort, som skola avlfisas, inforas ett efter ett och endast ett kort erfordras vid varje tillfSlie fOr att styra systemets operationer. Ingen sekvenskontroll be-hays vid en saclan anlaggning, i motsats till vad fallet Sr vid en grupp av kort, som styr en fullstandig transaktion. Derma anlaggning Sr dessutom synnerligen komplicerad och, fastan korten inmatas manuellt till kortavlasningsanordningen for att Ora bokforingen ekonomisk, Sr det tydligt att den i praktiken i forsta hand ar avsedd fOr kontinuerlig drift under hela arbetsperioden. Previously, it is possible to use a hook lining system with a sliding card unloading device, a pair of typewriters, which are automatically processed and controlled by the sent cards to draw up invoices or inventory card, a strip punching unit, S0111 is affected by both the hhl cards and the typewriters. saint a programming device, which is controlled by a punched program strip so that the various parts of the system act ph rat "salt. hays at a saclan facility, in contrast to what is the case with a group of cards, which controls a complete transaction. the internship is primarily intended for continuous operation throughout the work period.

Enligt ett annat kant system avlasas tre halkort for varje fullstandig transaktion. Dar finns ernellertid en individuell avkanningsmekanism for varje kort saint en individuell stansningsmekanism for varje avkanningsmekanism, varvid stansningsmekanismen selektivt anslutes till en kontrolledning for att stansa information fran alla tre korten ph ett enda kort och darned astadkomma en enda fullstandig uppteckning av transaktionen. Eftersom alla korten anvandas samtidigt Sr det onacligt att bestamma en viss ordningsfoljd for deras inmatning. According to a different edge system, three slip cards are read for each complete transaction. However, there is an individual scanning mechanism for each card and an individual punching mechanism for each scanning mechanism, the punching mechanism being selectively connected to a control line to punch information from all three cards on a single card and thereby provide a single complete record of the transaction. Since all the cards are used at the same time, it is impossible to determine a certain order for their input.

Foreliggande uppfinning skiljer sig fran tidigare kanda anordningar genom sin enkel- 2 — — het och att det har endast finnes ett enda avkannande organ for tre inmatade kort samt att anordningar for angivande av turordning finnas, vilka tillata stansningsmekanismen att arbeta endast om vart och ett av de tre korten inforas i kortavlasningsanordningen ran ordning. The present invention differs from prior art devices by its simplicity and the fact that there is only a single scanning means for three input cards and that there are devices for indicating sequence, which allow the punching mechanism to operate only on each of the three cards are inserted into the card unloading device in order.

Det har beskrivna uppteckningssystemet är synnerligen smidigt och kan latt anpassas for de olika andamal, for vilka det är avsett. Uppbyggnaden är sadan att den tillater programmering av ett stort antal olika sekvenser och operationer. Dessutom kan det sekvensangivande organ, som finnes inbyggt i kort- eller mediumavlasningsanordningen, tagas bort i form av en sluten enhet och ersattas med en annan enhet, som har andra fordringar pa ordningsfoljden och darmed är bait-re lampad fOr andra andamal. The recording system described has been extremely flexible and can be easily adapted for the various purposes for which it is intended. The structure is such that it allows programming of a large number of different sequences and operations. In addition, the sequence indicating means, which is built into the card or medium unloading device, can be removed in the form of a closed unit and replaced with another unit, which has other requirements on the order and is thus better suited for other purposes.

Foreliggande uppfinning avser en databehandlingsanlaggning innefattande en manuellt installbar rdknemaskin for registrering av en fOrsta dataklass, en mediumavlasningsenhet fOr avlasning av en andra dataklass frail inforda handlingar saint en uppteckningsenhet, anordnad att uppteckna bada dataklasserna frail avlasningsenheten och raknemaskinen, varvid for avlasningen och uppteckningen av ett flertal olika grupper av namnda andra dataklass frail var och en av ett flertal inforda handlingar, vilka inforts i forutbestamd foljd finnes anordnad en avlasningskontrollanordning, vilken sá styres av en mediumidentifieringsanordning, medelst vilken de infOrda handlingarna identifieras, samverkan med en foljdkontrollanordning, att avlasningsenheten for avlasning av nal-Janda inforda handlingar hindras att arbeta, om en av mediumidentifieringsanordningen identifierad handling ieke infores i avlasningsenheten i den av foljdkontrollanordningen bestamda fOlj den, och den kannetecknas i huvudsak av att foljdkontrollanordningen innefattar en stegomkopplare med efter varandra anordnade kontaktlagen, av vilka vartdera ãr elektriskt forbundet med var sitt av en fOljd individuella kontaktpar, av vilka kontaktpar vartdera samverkar med en avkanningsanordning, vilken an anordnad att avkanna identifieringsuppteckningar i olika indexlagen pa de inforda handlingarna, sa att en elektrisk krets till en drivmotor for avlasningsenheten endast slutes dá ett av kontaktparen slutes medelst tillhorande avkanningsanordning, vilket kontaktpar samverkar med det speciella kontaktlage, i vilket stegomkopplaren instants vid vane sarskilt stadium under en databehandlingsoperation. The present invention relates to a data processing plant comprising a manually installable calculator for registering a first data class, a medium reading unit for reading a second data class for entering documents from a recording unit, arranged to record both the data classes from the reading unit and the reading unit. different groups of said second data class frail each of a plurality of input documents, which are imported in predetermined sequence, there is arranged a reading control device, which is then controlled by a medium identification device, by means of which the input documents are identified, cooperating with a sequence control device for reading The documents submitted by nal-Janda are prevented from working if a document identified by the medium identification device is not inserted into the unloading unit in the sequence determined by the tracking control device, and it can be characterized mainly by The tracking control device comprises a step switch with successively arranged contact layers, each of which is electrically connected to each of a series of individual contact pairs, of which contact pairs each cooperate with a scanning device, which is arranged to scan identification records in different index layers on the requested documents. that an electrical circuit to a drive motor for the unloading unit is closed only when one of the contact pairs is closed by means of the associated scanning device, which contact pair cooperates with the special contact layer, in which the step switch is instantaneous at a special stage during a data processing operation.

Ovanstaende och andra kannetecken pa den visade utforingsformen av uppfinningen kern-ma nu att beskrivas i samband med bifogade ritningar, pa vilka fig. 1 ãr en bild framifran av apparaten, vilken visar kassaregistret, mediumavlasaren och apparatens uppteckningsorgan samt kablarna for att sammanbinda apparatens tre delar fOr operation, fig. 2 dr en forstorad bild av ett typiskt kvitto for expeditens nummer, vilket skall avlasas av mediumavlasaren, fig. 3 an en forstorad Mid av ett typiskt kundnummerkvitto, vilket skall avlasas av mediuniavlasaren, Fig. 4 Sr en fOrstorad bild av ett typiskt flerdelat forsaljningskvitto, vilket skall avlasas av mediumavlasaren, fig. 5 visar en bit av den i uppteckningsanordningen framstallda remsan med den kod, som anvandes for framstallning av data och symboler, fig. 6 ar en vertikalsektion genom mediumavlasningsanordningen, fig. 7A och 713 tillsammans visa en ovre bild av avlasningsanordningen med vissa delar borttagna, for att andra delar battre skall framtrada, fig. 8 är en sidobild av en del av avkanningsorganen, for avlasning av identifieringskolumnen pa ett kort eller kvitto, som infOrts i avlasningsanordningen, fig. 9 är en detaljbild frail ovan av en del av avkanningsorganen i avlasningsanordningen for identifieringskolunanen, fig. 10 Sr en detaljbild av en del av inriktningsorganen for kort och butiksidentifieringsorganen, fig. 11 är en detaljbild av kortschaktet och den darmed samverkande mekanismen, varvid vissa delar bortskurits for att de olika delarna skola synas Mitre, fig. 12 ãr en detaljbild av startomkopplarmekanismen, fig. 13 och 14 aro detaljbilder av en elektromagnetiskt phverkad mekanism fOr kontroll av vissa funktioner hos mediumavlasaren, fig. 15 visar avlasningsanordningens kamskiverad, fig. 16 är en sektion efter linjen 16-16 i fig. 15, fig. 16A är en sektion efter linjen 16A-16A i fig. 15, fig. 17 ãr en sidobild, vilken visar motorn, kopplingen och kugghjulen fOr drivning av kamskivorna i avlasningsanordningen, fig. 18 Sr en detaljbild, som visar organen for manuellt borttagande av kort, fig. 19 och 20 aro detaljbilder av de elektriska kontaktorganen for avkanningsmekanismen for identifieringskolunmen, fig. 21 Sr en detaljbild av den elektromagnetiskt styrda mekanismen fOr kontroll av funktionen hos avkanningsorganen for identifieringskolumnen och hos fasthallningsorganen for kortet, fig. 22 Sr en bild, av valjarenheten i mediumavlasaren, sedd ovanifran, fig. 23 och 24 aro detaljbilder av en av valjarens valjararmar, — —3 fig. 25 och 26 aro sektioner langs linjerna 25-25 och 26-26 i fig. 22, fig. 27 är en sektion Mugs linjen 27-27 i fig. 22, vilken visar framstegningsorganen for valjaren, fig. 28 Or en bild av uppteckningsanordningen sedd frail ovan, med hOljet borttaget och med vissa delar och forbindningstradarna avlagsnade for att andra delar skola klart framtrada, fig. 29 är en schematisk bild av ett typiskt tangentbord pa kassaregistret, fig. 30 Or en genomskarning genom rad 1 i kassaregistrets transaktionstangentbank, fig. 31 är en detaljbild av omkopplare, som paverkas vid nedtryckning av en tangent i rad 1, fig. 32 Or en genonaskdrning, som visar en av transaktionstangenterna i rad 1 och med derma forbundna omkopplare, fig. 33 Or en detaljbild av en mekanism, som paverkas av tangenterna i rad 7 och rad 8, fig. 34 ãr en detaljbild av omkopplingsorgan, som paverkas av den i fig. 33 visade mekanismen, fig. 35 Or en sidobild av den i fig. 33 visade mekanismen, fig. 36 Or en detaljbild av ett kontrollsparrorgan i rad 9, fig. 37 Or en detaljbild av en mekanism, som styres av tangenterna i rad 9 for paverkan av omkopplingsorgan och vidare visas mekanismen paverkad av ldsraden for tangenterna for styrning av andra omkopplingsorgan, fig. 38 Or en detaljbild av summaspaksstromstallaren och darmed samverkande organ, fig,: 39 Or en detaljbild av manoverspaken, fig. 40 Or en detaljbild av en mekanism, som styres av manoverspaken och kontrollerar vissa stromstallares tillstand, fig. 41 Or en detaljbild av maskinfrigoringsorganen, innefattande elektromagnetiskt styrda organ och manuellt paverkbara organ samt visar Oven indikatorstromstallarna och paverkningsorganen for dessa stromstallare, fig. 42 Or en detaljbild av stromstallareanordningen for att starta en uppteckning och fig. 43A-43F bilda tillsammans ett schema for uppteckningsanlaggningen. The above and other features of the illustrated embodiment of the invention will now be described in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which Fig. 1 is a front view of the apparatus showing the cash register, the medium reader and the recording means of the apparatus and the cables for connecting the three parts of the apparatus. for operation, Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of a typical receipt for the clerk's number to be read by the media reader, Fig. 3 is an enlarged Mid of a typical customer number receipt to be read by the media reader, Fig. 4 is an enlarged view of a typical multi-part sales receipt to be unloaded by the medium unloader, Fig. 5 shows a piece of the strip produced in the recording device with the code used for producing data and symbols, Fig. 6 is a vertical section through the medium unloading device, Figs. 7A and 713 together show an upper view of the unloading device with certain parts removed, so that other parts will be better Fig. 8 is a side view of a part of the scanning means, for unloading the identification column on a card or receipt, which is inserted in the unloading device, Fig. 9 is a detail view from above of a part of the scanning means in the unloading device for the identification column, Fig. 10 Fig. 11 is a detailed view of a part of the alignment means for cards and the shop identification means, Fig. 11 is a detailed view of the card shaft and the cooperating mechanism, some parts being cut away so that the different parts are visible Miter, Fig. 12 is a detail view of the starting switch mechanism, Figs. Fig. 13 and 14 are detailed views of an electromagnetically actuated mechanism for controlling certain functions of the medium unloader, Fig. 15 shows the cam disc of the unloading device, Fig. 16 is a section along the line 16-16 in Fig. 15, Fig. 16A is a section along the line 16A-16A in Fig. 15, Fig. 17 is a side view showing the motor, clutch and gears for driving the cam discs in the unloading device Fig. 18 is a detail view showing the means for manually removing cards, Figs. 19 and 20 are detailed views of the electrical contact means for the scanning mechanism for the identification column, Fig. 21 is a detail view of the electromagnetically controlled mechanism for checking the operation of the scanning means for the identification column and the holding means for the card, Fig. 22 is a view, of the selector unit in the medium reader, seen from above, Figs. 23 and 24 are detailed views of one of the selector arms of the selector, Figs. 25 and 26 are sections along lines 25. -25 and 26-26 in Fig. 22, Fig. 27 is a section Mugs line 27-27 in Fig. 22, which shows the advancing means for the selector, Fig. 28 Or a picture of the recording device seen frail above, with the cover removed and with some parts and the connecting lines are removed so that other parts will appear clearly, Fig. 29 is a schematic view of a typical keyboard on the cash register, Fig. 30 is a section through line 1 in the cash register. Fig. 31 is a detailed view of switches which are actuated by pressing a key in row 1; Fig. 34 is a detail view of switching means actuated by the mechanism shown in Fig. 33; Fig. 35 is a side view of the mechanism shown in Fig. 33; Fig. 36 is a detail view of a control locking means in row 9, Fig. 37 is a detail view of a mechanism controlled by the keys in row 9 for actuating switching means and further shown the mechanism actuated by the key row of the keys for controlling other switching means, Figs. 38 Or a detailed view of the sum lever switch and thus cooperating means, Fig. 39 Or a detailed view of the control lever, Fig. 40 Or a detailed view of a mechanism which is controlled by the control lever and controls the condition of certain switches Fig. 41 is a detail view of the machine release means, including electromagnetically controlled means and manually actuable means and also shows the indicator power stables and actuating means for these switches; a schedule for the recording facility.

Allman beskrivning. General description.

Den visade utforingsformen av uppfinningen innehaller organ for fortlopande uppteckning pa en remsa av data, som erhallits frail ett med uppteckning forsett kvitto eller kort och/eller fran en langentstyrd datainforingsmaskin, sasom exempelvis ett kassaregister, en bokforingsmaskin eller raknemaskin. The illustrated embodiment of the invention includes means for continuously recording on a strip of data obtained from a receipt or card provided with a record and / or from a long-distance controlled data entry machine, such as for example a cash register, a bookkeeping machine or a calculator.

Det for askadliggi5rande av uppfinningen valda utfOringsexemplet arbetar med data, som harrora frail detaljforsaljning och som snabbt och exakt kunna upptecknas pa en remsa samtidigt med att forsaljningen sker. Da data pa detta satt upptecknas vid vane forsaljningstransaktion pa en remsa samtidigt med att transaktionen genomfores, kornmer vardena f Or efter varandra fOljande transaktioner att upptecknas i f8ljd pa remsan pa sadant satt, att remsan omedelbart kan anvandas f8r att slyra en raknemaskin eller andra databehandlingsanordningar, varigenom lagerkontrolldata, fOrsaljningsdata, statistiska informationer och andra onskvarda uppgifter snabbt kunna erhallas. The exemplary embodiment chosen for the purpose of illustrating the invention works with data which are free of retail sale and which can be recorded quickly and accurately on a strip at the same time as the sale takes place. Since data in this way are recorded in the usual sales transaction on a strip at the same time as the transaction is carried out, the values for successive transactions must be recorded in succession on the strip in such a way that the strip can be used immediately to blur a calculator or other data processing devices. whereby inventory control data, sales data, statistical information and other undesirable information can be obtained quickly.

For att erhalla fullstandiga upplysningar om forsaljningstransaktionen, vilka kunna erfordras for frambringandet av dessa olika kontrollvarden och statistiska uppgifter Or det nOdvandigt att uppteckning sker saval av expedit, kund eller konto samt varuidentifieringsdata som forsaljningspris, vid varje transaktion. For vane fOrsald artikel kommer darfor remsan att stansas med expeditens nummer fOljt av kundens eller kontots nummer i dataform och av varuidentifieringsdata, vilka i sin tur foljas av data, som detaljerat upplysa om arten och beloppet av forsaljningen. Det stansade segmentet pa remsan, som innehaller en komplett transaktion med expeditidentifiering, kundidentifiering, varuslagsdata, skatt och summa benamnes inforrnationsblock och sarskilj es fran ndrliggande informationsbloek av >>slut pa blocketvsymboler. In order to obtain complete information about the sales transaction, which may be required for the production of these various control values and statistical information, it is necessary that a record is made of the sales clerk, customer or account as well as product identification data such as sales price, for each transaction. For custom pre-sold items, the strip will therefore be punched with the clerk's number followed by the customer's or account number in data form and by item identification data, which in turn is followed by data detailing the nature and amount of the sale. The punched segment on the strip, which contains a complete transaction with clerk identification, customer identification, product type data, tax and sum, is called the information block and is distinguished from the underlying information block by >> end of block symbol.

Apparaten innefattar, sasom visas i fig. 1 en uppteckningsanordning 100, vilken astadkommer en stansad remsa, en mediumavldsningsanordning 101, vilken kan styra uppteckningsanordningen, sa att expeditidentifieringsdata-, kund- eller kontoidentifieringsdata och varubeskrivningsdata stansas pa remsan, samt ett kassaregister 102, pa vilket forsOljningsdata kunna installas for att styra uppteckningsanordningen sa, att forsaljningsdata stansas. Vidare kan pa kassaregistret Oven installas skatt, summa och andra uppgifter far registrering och uppteckning. Kassaregistret kan Oven kontrollera uppteekningsanordningen for stansning av expedit- och kundidentifieringsdata och varubeskrivningsdata da kort, vilka aro avsedda att a-vidsas av mediumavlasningsanordningen, icke finnas tillgangliga. Uppteckningsanordningen, mediumavldsningsanordningen och kassaregistret Oro inbordes fOrbundna medelst kablar for samverkande arbete och, trots att de i fig. 1 visas som separata enheter, kommer delay den fOljande beskrivningen att framga att de tre enheterna bilda en enhetlig apparat, vilken, om sa onskas, kan inneslutas i ett enda holje. The apparatus includes, as shown in Fig. 1, a recording device 100 which provides a punched strip, a medium discharge device 101 which can control the recording device so that clerk identification data, customer or account identification data and item description data are punched on the strip, and a cash register 102. sales data can be installed to control the recording device so that sales data is stopped. Furthermore, tax, sum and other information can be installed on the cash register Above before registration and registration. The cash register can also check the recording device for punching clerk and customer identification data and product description data when cards, which are intended to be a-vided by the medium unloading device, are not available. The recording device, the medium holding device and the cash register Oro are boarded together by means of cables for cooperating work and, although they are shown in Fig. 1 as separate units, delay the following description will show that the three units form a uniform device, which, if desired, can enclosed in a single housing.

Mediumavlasningsanordningen Or avsedd att tillfora uppteckningsanordningen expeditnummeridentifiering, kund- eller kontonummeridentifiering och varubeskrivningsdata. Dessa data avlasas fran ett kvitto eller kort, 4— — vilket i forvag stansats i enlighet med en forutbestamd kod, soin representerar den information, som skall avlasas eller upptecknas. Medium unloading device Or intended to supply the recorder with clerk number identification, customer or account number identification and item description data. This data is read from a receipt or card, which is pre-stamped in accordance with a predetermined code, which represents the information to be read or recorded.

Pa fig. 2 visas ett kort 103 far expeditnummer, pa vilket ett expeditidentifieringsnurnmer ãr stansat. Detta kort innehaves av expediten och infores i mediumavlasningsanordningen, sasom forklaras i det foljande, dá expediten utnyttjar uppteckningsanordningen vid fullbordandet av en transaktion, for att ett nummer, som identifierar expediten, skall upptecknas. Fig. 2 shows a card 103 for clerk number, on which a clerk identification number is stamped. This card is held by the clerk and inserted into the medium unloading device, as explained below, when the clerk uses the recording device in completing a transaction, in order for a number identifying the clerk to be recorded.

Det i fig. 2 visade kortet är forsett med en identifieringskolumn och sexton kolumner med stansade data och, om sa onskas, kan ett langre kort med plats far ytterligare kolumner anvandas. Vanligtvis behoves ernellertid endast sju kolumner for instansning av data, eftersom detta är tillrackligt for de fiesta andamal. Vid vissa tfflfällen kan det vara onskvart, sasom beskrives i det foljande, att anvanda raderna 2-8 pa kassaregistrets tangentbord for att infora expeditnumret I uppteckningsanlaggningen, sasom exempelvis da expeditnummerkort icke anvandes, och expeditnumret maste darfar begransas till att omfatta hogst sju siffror, savida icke tvâ eller flera operationer av registret utforas far detta andamal. Sasom exempel pa data, vilka skola stansas pa kortet i fig. 2 är den forsta kolunmen stansad med en identifieringssymbol i den fOrsta kolumnens f8rsta kanal for att denna skall kunna identifieras som ett expeditnummerkort och de foljande sju kolumnerna aro stansade med en fyrsiffrig kod, vilken identifierar expedit 0003586. De i dessa kolumner stansade siffrorna lianas dven tryckta pa kortet for direkt kontroll. The card shown in Fig. 2 is provided with an identification column and sixteen columns with punched data and, if desired, a longer card with space for additional columns can be used. Usually, however, only seven columns are needed for instantiation of data, as this is sufficient for most purposes. In some cases, it may be inappropriate, as described below, to use lines 2-8 on the cash register keyboard to enter the clerical number in the recording facility, such as when clerical number cards are not used, and the clerical number must be limited to a maximum of seven digits. no two or more operations of the register are performed for this purpose. As an example of data to be punched on the card in Fig. 2, the first column is punched with an identification symbol in the first channel of the first column so that it can be identified as a clerk number card and the following seven columns are punched with a four-digit code, which identifies expedit 0003586. The numbers punched in these columns are also printed on the card for direct control.

Jamte expeditidentifieringsdata, vilka dro stansade och tryckta pa kortet, kan kortet aven vara forsett med tryckt uppgift om expeditens namn, och, om sh anskas, dessutom upplysning om avdelning och den butik, i vilken expediten är anstalld etc. In addition to the clerk's identification data, which were stamped and printed on the card, the card may also be provided with printed information about the clerk's name, and, if requested, also information about the department and the store in which the clerk is employed, etc.

Forutom identifieringskolumnerna och kolumnerna med stansade data ãr expeditnummerkortet, sasom visas i fig. 2, forsett med tva inriktningshal 104 och 105, ett ytterligare hal 106 och en utskuren del 107. Det bar observeras att inriktningshalet 104 är runt, medan daremot inriktningshalet 105 ár rektangulart. Mediumavlasningsanordningens hada inriktningstappar ha cirkular genomskarning, men Met 105 ãr fyrkantigt for att variationer i kortets längd, beroende pa temperatur och luftfuktighet, skall kunna tillatas. Halet 106 samverkar med en butiksidentifieringstapp i mediumavlasarens inriktningsmekanism, vilken tapp anvandes for att kontrollera kundnummerkortet, sasom kommer att :beskrivas i det fadjande. In addition to the identification columns and the columns with punched data are the clerk number card, as shown in Fig. 2, provided with two alignment halls 104 and 105, a further hallway 106 and a cut-out part 107. It should be noted that the alignment hall 104 is round, while the alignment hall 105 is rectangular . The medium alignment pins of the medium unloading device have a circular cut-through, but Met 105 is square so that variations in the length of the card, depending on temperature and humidity, can be allowed. The tail 106 cooperates with a store identification pin in the media reader alignment mechanism, which pin is used to check the customer number card, as will be described in the fad.

Den utskurna delen 107 pa expeditnummerkortet sammanfaller med en vardestans pa mediumavlasarens inriktningsmekanism, vilken stans anvandes i samband med varukorten, sasom beskrives i det foljande. The cut-out part 107 on the clerk number card coincides with a guard punch on the alignment mechanism of the medium reader, which punch is used in connection with the goods cards, as described below.

Eftersom man icke anskar anvanda vardestansen pa expeditnummerkortet, är den del av kortet som i annat fall skulle praglas bortskuren. Since it is not desired to use the safe distance on the clerk number card, the part of the card that would otherwise be marked is cut away.

I fig. 3 visas ett kundnummerkort, pa vilket en identifieringssymbol och ett kund- eller kodidentifieringsnummer är instansat. Detta kort innehaves vanligtvis av kunden och averlamnas till expediten for inforing i mediumavlasningsanordningen, sasom kommer att beskrivas i det faljande, da kunden gar ett inkap, vilket icke betalas kontant, for en nummeridentifiering, varvid kundens nummer eller kundens kontonummer upptecknas. Fig. 3 shows a customer number card, on which an identification symbol and a customer or code identification number are stamped. This card is usually held by the customer and handed over to the clerk for entry into the medium unloading device, as will be described below, as the customer makes a purchase, which is not paid for in cash, for a number identification, whereby the customer's number or customer's account number is recorded.

I likhet med 'expedilkortet 103 ãr kundnummerkortet 108 forsett med sexton kolumner, I vilka data kunna instansas. Vanligtvis anvandas av dessa endast en identifieringskolumn och sju datakolumner. I det i fig. 3 visade exemplaret dr den forsta kolumnen stansad med en identifieringssymbol i den forsta kolumnens andra kanal for angivande av att det rar sig om ett kundnummerkort och de fOljande sju kolumnerna aro stansade med en fyrsiffrig kod, vilken identifierar kunden, vilken har nummer 1234567. De i de olika kolumnerna stansade siffrorna aro liven tryckta pa kortet for att medgiva direkt avlasning och kundens namn ãr a:yen ditskrivet. Kortet kan aven forses med andra informationer, om sa onskas. Like the dispatch card 103, the customer number card 108 is provided with sixteen columns, in which data can be punched. Usually, only one identification column and seven data columns are used by these. In the example shown in Fig. 3, the first column is punched with an identification symbol in the second channel of the first column to indicate that it is a customer number card and the following seven columns are punched with a four-digit code, which identifies the customer who has number 1234567. The numbers punched in the various columns are printed on the card to allow direct reading and the customer's name is written there. The card can also be provided with other information, if desired.

Kundnummerkortet 108 är forsett med inriktningshal 109 och 110, en bortskuren del 111 och butiksidentifieringshal 112, motsvarande dem pd. expeditnummerkortet 103. Den bortskurna delen 111 pa kundnummerkortet har dessutom den ytterligare uppgiften att samverka med en upphajd del pa en kortbehallare av kand typ far att kortet losbart skall kvarhallas i behallaren. Butiksidentifieringshalet 112 pa kundnummerkortet kan placeras pa nagot av de med 113 markerade lagena i fig. 3. I praktiken kommer vart och ett av de olika lagena 113 att vara reserve-rat for en siirskild butik i en stad eller annat affarsomrade och endast ett kundnummerkort med halet 112 i det for en viss butik reserverade laget kan avlasas av denna butiks mediumavlasningsanordning, emedan I annat fall, trots att ett butiksidentifieringshdl 112 finnes pa kortet, kontrolltappen kommer att hindra inriktningsmekanismen i avlasningsanordningen frau att fullborda dess rorelse, varfor avlasningsanordningen icke kommer att paverkas. Butikens expeditnummerkort och varukort maste aven vara forsedda med butiksidentifieringshal i ratt Page for att de. skola kunna avlasas av avlasningsanordningen, eftersom inriktningsmekanismen i annat fall icke kan fullborda — — sin rorelse, varigerrom avlasningsanordningen icke paverkas. The customer number card 108 is provided with alignment halls 109 and 110, a cut-away part 111 and store identification hall 112, corresponding to those pd. the clerk number 103. The cut-off part 111 on the customer number card also has the additional task of cooperating with a raised part on a card holder of the bachelor type so that the card can be releasably retained in the holder. The store identification tail 112 on the customer number card can be placed on any of the layers marked with 113 in Fig. 3. In practice, each of the different layers 113 will be reserved for a separate store in a city or other business area and only a customer number card with the tail 112 in the layer reserved for a particular store can be unloaded by that store's medium unloader, because otherwise, even though a store identification handle 112 is on the card, the control pin will prevent the alignment mechanism of the unloader from completing its movement, so the unloader will not be affected. . The store's clerk number cards and product cards must also be provided with a store identification hall in the steering wheel Page in order for them. should be able to be unloaded by the unloading device, since the alignment mechanism can otherwise not complete - - its movement, whereby the unloading device is not affected.

I fig. 4 visas ett tredelat varukort 116, pa vilka varan motsvarande varuidentifieringsdata stansats i butikens varumottagningsavdelning, dá varan mottagits. Kortet ar lampligen fastsatt vid varan och medfoljer denna till dess forsaljning sker, vid vilken tidpunkt den antingen avlases och varderas utan att avlagsnas eller ocksh avrives en del av kortet och infores i avIasningsanordningen f5r avlasning och uppteckning av tillh8rande data. Fig. 4 shows a three-part product card 116, on which the product corresponding to the product identification data was punched in the store's goods receipt department when the product was received. The card is suitably attached to the product and accompanies it until its sale takes place, at which time it is either unloaded and valued without being removed or even torn off a part of the card and inserted into the unloading device for unloading and recording of associated data.

Sasom visas i fig. 4 ãr varje kortdel forsedd med tjugufem kolumner 117 med stansade data. Den fOrsta kolumnen pa varje del ar stansad med en identifieringssymbol, som har visas i kanal 4. Denna symbol identifierar kortet, sasorn ett varukort och identifierar aven varukortets typ eller langd. Sasom ett exempel pa data, som kunna stansas i kortets aterstaende kolumner visas de foljande fyra kolumnerna stansade med en fyrsiffrig kod 1234, vilken angiver tillverkare, de sjatte och sjunde kolumnerna stansade med siffror 56, vilka angiva varans farg, de attonde och nionde kolumnerna stansade med en kod 78, vilken angiver inkOpsdatum, de tionde, elfte och tolfte kolumnerna stansade med 12 1/2, vilket angiver varans storlek, de trettonde, fjortonde och femtonde kolumnerna stansade med 901, vilket angiver varans typ, de sextonde och sjuttonde kolumnerna stansade med 23 fOr angivande av materialet, de adertonde och nittonde koltimnerna stansade med 45, angivande for vilken sasong varan ãr lampad, de tjugonde och tjugoforsta kolumnerna stansade med 45 for angivande av i vilken avdelning varan.ar said och de tjugoandra till tjugofemte kolumnerna med varans pris, vilken har angivits till 23.45. As shown in Fig. 4, each card portion is provided with twenty-five columns 117 of punched data. The first column on each part is punched with an identification symbol, which has been displayed in channel 4. This symbol identifies the card, such as a goods card and also identifies the type or length of the goods card. As an example of data that can be punched in the remaining columns of the card, the following four columns are punched with a four-digit code 1234, which indicates the manufacturer, the sixth and seventh columns punctuated with numbers 56, which indicate the color of the item, the eighth and ninth columns punched with a code 78 indicating the date of purchase, the tenth, eleventh and twelfth columns punched with 12 1/2, indicating the size of the item, the thirteenth, fourteenth and fifteenth columns punched with 901, indicating the type of the item, the sixteenth and seventeenth columns punched with 23 for indicating the material, the eighteenth and nineteenth carbon hours punched with 45, indicating for which season the product is lit, the twenty-first columns stopped with 45 for indicating in which department the product is said and the twenty-second to twenty-fifth columns with the product price, which has been set at 23.45.

De i de olika kolumnerna stansade siffroma tryckas aven pa var och en av kortets 116 delar och sarskiljas i grupper genom understrykning, sâ att de olika delarna i talet latt kunna skiljas at vid direkt avlasfling. Beloppet pa kortet anvandes endast for att man skall kunna Ora en jamforelse mellan varans ursprungliga pris och det verkliga forsaljningspriset, vilket angives genom det belopp, -vilket installes pa kassaregistret och bildar en del av uppteckningen av forsaljningsdata. The numbers punched in the different columns are also printed on each of the 116 parts of the card and are distinguished into groups by underlining, so that the different parts of the number can be distinguished by direct unloading. The amount on the card is used only to be able to make a comparison between the original price of the item and the actual sales price, which is indicated by the amount, which is installed on the cash register and forms part of the record of sales data.

Forutom de pa kortet instansade och tryckta identifieringsetata, kan kortet aven vara fi5rsett med tryck, angivande andra i5nskade data, sasom exempelvis omsattningsskatt, vilket underlattar expeditens arbete. In addition to the identification data stamped and printed on the card, the card can also be provided with print indicating other desired data, such as sales tax, which facilitates the clerk's work.

Inriktningshal 118 och 119 och ett butiksidentifieringshal 120 aterfinnas i varje del pd. kortet 116 och motsvarar halen pa expedit- och kundnummerkorten. Alignment halls 118 and 119 and a store identification hall 120 are found in each part pd. card 116 and corresponds to the tail of the clerk and customer number cards.

Kassaregistret är anordnat att styra uppteckningsanordningen sa, att pa kassaregist ret installda data stansas. Dessa data kunna omfatta sadana informationer, som forsaljnin.gsbelopp, ett konsekutivt referensnummer, vilket dr olika for var och en av de efter varandra foljande transaktionerna och son' är avsett att anvandas for att identifiera transaktionen etc. The cash register is arranged to control the recording device so that the data installed on the cash register is stopped. This data may include such information as sales amount, a consecutive reference number, which is different for each of the consecutive transactions and which is intended to be used to identify the transaction, etc.

Uppteckningsanordningen 100, vilken styres av avlasningsanordningen 101 och kassaregistret 102 stansar vid paverkan en pappersremsa 124 av den i fig. 5 visade typen. Pa remsan 124 visas den anvanda koden fOr att representera data och symboler vid foreliggande utforingsform. Det ãr uppenbart att den visade koden blott är en av manga, vilka kunna anvandas for att representera data. The recording device 100, which is controlled by the unloading device 101 and the cash register 102, punches a paper strip 124 of the type shown in Fig. 5 on impact. Strip 124 shows the code used to represent data and symbols in the present embodiment. It is obvious that the code shown is only one of many that can be used to represent data.

Styrningen av uppteckningsanordningen medelst avlasningsanordningen 101 och kassaregistret 102 samordnas genom program-organ, vilka kunna installas sá, att ett flertal olika stansningsfoljder kunna utforas, varvid uppteckningsanordningen styres av avlasningsanordningen och kassaregistret i samverkan eller endast av kassaregistret, i enlighet med vad som fordras for att de nodvandiga vardena skola upptecknas pa remsan. Avlasningsanordningens och kassaregistrets kontroll av uppteckningsanordningen samordnas aven medelst en utbytbar foljdkontrollanordning, vilken bestammer uppteckningsfoljden av olika dataklasser, sasorn expeditnummerdata, kundnummerdata och varudata. Foljdkontrollorganen kunna ersattas med andra liknande organ for forandring av uppteckningsfoljden av olika dataklasser efter Onskan. Da anlaggningen skall anvandas slutes en huvudstromstallare 125 (fig. 1), vilken ãr anordnad pa kassaregistrets 102 indikatorplat, varvid spanning tillfores uppteckningsanlaggningen. Detta sker vid arbetsdagens borjan. The control of the recording device by means of the unloading device 101 and the cash register 102 is coordinated by program means, which can be installed so that a number of different punching sequences can be executed, the recording device being controlled by the unloading device and the cash register in cooperation or only by the cash register, according to the necessary values must be recorded on the strip. The unloading device's and cash register's control of the recording device is also coordinated by means of an interchangeable tracking control device, which determines the recording sequence of different data classes, such as clerk number data, customer number data and product data. The sequence control means can be replaced with other similar means for changing the record sequence of different data classes according to Onskan. When the system is to be used, a main power switch 125 (Fig. 1) is closed, which is arranged on the indicator plate of the cash register 102, whereby voltage is supplied to the recording system. This takes place at the beginning of the working day.

F8r aft fullborda varje transaktion skall expediten forst nedtrycka en lamplig tangent i rad 9 pa kassaregistret, vilken angiver transaktionstypen och skall darefter infora sift expeditnummerkort i avlasningsanordningen for avlasning och upptcckning pa remsan. \rid inforandet av kortet pabOrjas en avlasningsoperation i avlasningsanordningen och en uppteckning av den avlasta informationen. Kortet gripes liven och Mlles fast i avlasningsanordningen till dess alla informaHoner pa kortet ha avlasts, varefter det frigores. I det foljande kommer organ att beskrivas, vilka forhindra avlasning av ett felaktigt kort, som insatts genom misstag eller ouppmarksamhet. Before completing each transaction, the clerk must first press an appropriate key in line 9 on the cash register, which indicates the type of transaction and must then enter a sift clerk number card in the unloading device for unloading and discovery on the strip. When the card is inserted, a unloading operation is started in the unloading device and a record of the unloaded information. The card is seized alive and stored in the unlocking device until all the information on the card has been unloaded, after which it is released. In the following, means will be described which prevent unloading of an incorrect card inserted by mistake or inattention.

Sedan expeditnummerkortet avlasts, insatter bitradet kundnummerkortet, vilket han far av kunden, i avlasningsanordningen fOr avlasning och uppteckning, forutsatt att det inte galler ett kontantinkop. GAller det kontantinkop är kundnummerinformationen icke nadvandig och uteslutes darfor. Kundnum- 6— — merkortet avlases och informationen upptecknas pa samma satt, som tidigare beskrivits i samband med expeditnummerkortet. After the clerk number card has been unloaded, the assisted customer inserts the customer number card, which he receives from the customer, into the unloading device for unloading and recording, provided that a cash purchase does not apply. In the case of cash purchases, customer number information is not relevant and is therefore excluded. The customer number card is read and the information is recorded in the same way as previously described in connection with the clerk number card.

Efter avlasningen av kundnummerkortet eller, i den handelse kopet sker kontant, bitradesnummerkortet, infores ett varukort avlasningsanordningen for avlasning och uppteckning av avlasta data. Varukortet kan avlasas medan det fortfarande sitter kvar pa artikeln eller ocksa avlagsnas fran denna, om sa. Onskas. Varukortet avlases och inf ormationen.upptecknas pa satt, som beskrivits i samband med expeditnummer- och kundnummerkorten. After the unloading of the customer number card or, in the case of the purchase in cash, the bit number card, a goods card unloading device is introduced for unloading and recording of unloaded data. The product card can be unloaded while it is still on the item or also removed from it, if so. Onskas. The product card is read and the information is recorded in the manner described in connection with the clerk number and customer number cards.

Under tiden data avlases och upptecknas frail varukortet, kan expediten paverka kassaregistrets tangenter for att installa forsaljningsbeloppet och andra informationer, som - hanforas till kortets data, men kassaregistret paverkas icke fOrran samtliga data avlasts frail kortet i avlasningsanordningen och upptecknats av uppteckningsanordningen ph remsan, varefter kassaregistret antomatiskt In-gores och borjar arbeta. Under denna kassaregisteroperation overforas de pa kassaregistrets tangentbord installda vardena till uppteckningsanordningen och stansas pa remsan omedelbart efter de fran varukortet av avlasningsanordningen avlasta och till uppteckningsanordningen overforda datavardena. While data is being read and recorded from the goods card, the clerk can influence the cash register keys to set the sales amount and other information, which is entered into the card data, but the cash register is not affected until all data is read from the card in the unloading device and recorded by the cash register. antomatically In-gores and begins to work. During this cash register operation, the values set on the cash register keyboard are transferred to the recording device and punched on the strip immediately after they unload the data values from the unloading device and transfer the data values to the recording device.

For att ratt operationsfoljd has kassaregistret, avlasningsanordningen och uppteckningsanordningen skall erhallas aro dessa forsedda med. inre lasningsanordningar, vilka komma att beskrivas, da apparatens olika delar genomgas och dâ de elektriska kretsarna forklaras. In order for the correct operating record to have the cash register, the unloading device and the recording device must be obtained, these are provided with. internal welding devices, which will be described as the various parts of the apparatus are reviewed and the electrical circuits are explained.

Anordningar finnas for inforing av expedit- och kundnummer och varuinformationer i uppteekningsanlaggningen fran kassaregistrets tangentbord, for den handelse att kort icke anvandes. Om kund- eller expeditnummerkortet forlorats eller skadats avlaser expediten vardena frail det skadade kortet eller om kortet saknas, fran en liggarc eller nagon annan kalla, savida han icke har vardena i minnet. Vid manuell infOring av varudata anvandas klassificeringsraderna 7 och 8, sasom kommer att beskrivas i det 101- jande. Dâ dessa olika inforingar gjorts anvandas transaktionstangenter i rad 1 pa kassaregistrets tangentbord, fOr att styra maskinoperationen. En » expeditn ummer» -tangent styr inforandet av expeditnummerdata, en »kundnummer»-tangent anvandes for att styra inf5randet av kundnummerdata och en varutangent anvandes for styrning av inforingen av varudata. Nedtryckningen av ratt tangent vid datainforingsoperationer paverkar de elektriska kretsarna sa, att kassaregistret kan arbeta, utan att avlasningsanordningen paverkas. Devices are available for entering clerical and customer numbers and product information in the recording facility from the cash register's keyboard, in the event that cards are not used. If the customer or clerk number card is lost or damaged, the clerk reads the vardena frail the damaged card or if the card is missing, from a liggarc or someone else cold, savida he does not have the vardena in memory. For manual entry of product data, the classification lines 7 and 8 are used, as will be described in the 101st. When these different entries have been made, transaction keys in row 1 are used on the cash register's keyboard, to control the machine operation. A "clerk number" key controls the entry of clerk number data, a "customer number" key is used to control the entry of customer number data and a commodity key is used to control the entry of item data. The depression of the steering wheel key during data entry operations affects the electrical circuits so that the cash register can operate without affecting the unloading device.

Inre lasanordningar och inre forbindningar Ora vid nedtryckningen av »expeditnum mer»-. eller »kundnummer»-tangenten avlasningsanordningen overksam. Dessa styranordningar lasa aven tangenterna i rad 1, dá ett kort infOrts i avlasningsanordningen. Vidare finnes en lasanordning, vilken gar avlasningsanordningen overksam, da. en varubeskrivning inf ores medelst kassaregistrets tangentbord och vice versa. Internal lasing devices and internal connections Ora when depressing «expeditnum mer» -. or the "customer number" key unloading device idle. These control devices also read the keys in row 1, when a card is inserted into the unloading device. Furthermore, there is a welding device, which makes the unloading device inactive, then. a product description is entered using the cash register's keyboard and vice versa.

Kassaregistrets,avlasningsanordningens och uppteckningsanordningens operationer, programmeringen och anslutningen av dessa mekanismer till -varandra for att astadkomma en remsa med den erforderliga informationen, komma att klart framga av foljande, detaljerade beskrivning. The operations of the cash register, the unloading device and the recording device, the programming and the connection of these mechanisms to each other in order to provide a strip with the required information, will become clear from the following, detailed description.

Alediumavlasningsanordningen. Aledium unloading device.

Mediumavlasningsanordningen avlaser data, kort, kvitton eller andra databarande organ, som inforas i anordningen och styra uppteckningsanordningen, sh att dessa data inforas pa remsan. Avlasnin.gsanordningen styr aven kassaregistret, sä att dessa hada komponenters operationer samordnas pa ratt satt. The medium reading device reads data, cards, receipts or other data-bearing means which are inserted into the device and controls the recording device so that this data is entered on the strip. The unloading device also controls the cash register, so that the operations of these two components are coordinated in the correct manner.

Avlasningsanordningen i foreliggande utfOringsform liar kapacitet nog att avlasa en identifieringskolumn och trettio datakolmnner par ett kort, kvitto eller annat databarande organ, varvid varje kolunm kan vara perforerad i vart och ett av fern lagen. Av den foljande beskrivningen kornmer det att framga, att avlasningsanordningens kapacitet betraffande antalet kolumner och antalet lagen I varje kolunm blott waits sasom eLt exempel och att kapaciteten kan varieras titan foregripande av uppfinningen. The unloading device in the present embodiment has the capacity to unload an identification column and thirty data columns into a card, receipt or other data-carrying means, each column being perforated in each of the four layers. From the following description it will be apparent that the capacity of the unloading device regarding the number of columns and the number of layers in each column is merely as an example and that the capacity can be varied titanium anticipating the invention.

Kortschakt och styrorgan. Card shaft and guide means.

Sasom bast framgar av fig. 6, 7A, 7B och 11 ãr avlasningsanordningen forsedd med ett schakt 130 for de kort, kvitton eller andra med uppteckningar forsett organ, som skola avlasas. Schaktet utgilres av en framre plat 131 och en bakre plat 132 vilka skiljas at av en distansskiva 133 (fig. 7A och 11) och stracker sig frail en vertikal slits i maskinens hOgra sida, sasom visas i fig. 7B, at vanster till en hjalpgavel 287. Schaktets utstrackning at hOger, sasom visas i fig. 7A och 7B, mOjliggor genorn den vertikala slitsen i maskinens hogra sida, att upptecknade kort eller dylikt av varje onskad storlek kunna avlasas av avlasningsanordningen, sa lange som kodperforeringarna aro ratt placerade i ett horn pa kortet. De framre och bakre platarnas, 131 resp. 132, ovre kanter aro utskurna vid 134 och 135 i,den centrala delen (fig. 11), for att korten skola kunna skjutas tillraekligt langt in i schaktet for att komma i raft lage. Platens 131 ovre ande är bojd utat, sa att en tratt bildas, vilket underlattar inforandet av korten i schaktet — — samt leder korten till ratt lage i forhallande till avkanningsorganen. As can be seen from Figures 6, 7A, 7B and 11, the unloading device is provided with a shaft 130 for the cards, receipts or other means provided with records, which are to be unloaded. The shaft is gilded by a front plate 131 and a rear plate 132 which are separated by a spacer plate 133 (Figs. 7A and 11) and extends from a vertical slot in the right side of the machine, as shown in Fig. 7B, to the left of an auxiliary end 287. The extent of the shaft to the right, as shown in Figs. 7A and 7B, allows the vertical slot in the right side of the machine to allow recorded cards or the like of any desired size to be unloaded by the unloading device, as long as the code perforations are placed in a horn. on the card. The front and rear plates, 131 resp. 132, upper edges are cut out at 134 and 135 in, the central part (Fig. 11), so that the cards can be pushed far enough into the shaft to get into the raft position. The upper spirit of the plate 131 is bent outwards, so that a funnel is formed, which facilitates the insertion of the cards into the shaft - - and leads the cards to the steering wheel position in relation to the sensing means.

I avlasningsanordningens holje finnas i samverkan med kortschaktet 130 organ for att styra inforandet av kort eller dylika medlar i avlasningsanordningen och for att temporart hada dylika medlar, sedan de avlasts och utskjutits Fran avlasningsanordningen. In the housing of the unloading device there are in cooperation with the card shaft 130 means for controlling the insertion of cards or similar means in the unloading device and for temporarily having such means, after they have been unloaded and ejected from the unloading device.

Avlasningsanordningen Sr overst pa framsidan f8rsedd med en fiirdjupning 139 (fig. 1 och 6) mot kortschaktet 130. Fordjupningens 139 hredd Sr mindre an bredden ph de kort, som normalt avlasas av avlasningsanordningen, men Sr tillrackligt bred for att handen pa en person, som insatter ett kort, skall fà plats i den, vilket underlattar placeringen av kortet i schaktet 130. Den bortskurna delen 134 pa den framre platen 131 pa sehaktet är utformad sa, att den motsvarar formen ph fOrdjupningen 139. The unloader is at the top of the front provided with a recess 139 (Figs. 1 and 6) against the card shaft 130. The width of the recess 139 is less than the width of the cards normally unloaded by the unloader, but is wide enough to hold the hand of a person who inserts a card, shall fit in it, which facilitates the placement of the card in the shaft 130. The cut-off portion 134 of the front plate 131 of the saw shaft is formed so as to correspond to the shape of the recess 139.

Tva andorgan, 140 och 141 (fig. 1 ()eh 6) arc medelst bultar 142 anbragta vid en gavel 143, som bildar en del av avlasningsanordningens ovre yta. Menan dessa andorgan stracker sig en genomskinlig styrplatta 144, SOM dr fOrsedd med halvcirkelformade urtagningar 145 och 146 for att kortet lattare skall kunna grip as. Two breathing means, 140 and 141 (fig. 1 () eh 6) arc by means of bolts 142 arranged at a gable 143, which forms a part of the upper surface of the unloading device. However, these breathing means extend a transparent guide plate 144, which is provided with semicircular recesses 145 and 146 so that the card can be gripped more easily.

Da man onskar infora ett kort, kvitto eller dylikt i avlasningsanordningen i och for avlasning, fattas kortet av expediten och infOres I kortschaktet 130. Fordjupningen 139 giver utrymme at handen i likhet med styrplattan 144, vilken fores bakht, sa att kortschaktet 130 är tillgangligt. When it is desired to insert a card, receipt or the like in the unloading device for unloading, the card is taken by the clerk and inserted into the card shaft 130. The recess 139 provides space for the hand, like the guide plate 144, which is lined behind, so that the card shaft 130 is accessible.

Sâ snarl ett aven enda del bestaende kort har ratt inforts for avlasning, som beskrives ne–dan, drager expediten, eller den som skoter anlaggningen, tillbaka handen, varefter styrplattan 144 atergar till det i fig. 6 visade laget. As soon as a single part of the existing card has been inserted for unloading, as described below, the clerk, or the person shoveling the installation, withdraws the hand, after which the guide plate 144 returns to the layer shown in Fig. 6.

Da kortet fullstandigt avlasts skjuter darfor lampade organ kortet uppat nr kortschaktet 130. When the card is completely unloaded, therefore, the lamped means push the card upwards when the card shaft 130.

Kortschaktets bakre plat 132 ar forsedd med trettioen kolumner mad hal 170 (fig. 6 och 11), vilka kolumner Arc fordelade Over platen omedelbart under platens ovre kant. Var och en av namnda kolumner innehaller fern hat, vilka Arc jamnt fordelade i vertikalled pa platen och vilka hal tillAta avkanningstappar 171 att komma i berating med kortet, de. detta dr i avlasningslage. Platens 132 ovre del dr aven forsedd med tre storre hal 172, genom vilka inriktningstapparna 173, 174 och 175 (fig. 7A och 7B) passera, f5r alt inrikta kortet i ratt avlasningslage. Tapparna 173, 174 och 175 gh aven genom inriktningshalen i kortet, for att forhindra att kortet avlagsnas ur avlasningslaget innan avlasningsanordningens operationscykel f ullbordats. Platens 132 ovre del ar aven forsedd med ett flertal hal 176 (fig. 11). Genom ett i forvag utvalt hal av dessa hal passerar en butiksidentifieringstapp 177, vilken kontrollerar samtliga kundnummerkort, sasom tidigare namnts, varigenom tillfOrsakras att dylika kart antingen utgivits av eller aro avsedda far den butik, som utnyttjar uppteckningsanlaggningen. Platen 132 Sr Oxen forsedd med en slits 174, genom vilken stoppytan 179 ph en lamplig kortstoppanordning passerar. The rear plate 132 of the card shaft is provided with thirty-one columns with hall 170 (Figs. 6 and 11), which columns Arc distributed over the plate immediately below the upper edge of the plate. Each of the said columns contains four hats, which arc are evenly distributed vertically on the plate and which are allowed to allow scanning pins 171 to come into contact with the card, de. this dr in unloading law. The upper part of the plate 132 is also provided with three larger slides 172, through which the alignment pins 173, 174 and 175 (Figs. 7A and 7B) pass, for aligning the card in the steering unloading position. The pins 173, 174 and 175 gh also pass through the alignment hole in the card, to prevent the card from being removed from the unloading layer before the unloading device operating cycle is completed. The upper part of the plate 132 is also provided with a plurality of halves 176 (Fig. 11). A pre-selected hall of these halls passes a store identification pin 177, which checks all customer number cards, as previously mentioned, thereby ensuring that such cards are either issued by or are intended for the store that uses the recording facility. The plate 132 Sr Taurus is provided with a slot 174, through which the stopping surface 179 ph passes a suitable card stopping device.

Den framre platen 131 uppvisar en oppning (fig. 11), genom vilken ett klamblock 181 (fig. 6 och 7A) kan passera for att fastklamma det kort, som skall avlasas, mot den bakre platen 132, sa att kortet kvarhalles i avlasningslage och hindras &An att glida under avlasningsoperationen. The front plate 131 has an opening (Fig. 11) through which a staple block 181 (Figs. 6 and 7A) can pass to clamp the card to be unloaded against the rear plate 132, so that the card is retained in the unloading position and prevented & An from slipping during the unloading operation.

Malian den franare platen 131 och den bakre platen 132 finnes en distansplatta 133 (fig. 7A och 11) far alt Italia de hada platarna pa onskat avstand fran varandra och fOr att medgiva att ett kort placeras mellan pi:Marna. PA distansplattan 133 dr anordnad en ornkopplarmekanism, vilken paverkas av kortet for atk starta avlasningsanordningen, da kortet inforts riktigt i schaktet. En arm 185 (fig. 11 och 12) ar anbragt pA distansplattan 133 medelst en tapp 186 och armen uppbar vid sin ovre ande ett da.rpa. medekst en tapp 187 vridhart lagrat L-format organ 188, vilket Sr fOrsett med tva upphojda partier 189 och 190. En integrerande del 191 av armen 185 ar hojd bakat, sa att forankringsorgan bildas for en fjader 192,, vilken vid sin andra ande ar fastsatt vid ett utbojt Ora 193 pa del Lformade organet 188. Fjadern stravar all halla organet 188 i det i fig. 11 visade laget. Ungefar mitt pa armen 185 Sr fastsatt en fOrlangning 194, vilken Ar anordnad att samverka riled en snappstromstallares paverkningsorgan. Stromstallaren dr forsedd med kontakter SC23a1 samt fastsatt vid skenan 202. Malian the front plate 131 and the rear plate 132 there is a spacer plate 133 (Figs. 7A and 11) for all of the had plates at the desired distance from each other and to allow a card to be placed between the pi: Marna. A spacer coupling mechanism is provided on the spacer plate 133, which is actuated by the card to start the unloading device, when the card is inserted correctly in the shaft. An arm 185 (Figs. 11 and 12) is mounted on the spacer plate 133 by means of a pin 186 and the arm carries at its upper end a drop. with a pin 187 rotatably mounted L-shaped member 188, which is provided with two raised portions 189 and 190. An integral part 191 of the arm 185 is raised high, so that anchoring means are formed for a spring 192, which at its second end is attached to a bent Ora 193 on the L-shaped member 188. The spring struts all the hollow member 188 in the layer shown in Fig. 11. Approximately in the middle of the arm 185, an extension 194 is fixed, which is arranged to cooperate with the actuating means of a snap-current switch. The power switch is equipped with contacts SC23a1 and attached to the rail 202.

DA. ett kort infOres neat i kortschaktet 130 och sedan fores At vanster, kornmer kortets nedre del i kontakt med den upphojda ytan 190 och kortets vanstra kant kornmer 1 kontakt med den upphOjcla ytan 189. Harigenom vrides organet 188 och armen 185, pa vilken det Ar fastsatt, At vanster, moturs, runt tap-pen 186, sasom visas i fig. 11. FOrlangningen 194 pa armen 185 Or, vid en sadan rorelse, kontakt med paverkningsorganen for kontakterna SC23a1, varigenom dessa kontakter slattas. Hdrvid fullhordas en krets, som startar avlasningsanordningen, sasom kommer att fullstandigt beskrivas yid genomgangen av de elektriska kretsarna. DA. a card is neatly inserted into the card shaft 130 and then inserted to the left, the lower part of the card is in contact with the raised surface 190 and the left edge of the card is in contact with the raised surface 189. At the left, counterclockwise, around the pin 186, as shown in Fig. 11. The extension 194 on the arm 185 Or, in such a movement, contact with the actuating means of the contacts SC23a1, whereby these contacts are smoothed. This completes a circuit which starts the unloading device, which will be fully described in the review of the electrical circuits.

Av fig. 11 framgar, att det ar nodvandigt for att armen 185 skall svangas moturs och darvid paverka stromstallaren sa, att kontakterna SC23a1 slutas, att det Inforda kortet gor kontakt med saval ytan 189 som ytan 190 ph organet 188. Om kortet endast cores fullstandigt nedat utan att Oxen fOras at vans- 8- - ter, sasom visas i fig. 11, kommer det endast att anligga mot ytan 189 pa namnda organ. Detta resulterar i att organet 188 svanges medurs runt tappen. 187, utan att den nodvandiga svangningsrorelsen tillfores armen 185 med forlangningen 194 for pa.verkan av stromstallaren. Om kortet icke Fares tillrackligt langt ner for kontakt med ytan 190 pa organet 188, innan det fiires till kontakt med ytan 189 kommer organet 188 endast att svangas moturs runt tappen 187, utan att nagon vridningsrorelse tillfores armen 185 och dess forlangning 194 for paverkning av stromstallaren. Ovansta.ende omkopplingsmekanism tillforsakrar darfor att kortet, som skall avlasas, blir ratt infort i avlasningsanordningens schakt, innan avlasningsanordningens startstromstallare kan paverkas av niimnda kort. Fig. 11 shows that it is necessary for the arm 185 to pivot counterclockwise and thereby actuate the switch so that the contacts SC23a1 are closed, that the Insert card makes contact with both the surface 189 and the surface 190 ph the member 188. If the card only runs completely without the Taurus being moved to the left, as shown in Fig. 11, it will only abut the surface 189 of said member. This results in the member 188 being pivoted clockwise around the pin. 187, without the necessary oscillating movement being supplied to the arm 185 with the demand 194 for the action of the generator. If the card is not moved far enough down for contact with the surface 190 of the member 188, before being brought into contact with the surface 189, the member 188 will only be pivoted counterclockwise around the pin 187, without any rotational motion being applied to the arm 185 and its demand 194 to actuate the switch. . The above switching mechanism therefore ensures that the card to be unloaded is wheel inserted into the shaft of the unloading device before the starting current switch of the unloading device can be affected by the said card.

Konventionella organ kunna finnas for att begransa kortets inforing i avlasningsanordningens schakt vid avlasning. Conventional means may be provided to limit the insertion of the card into the shaft of the unloading device during unloading.

DO ett ratt insatt kort bibringar armen 185 (fig. 11) en svangningsrorelse moturs, varigenom kontakterna SC2,3a1 slutas, kommer en magnet L20 (fig. 13) att magnetiseras och vrida silt ankare 212 medurs, sasom visas i fig. 13 och en havarm 214, som samverkar med en arm 217 och en axel 215, vid vilken de Oro fastsatta, komma att vridas moturs medelst en tapp 211 runt namnda axels vridningsaxel. DO a steering wheel inserted card imparts to the arm 185 (Fig. 11) an oscillating movement counterclockwise, thereby closing the contacts SC2,3a1, a magnet L20 (Fig. 13) will be magnetized and turn the silt armature 212 clockwise, as shown in Fig. 13 and a sea arm 214, which cooperates with an arm 217 and a shaft 215, to which the Oro are attached, will be rotated counterclockwise by means of a pin 211 about the axis of rotation of said shaft.

Motursrorelse hos havarmen 214, da magneten L20 magnetiseras, medfor att ett Ora 246 pa namnda havarm samverkar med en arm 247 f5r att nedtrycka ett paverkningsorgan i en snappstromstallare, vilken är monterad i maskinstativet och innehaller kontakter L20b1, sa att namnda kontakter oppnas. Kontakternas L20b1 funktion kommer att klarlaggas i samband med genomgangen av kretsarna. Counterclockwise movement of the sea arm 214, when the magnet L20 is magnetized, causes an Ora 246 on said sea arm to cooperate with an arm 247 to depress a actuator in a snap current switch, which is mounted in the machine frame and contains contacts L20b1, so that said contacts are opened. The function of the contacts L20b1 will be clarified in connection with the review of the circuits.

Konventionella organ kunna finnas f8r att skjuta ut kortet fran avlasningsanordningen, dO avlasningsoperationen fullbordats. Conventional means may be provided for ejecting the card from the unloading device when the unloading operation is completed.

Inriktningsorgan for kortet och organ for att identifiera butiken. Alignment means for the card and means for identifying the store.

Organ finnas for att inrikta kortet och for att kvarhalla det i avlasningslage i och fOr avlasning i avlasningsanordningen. De tre inriktningstapparna 173, 174 och 175 (fig. 7A, 7B, 10 och 14) Oro glidbart anordnade i motsvarande hal 172, vilka ga genom ett tvarstag 202 och den bakre platen 132 i kortscbaktet 130, varvid namnda tappar ingripa i motsvarande hal i kortet, som skall avlasas, for att halla namnda kort i raft avlasningslage. Means are provided for aligning the card and for retaining it in unloading mode in and for unloading in the unloading device. The three alignment pins 173, 174 and 175 (Figs. 7A, 7B, 10 and 14) are arranged slidably in the corresponding hall 172, which pass through a transverse bar 202 and the rear plate 132 in the short shaft 130, said pins engaging in the corresponding hall in the card, which is to be unloaded, to keep said card in the raft unloading mode.

Inriktningstapparna 173, 174 och 175 Oro fastsatta pa. armar 254, 255 och 256, vilka samtliga Oro fastsatta vid en ph axeln 215 roterbart anbragt hylsa 257 fOr att de skola bibringas samma rorelse runt namnda axel och for att inriktningstapparna skola foras in till och ut ur verksamt kortinriktningslage. The alignment pins 173, 174 and 175 Oro fixed on. arms 254, 255 and 256, all of which are rotatably mounted on a shaft 215 so as to provide them with the same movement about said shaft and for the alignment pins to be inserted into and out of effective short alignment law.

Ingrepps- och frigOringsrorelse bibringas de inriktningstapparna uppbarande armarna me-deist ett ok 258 (fig. 14), vilket Or fritt lag-rat ph axeln 215. En arm 259 pa namnda ok Or fi5rsedd med en tapp 260, som samverkar med en plan yta pa armen 256. En fjader 262 forenar eftergivligt armarna 256 och 259 med varandra. Okets 258 andra arm 263 Or forsedd med en kamslits, som upptager en rulle 265, vilken Or fastsatt pa en arm 266, som Or fritt lagrad p0 en axel 22,8 och vrides medurs runt denna axel av en fjader, som Or forenad riled nanynda arm och med maskinstativet. Pa armen 266 Or en tapp 268 fastsatt, vilken av en icke visad fjader pressas mot en yta p0 armen 217, vilken, sasom nammts, Or fastsatt vid havarmen 214, sa att de utfora samma rOrelse. Engaging and releasing movement is imparted to the alignment pins carrying the alignment pins by means of a yoke 258 (Fig. 14), which is freely mounted on the shaft 215. An arm 259 on said yoke is provided with a pin 260 which cooperates with a flat surface. on the arm 256. A spring 262 resiliently unites the arms 256 and 259 with each other. The second arm 263 of the yoke 258 is provided with a cam slot which receives a roller 265 which is attached to an arm 266 which is freely mounted on a shaft 22,8 and is rotated clockwise about this shaft by a spring which is joined by a joint. arm and with the machine stand. Attached to the arm 266 is a pin 268 which is pressed by a spring (not shown) against a surface of the arm 217 which, as mentioned, is attached to the sea arm 214 so that they perform the same movement.

Sasom redan angivits medf Or magnetiseringen av magneten L20 (fig. 13) vid ratt insattning av ett kort eller liknande i avlasningsanordningen att havarmen 214 och tillhorande arm 217 foras moturs runt axeln 2.15, sasom visas i fig. 13. Fjadern orsakar att tappen 268 och armen 266, pa vilken den Or fastsatt, folja armen 217, varvid armen 266 vrides medurs runt axeln 228. Samverkan mellan rullen 263 pa armen 266 och kamslitsen i armen 263 pa oket 258 orsakar att oket vrides runt axeln 215 (fig. 14), varigenom tappen 260 pa okarmen 259 bringas till samverkan med ytan ph inriktningstapparmen 256, sfr att namnda arm och de hada andra inriktningstapparmarna 254 och 255, vilka armar Oro forenade med varandra medelst hylsan 257, svangas moturs runt axeln 215. Inriktningstapparmarna 254, 255 och 256 forflyttas salunda genom Mien 172 och motsvarande hal i kortet, som inforts i avlasningsanordningen, for att raft inrikta kortet for avlasning. As already indicated, the magnetization of the magnet L20 (Fig. 13) upon wheel insertion of a card or the like into the unloading device causes the sea arm 214 and associated arm 217 to be moved counterclockwise about the axis 2.15, as shown in Fig. 13. The spring causes the pin 268 and the arm 266, on which it is attached, follows the arm 217, the arm 266 being rotated clockwise about the shaft 228. The interaction between the roller 263 on the arm 266 and the cam slot in the arm 263 on the yoke 258 causes the yoke to rotate about the shaft 215 (Fig. 14). whereby the pin 260 on the yoke arm 259 is brought into engagement with the surface ph of the alignment pin arm 256, so that said arm and the other alignment pin arms 254 and 255, which arms are joined together by the sleeve 257, are pivoted counterclockwise about the shaft 215. The alignment pin arms 256, is thus moved through the Mien 172 and the corresponding hall in the card, which is inserted into the unloading device, to raft align the card for unloading.

Det bor observeras att for det fall att halen i kortet av Wagon anledning icke skulle sammanfalla med armarna 254, 255 och 256 kommer inriktningsmekanismen icke att kunna fullborda sin rOrelse framat till det slutliga laget och inriktningstapparna komma darfOr icke att skada kortet, genom. att Ora hal i det. Del erinras om att rOrelse bibringas inriktningstapparmarna medelst oket 258 och att oket i sin tur omstalles medelst armen 266, vilken arm svanges av fjadern, da armens 217 yta icke langre blockerar tappen 268 ph armen 2.66. Fjadern har sadan kraft att den kan omstalla det inriktningstapparna paverkade lanksystemet, da inget hinder finnes i dessa tappars bana, men icke sa stor kraft att den kan pressa inriktningstapparna genom kortmaterialet, da kortets oppningar icke ligga i linje med tapparna. Tappinriktningsmekanismen kommer darfor endast att — — 9 arbeta, da ett med inriktningshal forsett kort är ratt infort i avlasningsanordningen for avlasning. It should be noted that in the event that the tail of the card for Wagon reason does not coincide with the arms 254, 255 and 256, the alignment mechanism will not be able to complete its movement until the final stroke and the alignment pins will therefore not damage the card, through. to Ora slippery in it. Part is recalled that motion is imparted to the alignment pin arms by the yoke 258 and that the yoke is in turn adjusted by the arm 266, which arm is pivoted by the spring, as the surface of the arm 217 no longer blocks the pin 268 ph the arm 2.66. The spring has such a force that it can adjust the alignment system affected by the alignment pins, as there is no obstacle in the path of these pins, but not so great that it can push the alignment pins through the card material, as the card openings are not in line with the pins. The pin alignment mechanism will therefore only work - - 9, since a card provided with an alignment hall is steered into the unloading device for unloading.

En forlangning 270 (fig. 7A och 10) pa inriktningstapparmen 254 är utformad for samverkan med ett paverkningsorgan pa en snappstromstallare for att styra kontakterna SC20ael och SC2Obel. Stromstallaren är fastsatt vid en konsol 272, som är fastsatt vid platen 287. Moturs rorelse hos armen 254 vid magnetiseringen av elektrornagneten L20 (fig. 13) medfor, att forlangningen 270 pa namnda arm kommer i kontakt med ett paverkningsorgan for stromstallaren, sa att kontakterna SC20ael slutas och kontakterna SC2Obel oppnas. Dessa kontakters funktioner vid uppteckningsanlaggningens arbete kommer att fOrklaras nedan vid beskrivningen av kretsschemat i fig. 43A till 43F. An extension 270 (Figs. 7A and 10) on the alignment pin arm 254 is configured to cooperate with an actuator on a snap current switch to control the contacts SC20ael and SC2Obel. The switch is attached to a bracket 272, which is attached to the plate 287. Counterclockwise movement of the arm 254 during the magnetization of the electromagnet L20 (Fig. 13) causes the extension 270 on said arm to come into contact with a actuating means for the switch, so that the contacts The SC20ael is closed and the SC2Obel connectors are opened. The functions of these contacts in the operation of the recording system will be explained below in the description of the circuit diagram in Figs. 43A to 43F.

Korthallningsorgan. Card holding means.

Organ finnas for att klamma fast kortet, som inf5rts i mediumavlasningsanordningen i avlasningslage, sá att kortet kvarhalles i det riktiga avlasningslaget. Ett klambloek 181 (fig. 6) är fastsatt vid tva ben 280, vilka aro fastkilade pa en axel 281 i avlasningsanordningens stativ. Klamblocket ãr fOrsett med spar, sasom exempelvis vid 282 (fig. 6, 7A och 7B), sá att avkanningstapparna i avlasningsanordningens avkanningsmekanism kunna ga fritt och placeras sa, att det kan fOrflyttas genom den bortskurna delen 180 (fig. 11) i den framre platen 131 pA kortschaktet for att sakert klamma fast ett kort eller kvitto i ratt lage under avlasningsoperationen. Means are provided for clamping the card inserted into the medium unloading device in the unloading layer so that the card is retained in the proper unloading layer. A staple block 181 (Fig. 6) is attached to two legs 280, which are wedged on a shaft 281 in the stand of the unloader. The clamp block is provided with grooves, such as at 282 (Figs. 6, 7A and 7B), so that the sensing pins in the sensing mechanism of the unloading device can move freely and be placed so that it can be moved through the cut-away part 180 (Fig. 11) in the front the plate 131 on the card shaft to securely clamp a card or receipt in the steering wheel during the unloading operation.

PA en konsol 283, vilken ãr fastsatt pa klamblockets 181 undersida, dr en rulle 284 fastsatt, vilken ar anordnad att samverka med en kamskiva 285 (fig. 6 och 21), som dr fastsatt vid en axel 286 i en hjalpsidogavel 287 (fig. 7A) i avlasningsanordningen och vid en konsol 288, som dr anbragt vid ett tvarstag 289 i avlasningsanordningens stativ. PA axeln 286 ar aven fastsatt en arm 290 (fig. 21), som ar forenad med en ph axeln 281 fritt lagrad havarm 292. En krokt yta 293 pa armen 290 dr anordnad att samverka med en forlangning 294 pa havarmen 292, vilken ar forsedd med en urtagning vid 295 for att upptaga en tapp 296, som dr fastsatt vid ankaret 297 pd. ett rela L21 av roterande typ, som ar anordnat i avlasningsanordningens stativ. On a bracket 283, which is fixed to the underside of the clamp block 181, there is a roller 284 fixed, which is arranged to cooperate with a cam disc 285 (Figs. 6 and 21), which is fixed to a shaft 286 in an auxiliary side end 287 (Fig. 7A) in the unloading device and at a bracket 288, which is mounted on a crossbar 289 in the stand of the unloading device. Attached to the shaft 286 is also an arm 290 (Fig. 21) which is joined to a phased shaft 281 freely mounted sea arm 292. A curved surface 293 on the arm 290 is arranged to cooperate with a extension 294 on the sea arm 292, which is provided with a recess at 295 to receive a pin 296, which is attached to the anchor 297 pd. a relay L21 of rotating type, which is arranged in the stand of the unloading device.

En snappstromstallare med kontakter L2lael och L21be1 ar medelst en konsol 300 fastsatt yid tvarstagets 289 undersida. Ett organ pa namnda stromstallare fOr paverkan av kontakterna ar anordnat att samverka med ett Ora 301 pa en arm 302, som Ar fritt lagrad pa axeln 281 och fastsatt vid havarmen 292 medelst en hylsa 303, sa att axeln och havarmen utfora samma rorelse. En yta 304 pa namnda arm anligger normalt mot en tapp 305, som ar fastsatt pa en arm 306, vilken dr fastkilad pa axeln 281. A snap current switch with contacts L2lael and L21be1 is attached to the underside of the crossbar 289 by means of a bracket 300. A means on said switch for influencing the contacts is arranged to co-operate with an ear 301 on an arm 302, which is freely mounted on the shaft 281 and attached to the sea arm 292 by means of a sleeve 303, so that the shaft and the sea arm perform the same movement. A surface 304 on said arm normally abuts a pin 305, which is fixed to an arm 306, which is wedged on the shaft 281.

Sasom kommer att beskrivas nedan, magn.etiseras magneten L21 vid den tidpunkt, da inriktningstapparna 173, 174 och 175 rora sig genom motsvarande inriktningshal i ett kort eller kvitto till sina arbetslagen. Magnetise-ring av magneten L21 medfor att ankaret 297 och tappen 296 vridas medurs, sasom visas i fig. 21. Genom att tappen 296 och armen_ 295 samverka, overfores en medursrorelse till havarmen 292 och armen 302, som ar fastsatt vid havarmen. Orat 301 pa armen 302 fOres till kontakt med stromstallarens paverkningsorgan for paverkan av kontakterna L2lacl och L2lbel. Harunder ornstalles ytan 304 pa armen 302 At vanster, sasom visas i fig. 21, ut ur blockeringslaget for tappen 305„ for att armen 306, axeln 281 och klambloeket med benen 280 skola tillatas att vridas medurs. Armen 306 och benen 280 aro, sasom namnts, fastkilade vid axeln 281. As will be described below, the magnet L21 is magnetized at the time when the alignment pins 173, 174 and 175 move through the corresponding alignment hall in a card or receipt to their work teams. Magnetization of the magnet L21 causes the armature 297 and the pin 296 to rotate clockwise, as shown in Fig. 21. By the pin 296 and the arm 295 cooperating, a co-movement is transmitted to the sea arm 292 and the arm 302, which is attached to the sea arm. The member 301 on the arm 302 is brought into contact with the actuating means of the switch for the action of the contacts L2lacl and L2lbel. Below this, the surface 304 of the arm 302 is turned to the left, as shown in Fig. 21, out of the blocking layer of the pin 305, so that the arm 306, the shaft 281 and the staple block with the legs 280 are allowed to rotate clockwise. The arm 306 and the legs 280 are, as they are called, wedged at the shaft 281.

Samtidigt pressas armen 290 av fjadern 291 att folja havarmen.s 292 rorelse, varigenom axeln. 286 och kamskivan 285 vridas medurs. Kamskivan 285 samverkar med rullen 284 for att pressa klamblocket 181 medurs runt axeln 281 till verksamt klamlage, i vilket kortet, som skall avlasas, klammes fast mot kortschaktets bakre plat 132. Blockets 181 rorelse till klamlage underlattas aven av tyngdkraften, emedan klamblockets riled tillhorande de-lam tyngdpunkt ligger ovanfor och till hoger om axelns 281 vridningsaxel, sasom visas i fig. 6. At the same time, the arm 290 is pressed by the spring 291 to follow the movement of the sea arm 292, whereby the shaft. 286 and the cam disc 285 are rotated clockwise. The cam disc 285 cooperates with the roller 284 to press the clamp block 181 clockwise around the shaft 281 to the effective clamping layer, in which the card to be unloaded is clamped to the rear plate 132 of the card shaft. The center of gravity is above and to the right of the axis of rotation of the shaft 281, as shown in Fig. 6.

DA avlasningen av kortet eller kvittot fullbordats, avmagnetiseras magneten L21 och ankaret 297, tappen 296, havarmen 292 och armen 302 vridas moturs, sasom framgar av fig. 21, under inverkan av en fjader 307, sorn ar forenad med avlasningsanordningens stativ och en lank 308, vilken i sin tur ar vridbart lagrad pa havarmen 292. DA havarmen 292 rar sig moturs samverkar forlangningen 294 pa namnda havarm med den krokta ytan 293 pA armen. 290 for att vrida namnda arm,. axeln. 286 och kamskivan 285 moturs, sasorn framgar av fig. 21. Armen 302, som ar fastsatt vid havarmen 292, vrides aven moturs, varvid orat 301 fOres ur kontakt med strainstallarens paverkningsorgan, sh att kontakterna L21ac1 Ater oppnas och kontakterna L2lbc1 Ater slutas. Armens 302 motursrorelse medfor aven att ytan 304 pa armen 302 flyttas At hoger till samverkan med tappen 305 pa armen 306 for att vrida namnda arm, axeln 281 och klamblocket med tillhorande delar moturs till det i fig. 6 visade laget, vilket kortet joke fastklammes. When the unloading of the card or receipt is completed, the magnet L21 and the armature 297, the pin 296, the lever arm 292 and the arm 302 are rotated counterclockwise, as shown in Fig. , which in turn is rotatably mounted on the sea arm 292. WHEN the sea arm 292 moves counterclockwise, the demand 294 on said sea arm cooperates with the curved surface 293 on the arm. 290 to twist the said arm,. axeln. 286 and the cam disc 285 counterclockwise, the saw is shown in Fig. 21. The arm 302, which is attached to the sea arm 292, is also rotated counterclockwise, the ear 301 being moved out of contact with the actuator means, so that the contacts L21ac1 Ater are opened and the contacts L2lbc1 Ater are closed. The counterclockwise movement of the arm 302 also causes the surface 304 of the arm 302 to be moved higher in cooperation with the pin 305 of the arm 306 to rotate said arm, the shaft 281 and the clamping block with associated parts counterclockwise to the layer shown in Fig. 6, which card is clamped.

Avkanningsdel. Survey part.

Avkanningsorganen aro anordnade att av- lAsa datavardena frau kortet eller kvittot, ko- — — lumn for kolumn, under den tid kortet fast-Mlles i avlasningslage i avlasningsanordningen medelst de tidigare beskrivna klam- och inriktningsorganen. Avkanningsorganen i f0- religgande utforingsform kunna avkanna upp till fern olika kort- eller kvittotyper. The scanning means are arranged to read the data values from the card or receipt, column by column, during the time the card is fixed in unloading position in the unloading device by means of the previously described clamping and aligning means. The scanning means in the present embodiment can scan up to four different card or receipt types.

Sasom tidigare angivits finnas avkanningsorgan for avkanning av upp till trettioen kolumner A kortet, av vilka den forsta kolumnen, som avkannes, vanligtvis är en identifieringskolumn for att identifiera den korttyp, som skall avlasas, medan de andra kolumnerna representera de data, som onskas upptecknade. Var och en av dessa kolumner kan innehalla perforeringar i vart och ett av fern ldgen. As previously stated, there are scanning means for scanning up to thirty-one columns A of the card, of which the first column to be scanned is usually an identification column for identifying the type of card to be read, while the other columns represent the data to be recorded. Each of these columns may contain perforations in each of the four layers.

De vid avlasningen av de trettio datarepresenterande kolumnerna anvanda avkanningsorganen komma nu att beskrivas. Dessa avkanningsorgan skilja sig i vissa fall fran de avkanningsorgan, som anvandas i samband med identifieringskolumnen, vilka senare organ beskrivas senare. De i fig. 6 visade fern avkanningstapparna 171 for avkanning av en av kortets datarepresenterande kolumner aro anordnade Over varandra och aro sinsemellan identiska. Varje avkanningstapp 171 utgores av en Bowdenkabel, vars framre ande ligger i motsvarande hal 170 (fig. 6 och 11) i den bakre ledplaten 132 i kortschaktet 130 och vars bakre ande dr forbunden med en grovre kontaktkontrollstang 315, som har en spets 316 av isolerande material. Denna stang 315 stodjes och styres i langdled i ett tvarstag 317, vilket ar anordnat mellan en sidogavel 210 till hoger (fig. 7B) och en sidogavel 318 till vanster (fig. 7A). The sensing means used in unloading the thirty data-representing columns will now be described. These sensing means differ in some cases from the sensing means used in connection with the identification column, which later means are described later. The four scanning pins 171 shown in Fig. 6 for scanning one of the data-representing columns of the card are arranged one above the other and are identical to one another. Each sensing pin 171 is constituted by a Bowden cable, the front end of which lies in the corresponding hall 170 (Figs. 6 and 11) in the rear baffle 132 of the card shaft 130 and the rear end of which is connected to a coarser contact control rod 315, which has a tip 316 of insulating material. This rod 315 is supported and guided longitudinally in a transverse rod 317, which is arranged between a side end 210 to the right (Fig. 7B) and a side end 318 to the left (Fig. 7A).

Var och en av avkanningstapparn.a 171 (fig. 6) dr anordnad att kunna roras i langdriktningen Indian sina andpunkter genom den framre stodskenan 202, som Ar anbringad mellan sidogavlarna, ett skydd 319 och en ytterligare stodskena 320, som dr anbringad mellan sidogavlarna. Skyddets 319 framre An-de inskjuter i stodskenan 202 och dess bakre ande i stodskenan 320. Each of the sensing pins 171 (Fig. 6) is arranged to be able to move its points in the longitudinal direction Indian through the front support rail 202, which is mounted between the side ends, a guard 319 and a further support rail 320, which is mounted between the side ends. The front end of the cover 319 projects into the support rail 202 and its rear spirit into the support rail 320.

Varje avkanningstapp 171 pressas at vans-ter (fig. 6) av tillhorande fjader, exempelvis fjadern 321, vilken utgOr en del av kontaktorganen for att forvandla de avkanda vardena till elektriska signaler, medelst vilka uppteckningsanordningen styres for uppteckning av data pd remsan. Each sensing pin 171 is pressed to the left (Fig. 6) by associated spring, for example the spring 321, which forms part of the contact means for converting the sensed values into electrical signals, by means of which the recording device is controlled for recording data on the strip.

Kontaktorganen aro gemensamma for avkanningstapparna for samtliga datarepresenterande kolumner pa. kortet samt framga tydligast pa fig. 6, 7A och 7B. Kontaktorganen aro anordnade mellan andgavlar 322 och 323, vilka stodjas i hjalpsidogavlar 287 och 324 av tva. tvarstag 325 och 326. The contact bodies are common to the scanning taps for all data-representing columns on. the card and most clearly shown in Figs. 6, 7A and 7B. The contact means are arranged between end caps 322 and 323, which are supported in auxiliary side ends 287 and 324 by two. crossbars 325 and 326.

Fern ingangsanslutningar 327, 328, 329, 3,och 331 aro anordnade mellan dndgavlarna, vilka vardera svara mot en mojlig datarepresenterande perforering i en kolumn och vilka aro elektriskt forenade med varandra Over en skena 332. Four input terminals 327, 328, 329, 3, and 331 are provided between the end caps, each corresponding to a possible data-representing perforation in a column and which are electrically connected to each other over a rail 332.

Sasom framgar av fig. 0 dr ena anden pa vane fjader 321 ansluten till tillhorande ingangsanslutning. En fjader Ar fastsatt vid vane till en datarepresenterande kolumn pa kortet horande ingangsanslutning, vilket innebar att trettio fjadrar dro forenade med ingangsanslutningen 327, vilka fjadrar vardera pressa tillhorande avkanningstapp At vans-ter, sa att den Ovre tappraden kan avkanna den ovre radens perforeringar pA kortet. PA analogt salt dro trettio fjadrar forenade med var och en av de ovriga anslutningarna for att pressa tillhOrande avkanningstappar at vanster. As can be seen from Fig. 0, one of the usual spring 321s is connected to the associated input connection. A spring is attached as usual to a data-representing column on the card belonging to the input connection, which meant that thirty springs were connected to the input connection 327, which springs each press the associated scanning pin . On analogous salt, thirty springs were joined together with each of the other connections to press associated sensing pins to the left.

Sasom visas i fig. 6 dro utgangsanslutningar 337, 338, 339, 340 och 341 anordnade till vanster em varje fjdderrad fOr de datares-- presenterande kolumnerna, vilka utgangsanslutningar aro gemensamma fOr kolumnerna och som svara mot halen tagna i ordning uppifran och nedat. As shown in Fig. 6, output terminals 337, 338, 339, 340 and 341 are arranged to the left of each quarter row of the data-presenting columns, which output terminals are common to the columns and which correspond to the tail arranged at the top and bottom.

Fjadrarna 321 aro anordnade att Ora kontakt med tillhorande utgangsanslutningar och darvid selektivt fullborda kretsar fran de gemensamma ingangsanslutningarna till en av de olika utgangsanslutningarna. Fjadrarna utfOra harigenom tva funktioner dvs. de pressa dels avkanningstapparna At vanster och dels bilda de kontakter i de av avkanningstapparna styrda kretsarna. The springs 321 are arranged to contact the associated output terminals and thereby selectively complete circuits from the common input terminals to one of the various output terminals. The springs thus perform two functions, ie. they press the sensing pins on the left and form the contacts in the circuits controlled by the sensing pins.

De fern utgangsanslutningarna 337, 338, 339, 340 och 341 aro forbundna med fern uttag 1338 i en sektion 1336 i en sifferpanel 1315 (fig. 43F) med dioder, vilken panel dr anordnad i uppteckningsanordningen 100. Uttagen 1338 kunna medelst proppfOrbindningar, exempelvis forbindningen 1337, anslutas till uttag, som 1339, i sifferpanelen 1315, vilken avert innehaller dioder, fOr utvaljning av de stansar som skola paverkas i enlighet rued avlasta data. FOr att schemat skull bliva enklare visas de trettio kontakter, som forbinda en ingangsanslutning med en utgangsanslutfling sasom en enkel kontakt, varvid kontakterna SC36a1 representerar de trettio kontakter, sum forbinda anslutningarna 327 och 337, kontakterna SC36a2 representera de trettio kontakter, som forbinda anslutningarna 328 och 338, kontakterna SC36a3 representera de trettio kontakter, som forbinda anslutningarna 329 och 339, kontakterna SC36a4 representera de trettio kontakter, som forbinda anslutningarna 330 och 340 och kontakterna SC36a5 reprcsentera de trettio kontakter, som fOrbinda anslutningarna 331 och 341. Kontakterna SC36a1, SC36a2, SC36a3, SC36a4 och SC36a5 i fig. 43F representera salunda de olika kontakter, vilka kunna styras vid avkanning av varje datarepresenterande kolumn pd kortet. The four output terminals 337, 338, 339, 340 and 341 are connected to four sockets 1338 in a section 1336 in a numerical panel 1315 (Fig. 43F) with diodes, which panel is arranged in the recording device 100. The sockets 1338 can be connected by means of plug connections, for example the connection 1337, is connected to sockets, such as 1339, in the number panel 1315, which avert contains diodes, for selection of the punches which are to be actuated in accordance with the data. To simplify the diagram, the thirty contacts connecting an input terminal to an output terminal are shown as a single connector, the contacts SC36a1 representing the thirty contacts, sum connecting the terminals 327 and 337, the contacts SC36a2 representing the thirty contacts connecting the terminals 328. 338, contacts SC36a3 represent the thirty contacts connecting terminals 329 and 339, contacts SC36a4 represent the thirty contacts connecting terminals 330 and 340 and contacts SC36a5 represent the thirty contacts connecting terminals 331 and 341. Contacts SC3a SC2a1 , SC36a4 and SC36a5 in Fig. 43F thus represent the different contacts which can be controlled when scanning each data representing column on the card.

I avkanningstapparnas normala tillbakadragna ldige komma tapparnas framre andar --- -11 att sammanfalla med kortschaktets 130 bakre plat 132, och spetsarna 316 pa de fOrlangda stangerna 315, vilka spetsar aro urtagna for att upptaga fjadrarna 321, komma att hálla fjadrarna ur kontakt med utgangsanslutningarna. In the normally retracted ends of the sensing pins, the front ends of the pins --- -11 will coincide with the rear plate 132 of the short shaft 130, and the tips 316 of the elongated rods 315, which tips are recessed to receive the springs 321, will keep the springs out of contact with the outlet. .

Da varje kolumn avkanningstappar frigores for att avkanna kortet komma de tappar, vilka befinna sig i lagen med hal, att kunna rora sig at vanster, sa att tillhorande fjadrar komma i kontakt med utgangsanslutningarna och fullborda kretsar fran ingangsanslutningarna till utgangsanslutningarna medan daremot tappar, som icke motsvaras ay hal fOrhindras att rOra sig at vanster, och darigenom halla sina tillhorande fjadrar ur kontakt med utgangsanslutningarna. As each column of scanning pins is released to scan the card, the pins which are in the law with slippage will be able to move to the left, so that associated springs come into contact with the output connections and complete circuits from the input connections to the output connections. corresponds to ay is prevented from moving to the left, thereby keeping its associated springs out of contact with the output connections.

Avkanningstapparnas rorelse frail deras tillbakadragna lagen till avkanningslagena styres av en serie armar 342 (fig. 6, 7A, 7B och 15) vilka vardera aro tilldelade en av de trettio datarepresenterande kolumnerna. Armarnas rorelse kontrolleras av en blockeringsstang 343, vilken ãr gemensarn for alla armarna samt av en for varje arm individuell kamskiva 344 i en rad kamskivor. Armarna dro vridbart lagrade ph ett tvarstag 345 samt styras i sidled av en kombinationsplat 346, som ãr fastsatt vid tvh block 347 och 348, vilka aro anbringade pa sidogavlarna 318 och 210. Armarna 342 pressas moturs, sasom framgar ay fig. 6, ay individuella fjadrar 349, vilka aro forenade med armarna 342 och uppatriktade oron 350 pa platen 346. The movement of the scanning pins from their retracted layers to the scanning layers is controlled by a series of arms 342 (Figs. 6, 7A, 7B and 15) which are each assigned to one of the thirty data representing columns. The movement of the arms is controlled by a blocking rod 343, which is common to all the arms and by an individual cam disc 344 in a series of cam discs. The arms are rotatably mounted on a transverse bar 345 and are guided laterally by a combination plate 346, which is fixed to two blocks 347 and 348, which are mounted on the side ends 318 and 210. The arms 342 are pressed counterclockwise, as shown in Fig. 6, in individual cases. springs 349, which are joined to the arms 342 and align the rests 350 on the plate 346.

Varje arm 342 är forsedd med en utskjutande del 351, som sarnyerkar med kamskivan, och med ett uppa.triktat finger 352, vilket ingriper med de fern avkanningstapparnas i tillhOrande kolumn stanger 315. Fingret 352 ph armen 342 stracker sig langs ena sidan ay kolumnens avkanningstappar, sasom bast framgar av fig. 6, 7A och 7B. Varje arm 342 är aven forsedd med en yta 353 for samverkan med blockeringsstangen 343, sa att aykanningstapparna 171 lianas i sina hogra lagen, fdrutom da. kortet avlases. Each arm 342 is provided with a protruding portion 351 which communicates with the cam disc, and with an upwardly directed finger 352 which engages the four sensing pins of the corresponding column rods 315. The finger 352 of the arm 342 extends along one side of the scanning pins of the column. , as shown in Figs. 6, 7A and 7B. Each arm 342 is also provided with a surface 353 for co-operation with the locking rod 343, so that the scanning pins 171 are aligned in their right layers, except then. the card is unloaded.

Blockeringsstangen 313 stracker sig over kamskiveraden och ãr i sina andar fOrsedd med triangulara justerstycken 354 och 238, vilka aro lagrade i forlangningar 355 och 356 pa blocken 347 och 348 (fig. 6 och 17). En arm 237 (fig. 13) är fastsatt pd. justerstycket 238 vid stangens 343 hogra ande, och denna arm pressas medurs av en fjader 239 samt ãr vridbart lagrad ph en lank 236. The blocking rod 313 extends over the row of cam discs and is in its spirit provided with triangular adjusting pieces 354 and 238, which are mounted in extensions 355 and 356 on blocks 347 and 348 (Figs. 6 and 17). An arm 237 (Fig. 13) is attached pd. the adjusting piece 238 at the right end of the rod 343, and this arm is pressed clockwise by a spring 239 and is rotatably mounted ph a lank 236.

Sasom redan namnts, medfOr magnetiseringen av magneten L20 Yid en avldsningsoperations borjan, att havarmen 214 vrides moturs, vilket framgar av fig. 13. Denna rorelse Overfores till stangen 343 medelst ken 236 och armen. 237, varvid stangen vrides moturs mot fjadern 239, varigenom armarna 342 (fig. 6) frigoras och styras av kamskivorna 344 i kamraden. As already mentioned, the magnetization of the magnet L20 Yid at the beginning of a holding operation causes the sea arm 214 to be turned counterclockwise, as shown in Fig. 13. This movement is transmitted to the rod 343 by means of the ken 236 and the arm. 237, the rod being rotated counterclockwise towards the spring 239, whereby the arms 342 (Fig. 6) are released and guided by the cam discs 344 in the cam row.

Da en avlasningsoperation fullbordats, avmagnetiseras magneten L20 och blockeringsstangen svanges medurs ay fjadern 239 (fig. 13) till det i figurerna yisade laget, i vilket laze kamarmarna blockeras, sa att de icke kunna rora sig at vanster. Den.na blockeringsfunktion ãr viktig, emedan, sasom kommer att beskrivas senare, en aterstallning ay kamraden sker efter fullbordad avlasningsoperalion. Da kamraden aterfores till utgangslaget, som en forheredelse for nasta avlasningsoperation, skulle vissa av armarna av sina mot- svarande kamskivor tinatas rorelse at vans-ter och harvid skulle en felaktig avlasning och uppteckning ske, savida de inte pO. na.got satt fOrhindrades att utfora en sadan rorelse. Della fOrhindras emellertid medelst blockeringsstangen. 343, vilken kyarhaller armarna 342, sa att de inte kunna gO. at vanster, sasom re- ' dan beskrivits. When a unloading operation is completed, the magnet L20 is demagnetized and the blocking rod is pivoted clockwise on the spring 239 (Fig. 13) to the layer shown in the figures, in which the laze chambers are blocked, so that they cannot move to the left. This blocking function is important, since, as will be described later, a recovery of the chamber row takes place after the unloading operation is completed. When the cam row is returned to the starting position, as a preparation for the next unloading operation, some of the arms of their corresponding cam discs would be thawed at the left and an incorrect unloading and recording would take place, unless they pO. na.got sat prevented from performing such a movement. Della is, however, prevented by means of the blocking rod. 343, which kyarhaller the arms 342, said that they can not gO. at vanster, as already described.

Kamraden (fig. 6, 15, 16, 16A och 17) innehaller trettiotva kamskivor, varav trettio kamskivor styra avkanningsorganen for de datarepresenterande kolumnerna och en kamskiva 357 (fig. 15) styr avkanningsorganen for rnediumidentifieringskolumnen. PO. sarnma axel 359, som de ovan beskrivna kamskivorna, finnas nio yridomkopplare med motsvarande kontaktarmar fOr ytterligare kontroll av mediurnavldsaren och vilka omkopplare rotera tillsammans med kamskivorna. Axeln 359 är lagrad i den hogra sidogaveln 210 (fig. 7B och 15) och i en plat 360 (fig. 7A och 15), som är borttagbart anordnad pa den yanstra sidogaveln 318. Platen 360 medgiver att kamraden kan borttagas for inspektion och justering. The cam row (Figs. 6, 15, 16, 16A and 17) contains thirty-two cam discs, of which thirty cam discs guide the scanning means for the data representing columns and a cam 357 (Fig. 15) controls the scanning means for the radium identification column. PO. In the same axis 359, as the cam discs described above, there are nine rotary switches with corresponding contact arms for further control of the media clock and which switches rotate together with the cam discs. The shaft 359 is mounted in the right side end 210 (Figs. 7B and 15) and in a plate 360 (Figs. 7A and 15) which is removably mounted on the left side end 318. The plate 360 allows the cam row to be removed for inspection and adjustment. .

En motor 333 (fig. 6, 7A, 7B och 17) arbetar da avlasningsanordningen är redo for operation och driver kamraden ett trettiosjattedels vary medurs Over en axel 361 (fig. 6, 7B och 17), en koppling 362 samt kugghjul 363, 364, 365, 366, 367, 368, 369 och 370 varje gang kopplingen 362, vilken ãr en envarvskoppling, omstalles. Harav foljer att kopplingen 362 maste ornstallas trettiosex ganger fOr varje fullstandigt vary hos avlasningsanordningen, inklusive en aterstallningsoperation. Kopplingen omstalles ay ett par kopplingsmagneter L22A och L22B, vilka, da. de magnetise-rats, draga ett blockeringsorgan 371 fran en tand 372 pa. kopplingen, sa att kopplingen kan vridas ett vary. Blockeringsorganets 371 rorelse yid magnetiseringen av magneterna L22A och L22B medfor aven att anden ph namnda blockeringsorgan komrner i kontakt med en tapp 373, som är fastsatt pa en omkopplararm 374, varigenom kontakter L22a1 slutas fOr andamal, som angives i saraband med beskrivningen av kretsarna. Kretsarna fOr magnetisering av magneterna L22A och L22B krarana aven att beskrivas i delta samband. A motor 333 (Figs. 6, 7A, 7B and 17) operates when the unloading device is ready for operation and drives the chamber row one-thirty-sixth vary clockwise across a shaft 361 (Figs. 6, 7B and 17), a clutch 362 and gears 363, 364 , 365, 366, 367, 368, 369 and 370 each time the clutch 362, which is a single-speed clutch, is converted. It follows that the coupling 362 must be repaired thirty-six times for each complete vary of the unloading device, including a recovery operation. The coupling is housed in a pair of coupling magnets L22A and L22B, which, da. they are magnetized, pulling a blocking member 371 from a tooth 372 pa. coupling, said that the coupling can be rotated a vary. The movement of the blocking means 371 during the magnetization of the magnets L22A and L22B also causes the said blocking means to come into contact with a pin 373, which is attached to a switch arm 374, whereby contacts L22a1 are closed for purposes indicated in connection with the description of the circuits. The circuits for magnetizing the magnets L22A and L22B can also be described in delta context.

Tva skivor 375 och 376 (fig. 7B och 17) 12— — av laminerad konstmassa dro fastsatta vid kopplingen 362 sa, att de rotera tillsammans med denna. Varje skiva ãr forsedd med en remsa av ledande material, som ror sig runt en del av periferien pa skivans ena sida. Pa avlasningsanordningens stativ anordnade kontaktarmar 377 samverka med den ledan- tiepa skivan 375 och bilda kontakter- na SC35a1, vilka aro slutna mellan fern och etthundratrettio grader av kopplingens vridningsvarv och kontaktarmar 378, vilka aven aro fastsatta pa stativet, samverka med den ledande rernsan pa skivan 376 och bilda kontakterna SC35b2. Dessa kontakters funktioner vid uppteckningsanlaggningens arbete kommer att forklaras, da kretsarna beskrivas. Two discs 375 and 376 (Figs. 7B and 17) of laminated pulp attached to the coupling 362 are said to rotate together therewith. Each disc is provided with a strip of conductive material, which moves around a part of the periphery on one side of the disc. Contact arms 377 arranged on the stand of the unloading device cooperate with the conductive disk 375 and form the contacts SC35a1, which are closed between four and one hundred and thirty degrees of the rotational turn of the coupling, and contact arms 378, which are also attached to the frame, cooperate with the conductive disk. 376 and form the contacts SC35b2. The functions of these contacts in the work of the recording system will be explained, as the circuits are described.

Kamskivorna i kamraden dro forsedda med en urtagning 379 (fig. 6), med sadan langd, att den kommer att ligga ,mitt emot den utskjutande delen 351 pa armen 342 endast i ett av kamradens lagen och har sadan slorlek alt, da delen 351 glider pa kammens periferi, armen kommer att befinna sig i sadant lage, att avkanningstapparna aro overksamma medan daremot, da urtagningen 379 ligger mitt emot delen 351, armen ken vridas moturs och darvid fora fingret 352 Al vanster, sã att avkanningstapparna frigoras for rorelse at vanster for att avkanna perforeringarna i motsvarande kolumn och sluta den erforderliga av kontakterna SC36a1— SC36a5. The cam discs in the cam row are provided with a recess 379 (Fig. 6), of such a length that it will lie, opposite the projecting part 351 on the arm 342 only in one of the layers of the cam row and have such a slippery surface as the part 351 slides on the periphery of the comb, the arm will be in such a position that the sensing pins are inactive while, on the other hand, when the recess 379 is opposite the part 351, the arm can be rotated counterclockwise and thereby the finger 352 to the left, so that the sensing pins are released for movement to inspect the perforations in the corresponding column and close the required of the contacts SC36a1— SC36a5.

Urtagningarna 379 pa kamskivorna 344 aro spiralformigt anordnade runt axeln 359 sã att en viss arm av armarna 342 frig& motsvarande avkanningstappar i ett visst lage hos karnraden. Vid foreliggancle utforingsform sker ingen avlasning av kortet, da kopplingen 362 forsta gangen omstalles, emedan detta endast innebar en forberedande operation i avlasningsanordningen, vilken ger de olika komponenterna i anordningen tid att intaga ratta avlasningslagen. Da kopplingen. °Installes andra gangen kommer den f8rsta kolumnen till vanster pa kortet att avkannas. Denna kolumn är identifieringskolumnen och avkanningsorganen for denna kolumn komma att beskrivas i det foljande. Da kopplingen omstalles tredje gangen kommer den andra kolumnen fran vanster pa kortet att avlasas. Derma ãr den forsta datarepresenterande kolumnen och di kopplingen Ater omstalles kommer den foljande datarepresenterande kolumnen att avlasas osv. The recesses 379 on the cam discs 344 are helically arranged around the shaft 359 so that a certain arm of the arms 342 releases corresponding corresponding pin pins in a certain position of the core row. In the present embodiment, no unloading of the card takes place, as the coupling 362 is for the first time converted, since this only involved a preparatory operation in the unloading device, which gives the various components of the device time to take up the steering wheel unloading law. Then the clutch. ° If installed a second time, the first column on the left of the card will be scanned. This column is the identification column and the sensing means for this column will be described in the following. When the connection is rearranged for the third time, the second column from the left of the card will be read. This is the first data-representing column and the Ater connection is redesigned, the following data-representing column will be read, and so on.

Avlasningsanordningen kan styras att avlasa samtliga trettioen kolumner pa kortet eller annat onskat antal. Denna styrfunktion utfores av »slut pa kortet»-kontakter. I foreliggande utforingsform har antagits att det finnes fern olika satser »slut pa kortet»-kontakter, en for vardera expedit- och kundnummerkortet och en for vardera tre varukort med olika langd. »Slut pa kortet»-kontakterna SC21b1, SC22b1, SC30b1, SC31b1 och SC32b1 utg8ras av fern roterbara omkopplarskivor resp. 384, 385, 386, 387 och 388 (fig. 15 och 16A), vilka aro fastsatta pa axeln 359 och samverka med motsvarande kontaktarmar 389. Var och en av »slut pa kortet»-omkopplarskiyorna bestar av en skiva 390 av konstmassa, i vilken pa bade sidor ãr inlagd en remsa 391 av ledande material. Remsorna av ledande material pa 'Ada sidorna aro forenade med en brygga av ledande material, som fir inlagd i skivans periferi. En av de hada kontaktarmarna 389, som samverkar med var och en av skivorna bildar ingangskontakten medan den andra bildar utgangskontakten. Det dr tydligt, att sa lange skivans ledande remsa är i kontakt med kontaktarmarna kommer strom att gá frau ingangs- till utgangsarmen. Da skivan emellertid vrides till ett lage, i vilket det isolerande konstmaterialet anligger mot den ena eller mot bade av de tvâ kontaktarmarna kommer den elektriska forbindelsen dememellan att brytas. Ytterligare fyra roterbara omkopplarskivor aro fastsatta pa axeln 359 till vanster om kamraden (fig. 15). Tvfl av dessa skivor, 392 och 393, samverka med kontaktarmar 394, varigenom kontakter SC33a3 och SC33a4 bildas. Dessa kontakter dro oppna i kamradens i avla.s. ningsanordningen utgangslage, men slutna i alla andra lagen hos kamraden. Konstruktionen av dessa »oppen i utgangslaget»-kontakter flr identisk med »slut pa kortet»-kontakterna, vilka nyss beskrivits, med undantag av att skivorna 392 och 393 aro anordnade att hallas i ett bestanit lage i forhallande till kamraden i avlasningsanordningen, medan de fern »slut pa kortet»-kontakterna aro anordnade att installas i olika ldgen runt kamraden. The unloading device can be controlled to unload all thirty-one columns on the card or other desired number. This control function is performed by "end of card" connectors. In the present embodiment, it has been assumed that there are four different sets of "end of card" contacts, one for each clerk and customer number card and one for each three goods cards of different lengths. »End of card» connectors SC21b1, SC22b1, SC30b1, SC31b1 and SC32b1 are made up of four rotatable switch discs respectively. 384, 385, 386, 387 and 388 (Figs. 15 and 16A), which are attached to the shaft 359 and cooperate with corresponding contact arms 389. Each of the "end of the card" switch cables consists of a disk 390 of artificial mass, in which on both sides is inlaid a strip 391 of conductive material. The strips of conductive material on both sides are joined by a bridge of conductive material, which is inserted into the periphery of the disc. One of the had contact arms 389, which cooperates with each of the discs, forms the input contact while the other forms the output contact. It is clear that as long as the conductive strip of the disc is in contact with the contact arms, current will flow from the input to the output arm. However, when the disc is rotated to a bearing in which the insulating art material abuts one or both of the two contact arms, the electrical connection between them will be broken. A further four rotatable switch discs are attached to the shaft 359 to the left of the cam row (Fig. 15). Doubt of these discs, 392 and 393, cooperate with contact arms 394, whereby contacts SC33a3 and SC33a4 are formed. These contacts were opened in the chamber of the avla.s. the starting device, but closed in all other layers of the chamber. The construction of these "open in the starting layer" contacts is identical to the "end of the card" contacts just described, except that the discs 392 and 393 are arranged to be held in a continuous layer relative to the chamber row in the unloading device, while they The "end of card" connectors are arranged to be installed in different layers around the chamber.

En tredje skiva, 395 (fig. 15 och 16) dr fast anordnad i forhallande till kamraden och avsedd att samverka med tva satser kontaktarmar 396 och 397, sá att en sats »sluten i utgAngslaget»-kontakter SC33b1 bildas. Denna skiva liknar de fOrut beskrivna skivorna, da den utgores av ett organ av konstmaterial, I vilket pa hada sidor inlagts metallremsor 398. I delta fall aro emellertid de hada metallremsorna icke fOrenade med varandra Over skivans periferi, utan dro elektriskt skilda fran varandra. En av kontaktarmarna 396 pa skivans ena sida verkar som ingangskontakt, median den andra kontaktarmen pa samma sida pa skivan verkar sasom utgangskontakt. Dell framgar darfor att kontakterna SC33b1 komrna att slutas, da bAda kontaktarmarna :396 och 397 aro i kontakt med metallremsan 398 pa skivan 395 under en viss del av skivans rotation. A third disc, 395 (Figs. 15 and 16) is fixedly arranged in relation to the chamber row and is intended to cooperate with two sets of contact arms 396 and 397, so that a set "closed in the output stroke" contacts SC33b1 is formed. This disc is similar to the discs described above, in that it consists of a body of art material, in which metal strips 398 have been inserted on either side. One of the contact arms 396 on one side of the disc acts as an input contact, while the other contact arm on the same side of the disc acts as an output contact. Dell therefore states that the contacts SC33b1 will be closed when both the contact arms 396 and 397 are in contact with the metal strip 398 on the disc 395 during a certain part of the rotation of the disc.

En fjarde skiva 399 pa kamradens vanstra sida liknar skivan 395 och fir anordnad att bilda speciella symbolkontakter SC34a1 i samverkan med kontaktarmarna 400 och 401. Skivan 399 dr, i motsats till skivan 395, som — — 13 Ar fast i forhallanae till kamraden, installbar runt kamraden, sá att dess relativa installning med avseende pa kamradens lage kan forandras efter onskan. A fourth disc 399 on the left side of the cam row is similar to the disc 395 and is arranged to form special symbol contacts SC34a1 in cooperation with the contact arms 400 and 401. The disc 399 dr, in contrast to the disc 395, which the chamber row, so that its relative installation with respect to the chamber row position can be changed as desired.

Samtliga roterbara omkopplarskivor och kamradens kamskivor aro anbringade pa axeln 359 (fig. 6 och 15) pa sadant satt att de latt kunna sammansattas och installas runt axeln, om sà onskas. Fastkilad pa axeln 359 Indian varje par av kamskivor 344 finnes en arm 402 (fig. 6 och 15), som är forsedd med en Oppning i varje ande. En karnskiva 344 anligger mot vardera sidan av armen 402 och alla kamskivorna Aro identiska till formen och uppvisa en urtagning 379 saint trettiosex langs omkretsen jamnt fOrdelade hal. Trearmade fjadrar 403 aro anordnade pa axeln. 359 vid armarna 402 och anligga mot narliggande kamskivor 344 for att liana dessa mot armarna 402 och darigenom ratt fordela kamskivorna pa axeln 359. All rotatable switch discs and cam cam discs are mounted on the shaft 359 (Figs. 6 and 15) in such a way that they can be easily assembled and installed around the shaft, if desired. Wedged on the shaft 359 Indian each pair of cam discs 344 is an arm 402 (Figs. 6 and 15), which is provided with an opening in each spirit. A core disc 344 abuts against each side of the arm 402 and all the cam discs Aro are identical in shape and have a recess 379 of about thirty-six circumferentially evenly distributed slides. Three-armed springs 403 are arranged on the shaft. 359 at the arms 402 and abut against adjacent cam discs 344 to align them with the arms 402 and thereby properly distribute the cam discs on the shaft 359.

De olika roterbara omkopplarskivorna, som aro anordnade ph axeln 359 aro uppbyggda pa liknande satt. Da ernellertid omkopplarskivorna ha elektriska kontaktytor langs periferierna dr det nodvandigt att Ora armarna 404, vilka aro fastkiIade pa axeln 359, nagot kortare An motsvarande armar 402, som anvandas tillsammans med kamskivorna 344, samt att anordna en urtagning 405 i Oversta Anden pa armarna 404 i stallet for en Opp-fling, som i armarna 402. The various rotatable switch disks arranged on the shaft 359 are constructed in a similar manner. However, since the switch disks have electrical contact surfaces along the peripheries, it is necessary to align the arms 404, which are attached to the shaft 359, slightly shorter than the corresponding arms 402 used with the cam disks 344, and to provide a recess 405 in the Supreme Spirit on the arms 404 in stall for an Opp-fling, as in the arms 402.

En stang 409 (fig. 6, 15, 16 och 16A) samverkar med halen i kamskivorna 344 och omkopplarskivorna, med oppningarna i armarna 402 och med alagningarna 405 i armarna 404 for att namnda organ icke skola kunna vridas i forhallande till varandra och till axeln 359. Laget av stangen 409 i forhallande till axeln 359 dr fixerat, emedan stangen gar genom oppningarna och urtagningarna i armarna 402 och 404, vilka, sasom redan sagts, aro fastkilade vid axeln 359. Emedan det dr onskvart att halla omkopplarskivorna 392, 393 och 394 i ett bestamt lage med avseende pa. axeln 359 fOr att erhalla ett hemma- eller utgangslage, aro dessa skivor endast forsedda med ett hal for stangen 409 och kunna icke vridinstallas i forhallande till axeln 359. De atersthende omkopplarskivorna och kamradens kamskivor aro emellertid fOrsedda med vardera trettiosex hal i narheten av periferien och kunna saledes installas I ett onskat 'age genom att stangen 409 drages bort och skivan eller kamskivan vrides runt axeln 359 till det onskade laget, varefter stangen 409 Ater skjutes in och sakrar samtliga kamskivor och omkopplarskivor mot vridning i forhallande till varandra. A rod 409 (Figs. 6, 15, 16 and 16A) cooperates with the tail in the cam discs 344 and the switch discs, with the openings in the arms 402 and with the alignments 405 in the arms 404 so that said means can not be rotated in relation to each other and to the shaft 359. The layer of the rod 409 in relation to the shaft 359 is fixed, while the rod passes through the openings and recesses in the arms 402 and 404, which, as already stated, are wedged at the shaft 359. While it is necessary to hold the switch discs 392, 393 and 394 in a particular law with respect to pa. shaft 359 In order to obtain a home or exit bearing, these discs are provided only with a shaft for the rod 409 and cannot be rotatably mounted in relation to the shaft 359. However, the remaining switch discs and the cam discs of the cam row are provided with thirty-six slits each near the periphery. can thus be installed in a desired position by pulling off the rod 409 and turning the disc or cam disc around the shaft 359 to the desired layer, after which the rod 409 is pushed back in and secures all the cam discs and switch discs against rotation in relation to each other.

Avkanningsorganen fOr avlasning av iden- tifieringskolumnen, vilken normalt ar den forsta kolumnen pa kortet, aro helagna pa avkanningsdelens vanstra sida, sasom visas i fig. 7A. Var och en av de vertikalt anordna- de tapparna 171, vilka bilda avkanningsorganen fOr identifieringskolumnen, aro i langdriktningen forskjutbart anordnade i ett holje 319, som stracker sig mellan stoden 202 och 320 pA samma salt, som avkanningstapparna for avlasning av de datarepresenterande kolumnerna pA kortet. Den bakre anden pa. var och en av avkanningstapparna 171 ar forbunden med en groyre kontrollstang 411 (fig. 8, 9 och 19), vars spets dr utformad av icke ledande material, varvid stangerna 411 uppbaras och styras i langdriktningen i tvArskenan 317. Varje tapp 171 i identifieringsclelen pressas At vanster av en individuell fjader 413 (fig. 20), vilken anligger mot spetsen 412 pa stangens 411 ande. Fjadern. 413 bildar liven en del av kontaktorganen for omvandling av avkanda data till elektriska signaler for styrning av uppteckningsanlaggningen, i enlighet med typen av det i avlasningsanordningen inforda kortet. The scanning means for reading the identification column, which is normally the first column on the card, are integral on the left side of the scanning part, as shown in Fig. 7A. Each of the vertically arranged pins 171, which form the sensing means for the identification column, are longitudinally displaceably arranged in a housing 319, which extends between the posts 202 and 320 pA of the same salt, as the sensing pins for unloading the data-representing card columns. . The rear second pa. each of the sensing pins 171 is connected to a groyre control rod 411 (Figs. 8, 9 and 19), the tip of which is formed of non-conductive material, the rods 411 being supported and guided in the longitudinal direction in the transverse rail 317. Each pin 171 in the identification clamp is pressed At the left of an individual spring 413 (Fig. 20), which abuts against the tip 412 on the end of the rod 411. The spring. 413, the web forms part of the contact means for converting sensed data into electrical signals for controlling the recording system, in accordance with the type of card inserted in the unloading device.

Sedan blockeringsstangen 343 (fig. 6) forts till silt icke blockerande lage av magneten ,L20 kontrolleras avkanningstapparnas 171 i identifieringsdelen rorelse fran deras tillbakadragna lagen till deras avkanningslagen av en arm 414 (fig. 9 och 21), som dr identisk med kamarmarna 342 och som dr vridbart lagrad pa tvarstaget 345 och drages moturs av en fjader 415 (fig. 21), som dr ansluten till namnda arm och plattan 346. Armen 411 styres av magneten L21 Over Ian-ken 308, vilken ar vridbart lagrad pa namnda magnet och ph en havarm 416, vilken dr vridbart lagrad pa ramdelen 287, varvid namnda lank pressas at vanster av fjadern ,307, sasom framgar av fig. 21. Vid havarmens 416 nedre ande ar fastsatt en tapp 417, vilken samverkar med en yta 418 ph armen 414 och darigenom styr armens rorelse. After the blocking rod 343 (Fig. 6) proceeds to the silt non-blocking layer of the magnet, L20, the sensing pins 171 in the identification part are controlled to move from their retracted layers to their sensing layers by an arm 414 (Figs. 9 and 21), which is identical to the chambers 342 and which is rotatably mounted on the crossbar 345 and is pulled counterclockwise by a spring 415 (Fig. 21) which is connected to said arm and the plate 346. The arm 411 is guided by the magnet L21 over the Ianken 308, which is rotatably mounted on said magnet and ph a sea arm 416, which is rotatably mounted on the frame part 287, the said length being pressed to the left of the spring, 307, as shown in Fig. 21. At the lower end of the sea arm 416 a pin 417 is attached, which cooperates with a surface 418 ph arm 414 and thereby controls the movement of the arm.

DA magneten L21 dr avmagnetiserad, sasom visas i fig. 21, installes havarmen 416 av Ian-ken 308 under inverkan av fjadern 307 sa, att tappen 417 sainverkar med ytan 418 for att blockera armen 414, som paverkas av fja.- dern. 415. Avkanningstapparna 171 (fig. 8) i identifieringssektionen kunna darfOr icke rOras mot identifieringslagena. When the magnet L21 is demagnetized, as shown in Fig. 21, the lever arm 416 is installed by the latch 308 under the action of the spring 307 so that the pin 417 cooperates with the surface 418 to block the arm 414, which is actuated by the spring. 415. The scanning pins 171 (Fig. 8) in the identification section can therefore not be moved against the identification layers.

Magnetiseringen av magneten L21 vid bor.- jan av en avlasningsoperation medfor att Milken 308 omstalles At hoger mot verkan av fjadern 307, varigenom havarmen 416 vrides medurs runt sin lagringspunkt saint flyttar tappen 417 ur blockeringslaget, dvs. fran ytan 418. Armen 414 kan darmed wida ..p moturs runt staget under inverkan av fjadern 415 och frigora tapparna fed. avkanming av kortets identifieringskolumn. Vid slutet av en kortavlasningsoperation avmagnetiseras magneten L21, varigenom lanken 308 kan omstallas At vanster av fjadern 307. Harvid vrides havarmen 416 moturs och bringar tappen 417 till anliggning mot ytan 418 for aft Aterfora armen 414 till det i fig. 21 visade 14— — kl a fig. 1103 svs rat 43: tif tel fh at ga sl fj Si tE st 4: ti 11 laget, varigenom de ay.' armen 414 styrda avkanningstapparna forflyttas till de tillbakadragna lagena. The magnetization of the magnet L21 at the beginning of a unloading operation means that the Milken 308 is redirected At higher against the action of the spring 307, whereby the sea arm 416 is rotated clockwise around its storage point and the pin 417 moves out of the blocking layer, i.e. from the surface 418. The arm 414 can thus wide ..p counterclockwise around the strut under the influence of the spring 415 and release the pins fed. removal of the card identification column. At the end of a short unloading operation, the magnet L21 is demagnetized, whereby the string 308 can be repositioned at the left of the spring 307. In this case, the sea arm 416 is turned counterclockwise and brings the pin 417 into abutment against the surface 418 for the Atterfora arm 414 to the 14 a fig. 1103 svs rat 43: tif tel fh at ga sl fj Si tE st 4: ti 11 lagt, varigenom de ay. ' the controlled sensing pins of the arm 414 are moved to the retracted layers.

En ytterligare stang 419 (fig. 9 och 19) intill var och en av stangerna 411, som ãr forsedd med en spets 420 av isolerande material uppbares och styres i langdriktningen av tvarskenan 317. Var och en av stangerna 419 pressas at vanster, sa.som framgar av fig. 19, genom en spetsen 420 paverkande fjader 421. Fjadern 421 bildar aven en del av kontaktanordningarna, vilka anvandas for uppteckning av en identifieringssymbol eller olika andra andamal, sasom kommer att beskrivas i det foljande. An additional rod 419 (Figs. 9 and 19) adjacent each of the rods 411, which is provided with a tip 420 of insulating material, is supported and guided in the longitudinal direction by the transverse rail 317. Each of the rods 419 is pressed to the left, said. as shown in Fig. 19, by a spring 421 acting on the tip 41. The spring 421 also forms part of the contact devices, which are used for recording an identification symbol or various other purposes, as will be described in the following.

Var och en av stangerna 419 styres av tillh8rande stang 411 och av en karnarm 422 (fig.9 och 15), vilken senare dr identisk med kamarmarna 342 och samverkar med kamskivan 357 pa kamaxeln 359 (fig. 15). En utskuren del 423 (fig. 8 och 9) finnes pa var och en av stangerna 411 och denna del samverkar med en utskarning 424 pa tillhorande stang 419. Stangerna 411 och 419 aro sit belagna i tvarskenan 317 att de utskurna delarna 423 och 424 aro forenade med varandra medelst en kula 426 i en urborrning 425, varvid kulans diameter dr still.- re an urborrningens langd. En forlangning 127 av urborrningen 425 underlattar inforandet av kulan 426 i urborrningen -vid hopmonteringen. Each of the rods 419 is guided by the associated rod 411 and by a frame arm 422 (Figs. 9 and 15), which later is identical to the cam arms 342 and cooperates with the cam disc 357 on the camshaft 359 (Fig. 15). A cut-out part 423 (Figs. 8 and 9) is found on each of the rods 411 and this part cooperates with a cut-out 424 on the associated rod 419. The rods 411 and 419 are located in the transverse rail 317 so that the cut-out parts 423 and 424 are joined together by means of a ball 426 in a bore 425, the diameter of the ball being equal to the length of the bore. An extension 127 of the bore 425 facilitates the insertion of the ball 426 into the bore during assembly.

Det itr tydligt, att sit ldnge stangen 411 kvarligger i det i fig. 9 visade tillbakadragna laget kommer dess utskarning 423 icke att ligga mittemot borrningen 425, varfor kulan 426 kommer att inskjuta fran borrningen in i utskarningen 424 pa stangen 419 och kvarhalla namnda avkanningsdel, sit att den icke kan forflyttas at vanster. It is clear that if its long rod 411 remains in the retracted layer shown in Fig. 9, its notch 423 will not lie opposite the bore 425, so the ball 426 will project from the bore into the notch 424 on the rod 419 and retain said scanning portion. sit that it can not be moved to the left.

Vid fullstandig rorelse at vanster av nagon av stangerna 411, vars avkanningstapp 171 passerar genom en perforering i kortets identifieringsdel kommer, sasom framgar av fig. 9, utskarningen 423 pa stangen 411 att ligga mitt emot urborrningen 125 i stangen 317. Stangen 419 kommer att omstallas at vanster medelst sin fjader 421 (fig. 20), da armen 422 Hires itt vanster, sasom framgar av fig. 9, av tillhOrande kamskiva 357 ph kamaxeln 359. DA utskarningen 423 ligger mittemot borrningen 425 kvarhaller kulan 426 icke stangen 419, eftersom kulan kommer att fOras ur sitt blockerande lage av en yta pa utskarningen 424 till det utrymme, som bildas av utskarningen 423. Stangen 419 kan salunda forflyttas at vanster, vilket framgar av fig. 9, under inverkan av sin fjader 413. Armen 422 och stangen 419 bringas darefter att atervanda till de i fig. 9 visade la.- gena vid fortsatt vridning av kamskivan 357, som styr armen 422. Upon complete movement, the left side of any of the rods 411, the scanning pin 171 of which passes through a perforation in the identification part of the card will, as shown in Fig. 9, the cut-out 423 of the rod 411 lie opposite the bore 125 in the rod 317. The rod 419 will be reposition on the left by means of its spring 421 (Fig. 20), when the arm 422 Hires the left, as shown in Fig. 9, of the associated cam disc 357 ph the camshaft 359. The cut-out 423 lies opposite the bore 425, the ball 426 does not retain the rod 419, will be moved out of its blocking layer by a surface of the cut-out 424 to the space formed by the cut-out 423. The rod 419 can thus be moved to the left, as shown in Fig. 9, under the influence of its spring 413. The arm 422 and the rod 419 is then brought back to the layers shown in Fig. 9 by further rotation of the cam disc 357, which guides the arm 422.

Kontaktorganen for identifieringsdelen bland avkanningsorganen visas i fig. 7A, 19 och 20 samt aro anordnade i samma stativdel, som kontaktorganen for den datarepresenterande delen, men aro elektriskt isolerade fran dessa. De delar av ingangsanslutningarna 327-331 och utgangsanslutningarna 337-341, vilka ligga mittfor stangerna 411 och 419 ha forminskad tvarsektionsarea, sasom framgar av fig. 19 och 20. Pa var och en av dessa forminskade delar pa Idgangsanslutningarna 337-341 ar anbringad en hylsa 428 av isolerande material med en flans 429 mot Overgangen mellart den forminskade och grOvre delen pa varje ingangsanslutning. En forsta gemensam skiva 430 dr fastsatt pa hylsorna 428 pa de Ire anslutningarna 337, 338 och 339 intill flansen och en andra gemensam skiva 431 ar fastsatt pit de hada anslutningarnas 340 och 341 hylsor 428 intill flansen 429. En sparfOrsedd krage 432 dr anbringad pa vat' och en av namnda hylsor 428 intill och i elektrisk kontakt med skivorna 430 och 431. Intill kragen_ 432 finnas tva brickor 433 och 434 av isolerande material for att clektriskt isolera kragen. 432 fran en annan sparfOrsedd krage 435, som ar anbringad pa var och en av hylsorna 428. Pa motsatt sida av kragarna .435 och elektriskt forbunden med dessa finnes en annan gemensam skiva 436, som har samma form som skivan 430, ph anslutningarnas 337, 338 och 339 hylsor saint en annan gemensarn skiva 437, son dr identisk med skivan 431, pa anslutningarnas 340 och 341 hylsor. Distansorgan 438 och 439 halla de olika elementen pit var och en av hylsorna 428 pa ratt avstand fran sidogaveln 322. De gemensamma skivorna 430 och 43,1 aro elektriskt forenade for att bilda en ingangsanslutning till kragarna 432 och de gerncnsamma skivorna 436 och 437 aro elektriskt forenade for att bilda en ingangsanslutning till kragarna 435. The contact means for the identification part among the scanning means are shown in Figs. 7A, 19 and 20 and are arranged in the same frame part as the contact means for the data representing part, but are electrically isolated therefrom. The parts of the input connections 327-331 and the output connections 337-341 which lie opposite the rods 411 and 419 have a reduced cross-sectional area, as shown in Figs. 19 and 20. On each of these reduced parts of the input connections 337-341 a sleeve is mounted 428 of insulating material with a flange 429 towards the transition between the reduced and coarser part of each input connection. A first common disc 430 there fixed to the sleeves 428 of the inner connections 337, 338 and 339 adjacent the flange and a second common disc 431 being fixed to the had connections of the had connections 340 and 341 sleeves 428 adjacent the flange 429. A spare collar 432 there mounted on water and one of said sleeves 428 adjacent and in electrical contact with the discs 430 and 431. Adjacent the collar 432 are two washers 433 and 434 of insulating material for electrically insulating the collar. 432 from another spare collar 435, which is mounted on each of the sleeves 428. On the opposite side of the collars .435 and electrically connected thereto is another common disc 436, which has the same shape as the disc 430, of the connections 337, 338 and 339 sleeves have another common disc 437, otherwise identical to the disc 431, on the sockets of the connections 340 and 341. Spacers 438 and 439 keep the various elements pit each of the sleeves 428 at a right distance from the side end 322. The common plates 430 and 43.1 are electrically connected to form an input connection to the collars 432 and the common plates 436 and 437 are electrically connected. united to form an input connection to the collars 435.

Pa var och en av anslutningarnas 327331 forminskade del finnes en hylsa 440 av isolerande material. Fjadrarna 413 och 421 till var och en av de fern avkanningsstangerna 411 och de fern samverkande stangerna 419 aro anbringade pit hylsorna 440 och skilda at medelst de isolerande brickorna 441, av vilka pa varje hylsa en är anordnad mellan tva av fjadrarna 413 och 421 och den andra ãr anordnad mellan fjadern 421 och fjadern 321 Or den yttersta datakolumnen. On each of the reduced part of the connections 327331 there is a sleeve 440 of insulating material. The springs 413 and 421 of each of the four sensing rods 411 and the four cooperating rods 419 are mounted on the sleeve 440 and separated by the insulating washers 441, one of which is arranged on each sleeve between two of the springs 413 and 421 and the others are arranged between the spring 421 and the spring 321 Or the outermost data column.

Varje fjader 413 och 421 ar i ena anden forsedd med en hake for ingrepp i en motsvarande slits i de isolerade spetsarna 412 och 420 pa var och en av stangerna 411 och 419. Fjadrarnas 413 och 421 mittpartier dro lindade runt hylsorna 440 och fjadrarnas andra andar stracka sig genom oppningar 442 (fig. 7A och 19) i skivor 443 och 444 samt arc sit bOjda, att de bilda uttag 445 for anslutning till uppteckningsanordningens kretsar, sisom kommer att fullstandigt for-- J — — klaras vid beskrivningen av schemat enligt fig. 43A-43F. Each spring 413 and 421 is in one breath provided with a hook for engaging a corresponding slot in the insulated tips 412 and 420 on each of the rods 411 and 419. The middle portions of the springs 413 and 421 are wound around the sleeves 440 and the other spirits of the springs. extend through openings 442 (Figs. 7A and 19) in disks 443 and 444 and arc sit bOjda, that they form sockets 445 for connection to the circuits of the recording device, which will be completely explained in the description of the diagram according to Figs. 43A-43F.

I avkanningstapparnas i identifieringsdelen normala tillbakadragna lage kommer motsvarande stanger 411 och 419 att liana fjadrarna 413 och 421 ur kontakt med kragarna 435 och 432. Da avkanningstapparna i identifieringsdelen frigoras for avkanning av kortet, kommer den avkanningstapp, som befinner sig i samma lage, som ett hal i kortet att kunna rora sig at vanster, sasom framgar av fig. 9, sä att motsvarande fjader 413 kommer i kontakt med den till ingangsanslutningen 436 forenade kragen 435 och fullborda en krets till uttaget 445 pa namnda fjader. Den med den utvalda stangen 413 samverkande stangen 419 forflyttas at vans-ter (se fig. 9) NW en tidpunkt, som bestamts genom installningen av den armen 422 styrande kamskivan, vilken arm i sin tur styr stangens 419 rorelse. Harigenom kan motsvarande fjader 421 (fig. 20) Ora kontakt med den till ingangsanslutningen 430 horande kragen 432 och fullborda en krets till uttaget 445 pa fjadern 421. In the normally retracted layer of the scanning pins in the identification part, corresponding rods 411 and 419 will line the springs 413 and 421 out of contact with the collars 435 and 432. When the scanning pins in the identification part are released for scanning the card, the scanning pin located in the same layer will slip in the card to be able to move to the left, as shown in Fig. 9, so that the corresponding spring 413 comes into contact with the collar 435 united to the input connection 436 and completes a circuit to the socket 445 on said spring. The rod 419 cooperating with the selected rod 413 is moved to the left (see Fig. 9) NW at a time determined by the installation of the cam 42 controlling the cam disc, which arm in turn controls the movement of the rod 419. As a result, the corresponding spring 421 (Fig. 20) can make contact with the collar 432 belonging to the input connection 430 and complete a circuit to the socket 445 on the spring 421.

Be stanger 411 och 419, som styras av avkanningstappar i lagen utan perforeringar, hindras att rora sig at vanster och komma att halla tillhorande fjadrar ur kontakt med tillhOrande kragar. Rods 411 and 419, which are controlled by sensing pins in the law without perforations, are prevented from moving to the left and come to keep the associated springs out of contact with the associated collars.

Manuellt avlagsnande av kort samt omkopplingsorgan. Manual removal of cards and switching means.

Manuellt paverkbara organ finnas for att avlagsna ett kort, kvitto eller annat uppteckningsmedium, som felaktigt insatts i kortschaktet till hoger I avlasningsdelen (fig. 7A och 7B). Dan i insatt medium kommer att glida forbi avlasningsdeIen och kortstopporganen i avlasningsdelen till ett lage, i vilket det ãr oatkomligt for operatoren. Den meltanism, som tin kommer att beskrivas, ãr anordnad att mojliggora borttagning av ett dylikt kort fran kortschaktet. Dessutom styra de manuellt paverkbara organen vissa elektriska kontakter, vilka i sin tur styra kortfriWirings- och aterfOringsfunktionen hos avlasningsanordningen, sasom kommer att beskrivas i det foljande. Manually actuable means are provided for depositing a card, receipt or other recording medium, which has been incorrectly inserted in the card shaft to the right of the unloading part (Figs. 7A and 7B). The Dan in inserted medium will slide past the unloading part and the card stop means in the unloading part to a bearing in which it is inaccessible to the operator. The meltanism with which tin will be described is arranged to enable the removal of such a card from the card shaft. In addition, the manually actuable means control certain electrical contacts, which in turn control the card release and return function of the unloading device, as will be described in the following.

En nedtryckbar tangent eller tryckknapp 490 (fig. 1 och 18) är glidbart anordnad pa hjalpsidostycket 324 medelst tappar 491 och 492, som arc fastsatta 1 nanntda sidostycke 324 och som samverkar med vertikala slitsar i tangentens 490 stjalk 493. Tangenten 490 halles normalt I icke nedtryckt ldge av en fjader 494, vilken fir anbringad mellan tap-pen 491 och en tapp 495, som är fastsatt vid en fOrlangning 496 av stjalken 493. En lang tapp 497 ãr fastsatt pa stjalken 493, vilken tapp fritt kan forflyttas i en urtagning 498 (fig. 17) i sidostycket 324. Tappen 07 ut skjuter genom hal i en arm 499 och ett U-format organ 500, vilka bada aro vridbart lagrade pa en axel 501, som ãr fastsatt vid den hOgra sidogaveln 210. A depressible key or push button 490 (Figs. 1 and 18) is slidably mounted on the auxiliary side piece 324 by means of pins 491 and 492, which are attached to said side piece 324 and which cooperate with vertical slots in the stem 499 of the key 490. The key 490 is normally not held. depressed length of a spring 494, which is fitted between the pin 491 and a pin 495, which is attached to an extension 496 of the stem 493. A long pin 497 is attached to the stem 493, which pin can be moved freely in a recess 498 (Fig. 17) in the side piece 324. The pin 07 protrudes through a halter in an arm 499 and a U-shaped member 500, both of which are rotatably mounted on a shaft 501, which is fixed to the right side end 210.

Det U-formade organet eller hygeln 500 har tva. tappar 502 (fig. 18), av vilka endast en visas, som stracker sig in i kortschaktet 130. En utskjutningsplatta (kite visad) är medelst tva hal i denna platta fritt rorlig pa tapparna 502 samt anordnad i kortschaktet. Vid nedtryckning av tangenten 490 vrider tappen 497 organet 500 moturs, varigenom utskjutningsplattan fores uppat in i kortschaktet 130. Varje kort, kvitto eller annat medium, soni inforts i schaktet 130 och som ligger ovanpa utskjutningsplattan kommer darfor att Was uppat till ett lage, i vilket det kan gripas och avlagsnas fran kortschaktet. The U-shaped member or hygeln 500 has two. pins 502 (Fig. 18), of which only one is shown, extending into the card shaft 130. A projection plate (kite shown) is freely movable on the pins 502 by means of two halves in this plate and arranged in the card shaft. When the key 490 is depressed, the pin 497 rotates the member 500 counterclockwise, whereby the ejection plate is fed upwards into the card shaft 130. Each card, receipt or other medium soni is inserted into the shaft 130 and which lies on top of the ejection plate will therefore be it can be grabbed and removed from the card shaft.

For att fOrhindra nedtryckning av tangenten 490 under en avlasningsoperation i avlasningsanordningen finnas aven organ, eftersom ett i avlasningslage medelst inriktningsoch fastklamningsorganen fasthallet kort ligger ovanpa utskjutningsplattan, -varigenom kortet eller avlasningsanordningen skulle kunna skadas, om utskjutningsplattan fores uppat under en avlasningsoperation. In order to prevent depression of the key 490 during a unloading operation in the unloading device, there are also means, since in the unloading position by means of the alignment and clamping means the card is short on top of the launch plate, whereby the card or unloading device could be damaged.

En tapp 504 ãr fastsatt pa havarmen 214 (fig. 13), vilken tapp samverkar med en yta 505 pa armen 499. Sa.som redan namnts forflyttas havarmen vid magnetiseringen och avmagnetiseringen av magneten L20. Vid magnetisering av magneten L20 installes tappen 504 i ytans 505 pa armen 499 rorelsebana, sá att armen icke kan forflyttas uppat. A pin 504 is attached to the lever arm 214 (Fig. 13), which pin cooperates with a surface 505 on the arm 499. As already mentioned, the lever arm is moved during the magnetization and demagnetization of the magnet L20. When magnetizing the magnet L20, the pin 504 is installed in the surface 505 of the arm 499 path of movement, so that the arm cannot be moved upwards.

Härvid fOrhindras nedtryckning av tangenten 490, da tappen 497 pa stjalken 493 blockeras mot nedatgaende rorelse (fig. 18). Avmagnetisering av magneten L20 medfor att fjadern 239 omstaller havarmen 214 medurs runt axeln 215, varvid tappen 504 forflyttas frail ytan 505 pa armen 499, sá att tangenten kan nedtryckas. This prevents depression of the key 490, as the pin 497 on the stem 493 is blocked against downward movement (Fig. 18). Demagnetization of the magnet L20 causes the spring 239 to move the sea arm 214 clockwise around the shaft 215, the pin 504 being moved from the surface 505 of the arm 499 so that the key can be depressed.

Vid skenan 289 är fastsatt en konsol 506 (fig. 7B och 18), som uppbar tva snappstromstallare med kontakterna SP24a2 respektive' SP24b1. Dessa stronistallares paverkningsorgan hallos i tillbaltadraget lage av en plan andyta 507 pa tangentens stjalk 493, da tangenten icke ar nedtryckt. Vid nedtryckning av tangenten fOres ytan 507 nedat (fig. 8), varigenom stromstallarnas paverkningsorgan kunna rora sig utat och oppna kontakterna SP24b1 och sluta kontakterna SP24a2. Da tangenten 490 slappes fores den uppat till icke nedtryckt laze av en fjader 494, varigenom ytan 507 anligger mot namnda stromstallares paverkningsorgan, sa att kontakterna SP24b1 slutas och kontakterna SP24a2 oppnas. De av kontakterna SP24a2 och SP24b1 initierade funktionerna beskrivas fullstandigt vid genomgangen av schemat enligt fig. 43A —43F. 16— — Selektoromkopplarenhet. Attached to the rail 289 is a bracket 506 (Figs. 7B and 18), which carried two snap current switches with the contacts SP24a2 and SP24b1, respectively. The actuating means of these stronistallers are held in the accessory layer by a flat end face 507 on the key stem 493, when the key is not depressed. When the key is pressed, the surface 507 is moved downwards (Fig. 8), whereby the actuating means of the stables can move outwards and open the contacts SP24b1 and close the contacts SP24a2. When the key 490 is released, it is moved upwards to the non-depressed laze by a spring 494, whereby the surface 507 abuts against the actuating means of said switch, so that the contacts SP24b1 are closed and the contacts SP24a2 are opened. The functions initiated by the contacts SP24a2 and SP24b1 are fully described in the review of the diagram according to Figs. 43A-43F. 16— - Selector switch unit.

Organ f8r styrning av uppteckningsanlaggningens operationsfoljd aro anordnade i en enhet i avlasningsanordningen, vilken enhet latt kan avlagsnas och ersattas med en annan enhet for en annan operationsfoljd. Means for controlling the operating sequence of the recording device are arranged in a unit in the unloading device, which unit can easily be removed and replaced with another unit for another operating sequence.

En bottenplatta 510 (fig. 6, 22 och 27) uppbar omkopplarenhetens komponenter. I arbetslage vilar bottenplattan 510 pa en hasplatta 511 i avlasningsanordningen. A base plate 510 (Figs. 6, 22 and 27) supported the components of the switch unit. In working condition, the bottom plate 510 rests on a reel plate 511 in the unloading device.

InstAllningspinnar 512 i basplattan 511 samverka med fingrar 513 pa bottenplattan 510, so. att ratt installning tillforsakras och skruvar 514, forda genom en slits 515 i bottenplattan aro gangade i basplattan 511 for att sdkra de hada plattorna vid varandra. Ledningarna frau de elektriska komponenterna aro forbundna med anslutningarna i tva. multipelkontakter 516 pa en konsol 517, vilken dr fastsatt pA bottenplattan. Kontakterna 516 aro anordnade att samverka med komplementkontaktorgan 516A, vilka aro fastsatta yid avlasningsanordningens stativ, sa att elektriska forbindningar erhallas mellan omkopplarenhetens komponenter och resten av uppteckningsanldggningen. Adjustment pins 512 in the base plate 511 cooperate with fingers 513 on the base plate 510, so. that steering wheel assembly is secured and screws 514, passed through a slot 515 in the base plate aro threaded in the base plate 511 to secure the had plates to each other. The wires from the electrical components are connected to the connections in two. multiple contacts 516 on a bracket 517, which is fixed to the base plate. The contacts 516 are arranged to cooperate with complementary contact means 516A, which are fixed to the stand of the unloading device, so that electrical connections are obtained between the components of the switch unit and the rest of the recording device.

En av omkopplarenhetens komponenter utgores av en selektorvaljare eller -omkopplare 518 med ett flertal vridvinkellagen och kontaktnivaer. Denna omkopplare dr anordnad mellan en fran bottenplattan 510 uppatbOjd flans 519 (fig. 22) och en vertikal del 520 av en konsol 521, som Ar fastsatt vid hottenplattan 510. Omkopplaren innehaller ett flertal kontaktsatser och vridbara kontaktarmorgan, vilka senare vardera samverka med varje kontaktsats. Varje kontaktsats innefattar en forsta kontaktdel 522 (fig. 25) och en andra kontaktdel 523 (fig. 26). Den forsta kontaktdelen omfattar en ring av isolerande material, vilken uppbar fyra kontaktsektorer 524, vilka vardera aro fOrsedda med en anslutning 525, som stracker sig utanfor ringen. Ringen dr forsedd med tva diametralt motstaende oron 526, vilka aro forsedda med ettfor en bult 527, for att halla ihop om- kopplaren och for anbringning av denna mellan flansen 519 och konsolen 521. One of the components of the switch unit is a selector selector or switch 518 having a plurality of rotation angles and contact levels. This switch is arranged between a flange 519 (Fig. 22) bent up from the bottom plate 510 and a vertical part 520 of a bracket 521, which is attached to the hot plate 510. The switch contains a plurality of contact sets and rotatable contact arm means, which later each cooperate with each contact set. . Each contact set includes a first contact portion 522 (Fig. 25) and a second contact portion 523 (Fig. 26). The first contact part comprises a ring of insulating material, which carried four contact sectors 524, each of which is provided with a connection 525, which extends outside the ring. The ring is provided with two diametrically opposed grooves 526, which are provided with one for a bolt 527, for holding the switch together and for mounting it between the flange 519 and the bracket 521.

Var och en av kontaktdelarna 523 omfattar en ring av isolerande material, i vilken ar anordnad tolv jamnt fordelade korta kontaktsektorer 528 av ledande material. Varje sektor dr forsedd med en sig utanfOr ringen strackande anslutning 529. Tva diametralt motsatta oron 530 for samma andamal, som oronen 526 aro utformade pa ringen. Each of the contact members 523 comprises a ring of insulating material, in which are arranged twelve evenly distributed short contact sectors 528 of conductive material. Each sector is provided with a connection 529 extending outside the ring. Two diametrically opposite grooves 530 for the same purpose as the grooves 526 are formed on the ring.

MeIlan kontaktdelarna 522 och 523 finnas kontaktarmorgan. 531 (fig. 23 och 24). Varje kontaktarmorgan 531 innefattar ett nay 532, som ar fastsatt pa. en axel 533, sa. att de rotera tillsammans. Fyra satser kontaktarmar 534 aro fastsatta pa navet 532 och skilda At under rat vinkel. Varje sats bestar av tva kontaktfjadrar, vars andar aro bojda At motsatta hall, sa att en fjader kommer att samverka med de ledande sektorerna 524 pa en ay kontaktdelarna 522, medan den andra fjadern 534 samverkar riled sektorerna 528 i kontaktdelen 523. Axeln 533, pa vilken samtliga kontaktarmsorgan 531 aro fastsatta ar lagrad I konsolens 521 vertikala del 520 och i flansen 519. Delarna 522 och 523 aro anbringade i ratt lage i fOrhallande till varandra pa flansen 519 och konsolens 521 vertikala del 520 medelst bultarna 527 saint aro skilda fran Hansen 519 medelst distanshylsor 535 pa bultarna 527. Between the contact parts 522 and 523 are contact arm members. 531 (Figs. 23 and 24). Each contact arm member 531 includes a needle 532 attached to it. and axis 533, sa. that they rotate together. Four sets of contact arms 534 are attached to the hub 532 and spaced apart at right angles. Each set consists of two contact springs, the spirits of which are bent at the opposite hall, so that one spring will cooperate with the leading sectors 524 on one of the contact parts 522, while the other spring 534 cooperates with the led sectors 528 in the contact part 523. The shaft 533, on which all the contact arm members 531 are fixed are mounted in the vertical part 520 of the bracket 521 and in the flange 519. The parts 522 and 523 are arranged in a straight line in relation to each other on the flange 519 and the vertical part 520 of the bracket 521 by means of the bolts 527 saint are separated from Hansen 519 by means of spacer sleeves 535 on bolts 527.

Axeln 533 stracker sig genom konsolens 521 vertikala del och ett tandhjul 536 (fig. 22 och 27) ar fastsatt pa dess ande. En klinka 537 med en tand 538 samverkar med tanderna pa tandhjnlet 536 och frammatar tandhjulet steg fOr steg, varigenom axeln 533 och de darpa fast satta kontaktarmorganen 531 vridas i forhallande till kontaktdelarna 522 och 523. En elektromagnet SS20 ãr fast-sat!: pa konsolen 521. Magneten SS20 ar forsedd med ett vridankare 539, pa vilket ar anordnad en tapp 540, som samverkar med en slits 541 i klinkan 537. Slitsen 541 dr sa lang, att tappen 540 liar en viss dodgang. The shaft 533 extends through the vertical portion of the bracket 521 and a gear 536 (Figs. 22 and 27) is attached to its spirit. A latch 537 with a tooth 538 cooperates with the teeth on the gear 536 and advances the gear step by step, whereby the shaft 533 and the contact arm members 531 attached are rotated in relation to the contact members 522 and 523. An electromagnet SS20 is attached to the bracket. 521. The magnet SS20 is provided with a rotary anchor 539, on which a pin 540 is arranged, which cooperates with a slot 541 in the latch 537. The slot 541 there is so long that the pin 540 suffers a certain dead center.

Intill magneten SS20 finnas tva. snappstromstallare med kontakterna SS20b14, SS20ac13 och SS20bc13, vilka stromstallare aro anbringade pa en konsol 562 pa bottenplattan 510. Stromstallarna styras av en arm 563, vilka paverkas medelst magneten SS20 Over ett ankare 564, vilket utfor en in- och utatgaende rorelse yid magnetisering och avmagnetisering ay magneten. Next to the magnet SS20 are two. snap-on switches with the contacts SS20b14, SS20ac13 and SS20bc13, which switches are mounted on a bracket 562 on the base plate 510. The switches are controlled by an arm 563, which are actuated by the magnet SS20 Over an armature 564, which performs an inbound and outbound movement of magnetization. ay magnet.

PA konsolens 521 vertikala del 520 fir genom en tapp 542 en arm 543 vridbart lagrad, vilken arm uppbar en rulle 544 pa sin ena ande, som samverkar med en krokt stoppyta 545 pa klinkan 537. Armen 543 kan bibringas en bcgransad rOrelse for exalt installning ay rullen 544 med avseende pA klinkans 537 yta 545 genom installning av en excenter 546, som dr anordnad pa konsolens 521 vertikala del 520 och som samverkar riled en slits 547 i nal-Janda arm. Ena anden pa en fjader 549 ar forenad med en pa excentern 546 fastsatt tapp 550 och den andra anden med en tapp 551, som stracker sig mellan tva Oron pa klinkan 537 och pressar ytan. 545 pa namnda klinka mot rullen 544. Mellan. tappen 551 och ankartappen 540 finnes en annan fjader 552, vilken pressar ankartappen 540 till anliggning mot slitsens 541 vanstra kant, sasom visas i fig. 27.. On the vertical part 520 of the bracket 521, through an pin 542, an arm 543 is rotatably mounted, which arm carries a roller 544 on its one end, which cooperates with a curved stop surface 545 on the latch 537. The arm 543 can be provided with a limited movement for external installation. the roller 544 with respect to the surface 545 of the latch 537 by installing an eccentric 546, which is arranged on the vertical part 520 of the bracket 521 and which cooperates with a slot 547 in the nal-Janda arm. One spirit on a spring 549 is joined by a pin 550 attached to the eccentric 546 and the other spirit by a pin 551 which extends between two Oron on the latch 537 and presses the surface. 545 pa namnda klinka mot rullen 544. Mellan. the pin 551 and the anchor pin 540 are another spring 552, which presses the anchor pin 540 into abutment against the left edge of the slot 541, as shown in Fig. 27.

En bladfjader 553, som fir fastsatt yid ett still(' 554, samverkar med tandhjulets 536 Under for att forhindra att hjulet toper tillbaka. StOdet 554 ar installbart fastsatt pa konsolens 521 vertikala del 520 medelst bultar 555, vilka vila i en horisontell slits i konsolens 521 vertikala del. A leaf spring 553, which is fixedly attached to a shaft ('554), cooperates with the gear of the gear 536 to prevent the wheel from pivoting back. 521 vertical part.

Vid magnetisering av magneten SS20 vri- des fig. aen kar kar 53 var r el ter ka oc: Inc etl da SS i pc le ci vi in 5: ci e) or 5 a 1 — —17 des tappen 540 at hiiger, sasom fralugdr av fig. 27. Tappen 540 samverkar, sedan den genomlopt slitsen 541, med slitsens hogra kant och for klinkan 537 at hoger mot verkan av fjddern 549, varigenom klinkans tand 538 fares bakom en av tandhjulets 'Ander, varvid tandhjulet sparras mot atergangsrorelse medurs av bladfjadern 553. Da magneten SS20 darefter avmagnetiseras fares klinkan 537 tillbaka at vanster av fjadern 549 och tanden 538 pa namnda klinka samverkar med tandhjulet 536 och stegar fram hjulet ett steg moturs, sasom synes av fig. 27. Pa liknande satt medfor varje magnetisering och ddrpá foljande avmagnetisering av magneten SS20 att tandhjulet 536 frammatas ett steg i moturs riktning. Upon magnetization of the magnet SS20, the fig. The pin 540 cooperates, after passing through the slot 541, with the right edge of the slot and for the latch 537 to move higher against the action of the spring 549, whereby the tooth 538 of the latch is moved behind one of the gears' ends, the gear being locked against return movement clockwise. of the leaf spring 553. When the magnet SS20 is subsequently demagnetized, the latch 537 is moved back so that the left of the spring 549 and the tooth 538 on said latch cooperate with the gear 536 and advance the wheel one step counterclockwise, as shown in Fig. 27. Similarly, with each magnetization and following de-magnetization of the magnet SS20, the gear 536 is advanced one step in the counterclockwise direction.

Av fig. 25 och 26 framgar, att varje sats kontaktfalt 522 och 523 med tillhorande fyrpoliga kontaktarm 5:11 bildar fyra nivaer eller kontaktsatser i omkopplaren. Var och en av de fyra sektionerna i kontaktfaltet 522 är gemensam for en av de fyra nivaerna, varvid varje niva, beroende pa de tolv sektionerna 528 i kontaktfdltet 523, innehaller tre lagen. Var och en av kontaktfjadersatserna 534 pa kontaktarmen leder darfor strom fran en gemensam sektor i kontaktfaltet 522 till en av sektorerna i kontaktfaltet 523 och da omkopplaren framstegas komma fjadrarna 534 att rams sá, att den kontaktfjader, som anligger mot en sektor 528 i falLet 523 Over-gar till en foljande sektor. Da en liontaktfjadersats framstegas gar den genom en niva och sedan till den farsta sektorn 528 i en narliggande niva medan en efterfoljande kontaktfjadersats 534 framstegas till det forsta laget i den niva, som den forstnamnda kontaktfjadersatsen lamnade. En elektrisk krets slutes darfor i varje niva forst i lage 1, sedan i lage 2, darefter ldge 3, ldge 1 etc. I den visade utforingsformen innefattar omkopplaren tre kontaktfaltsatser 522 och 523, vilka vardera innehalla fyra niva.er, varigenom totalt tolv nivaer erhallas. Det är emellertid uppenbart att en omkopplare av denna typ kan innefatta ett godtyckligt antal nivaer eller ett godtyckligt antal lagen i varje niva., om sá onskas. Figures 25 and 26 show that each set of contact pads 522 and 523 with associated four-pole contact arm 5:11 form four levels or contact sets in the switch. Each of the four sections in the contact field 522 is common to one of the four levels, each level, depending on the twelve sections 528 in the contact field 523, containing three layers. Each of the contact spring sets 534 on the contact arm therefore conducts current from a common sector in the contact field 522 to one of the sectors in the contact field 523 and when the switch is advanced the springs 534 are framed so that the contact spring abutting a sector 528 in the case 523 -goes to a following sector. As a lion stroke spring set is advanced, it passes through a level and then to the first sector 528 in an adjacent level while a subsequent contact spring set 534 is advanced to the first layer in the level left by the first-mentioned contact spring set. An electrical circuit is therefore closed in each level first in layer 1, then in layer 2, then ldge 3, ldge 1 etc. In the embodiment shown, the switch comprises three contact field sets 522 and 523, each of which contains four levels, whereby a total of twelve levels erhallas. However, it is obvious that a switch of this type may comprise any number of levels or any number of layers in each level, if desired.

Pa bottenplattan 510 finnes aven ett reld K20 med ett flertal kontaktgrupper K2Obd1, K20a2, K2Oad1, K2Obdl, K20ac12, K20bc12 och K2Oadll, vilka oppnas eller slutas vid magnetisering eller avmagnetisering av re-Met. On the base plate 510 there is also a real K20 with a plurality of contact groups K2Obd1, K20a2, K2Oad1, K2Obdl, K20ac12, K20bc12 and K2Oadll, which are opened or closed during magnetization or demagnetization of the re-Met.

Andamalet med de av selektoromkopplarmekanismen styrda kontakterna kommer att fullstandigt forklaras i samband med beskrivningen av schemat enligt fig. 43A-43F. The purpose of the contacts controlled by the selector switch mechanism will be fully explained in connection with the description of the diagram according to Figs. 43A-43F.

Far att skydda selektoromkopplarenheten finnes en kapa 557. Kapan vilar pa ett be-slag 558, som är fastsatt pa bottenplattan 510 och kvarhalles medelst en forsta bult 559, som ãr ingangad i en standares 560 ovre \ liken stAndarer ftilIdI■lytten- plattansaiiil av eli iiidj:a Lull 161, :.,uen är ingangad i konsolen 517. To protect the selector switch unit, there is a cover 557. The cover rests on a fitting 558, which is attached to the base plate 510 and is retained by means of a first bolt 559, which is entered in a stand 560 above the standard stands for the plate plate assembly of eli. iiidj: a Lull 161,:., uen är ingangad i konsolen 517.

Uppteckningsanordning. Recording device.

Uppteckningsanordningen, som är av kand typ, visas allmant i fig. 1 och 28. Den ãr anordnad att perforera remsan for uppteckning av data under kontroll av programstyrningsorgan i uppteckningsanordningen, under kontroll av avlasningsanordningen samt under kontroll av kassaregistret. The recording device, which is of the bachelor type, is generally shown in Figs. 1 and 28. It is arranged to perforate the strip for recording data under the control of program control means in the recording device, under the control of the unloading device and under the control of the cash register.

Uppteckningsanordningen kan i sin tur styra avlasningsanordningen och kassaregistret, sa att dessa kunna utfora sina kontrollfunktioner i ratt ogonblick. Inbordes kontrollfunktioner mellan uppteckningsanordningen, avlasningsanordningen och kassaregistret fOrhindra att ytterligare data sandas till uppteckningsanordningen, om denna icke uppteeknat nyligen mottagna data. The recording device can in turn control the unloading device and the cash register, so that these can perform their control functions at the steering wheel instantly. Control functions are included between the recording device, the unloading device and the cash register to prevent further data from being sent to the recording device if it has not recorded recently received data.

Sasom bast framgar av fig. 28 innehaller uppteckningsanordningen i stansmekanismen 600, en motor 601, for drivning av stansmekanismen, en kondensator 599, som ãr ansluten till motorn, en koppling 602 for anslutning av motorn till stansmekanismen, en hallare 603, vilken uppbar forradsremsan, en upplindningsspole 604, pa vilken den stansade remsan upplindas, en kontrollrelddel 605 med kontrollrelder for samordning av kassaregistrets, avlasningsanordningens och uppteckningsanordningens operationer, en kodningsenhet 609 med dioder samt programorgan 606, innefattande en stegvalj are och en proppanel for uppstallning av de oli- programmen eller stansningsfoljderna, som erfordras for samordning i raft foljd av datauppteckningen pa remsan under kontroll av avldsningsanordningen och kassaregistret. As can be seen from Fig. 28, the recording device in the punch mechanism 600 includes a motor 601 for driving the punch mechanism, a capacitor 599 connected to the motor, a coupling 602 for connecting the motor to the punch mechanism, a holder 603 which carries the storage strip, a winding coil 604 on which the punched strip is wound, a control fire part 605 with control winds for coordinating the operations of the cash register, the unloading device and the recording device, a coding unit 609 with diodes and program means 606, comprising a step selector and a plug panel for arranging the the punching sequences required for coordination in sequence following the data entry on the strip under the control of the holding device and the cash register.

Uppteckningsanordningen dr farsedd med tva proppanslutningar 607 och 608 for de proppforsedda kablar, som forbinda uppleekningsanordningen med kassaregistret och avlasningsanordningen. The recording device is provided with two plug connections 607 and 608 for the plugged cables, which connect the detection device to the cash register and the unloading device.

En tryckknapp PB1 pa uppteckningsanordningens framsida anvandes for att satta i gang uppteckningsanordningen for att perforera remsan pa kant salt med ett ledmonster. A push button PB1 on the front of the recorder was used to start the recorder to perforate the strip on the edge of salt with a joint sample.

Stansmekanism. Punching mechanism.

Det är tillrackligt att angiva att stansmekanismen i den kdnda uppteckningsanordningen, innefattar nio stansar for stansning av perforeringsraderna Over remsan, en for var och en av de atta kanalerna pa remsan, vilka kanaler anvandas kombinerade far kodning av datavardena samt en for att stansa matningshalen. It is sufficient to state that the punching mechanism in the known recording device comprises nine punches for punching the perforation rows across the strip, one for each of the eight channels on the strip, which channels are used in combination for coding the data values and one for punching the feed hall.

Fig. 5 visar ett fragment av remsan, pa vilket en »slut pa blocket»-symbol och siffrorna »0» till »9» samt en ledmonsterdel stansats. 18— — Slut pa blockeb-symbolen anvandes fOr att indikera slutet pa en information, som hor till en viss forsaljning av en artikel eller artiklar for de olika informationsbinalerna pa remsan skola kunna atskiljas. Beteckningarna ovanfor remsan i fig. 5 svara mot pa remsan stansade data och talen vid remsans sida angivna kanalerna Over remsan. Fig. 5 shows a fragment of the strip, on which an "end of the block" symbol and the numbers »0» to »9» and a hinge sample part are punched. 18 - - The end of the block symbol is used to indicate the end of an information which belongs to a certain sale of an article or articles for the various information binaries on the strip should be distinguishable. The designations above the strip in Fig. 5 correspond to the data stamped on the strip and the numbers indicated on the side of the strip across the channels.

Varje stansningsoperation antingen den gäller stansning av data eller ett ledmOnster pa remsan medfor aven stansning av ett frammatningshal i remsan. Dessa frammatningshal anvandas for matning av rernsan genom stansmekanismen och genom avkanningsorganen, vilka analysera remsan. Each punching operation, whether it involves punching data or a hinge pattern on the strip, also involves punching a feed hall in the strip. These feed halls are used to feed the strip through the punching mechanism and through the sensing means which analyze the strip.

Kontrollrelddel. Control part.

Kontrollreladelen 605 (fig. 28) bestar av en relaskena 723, som uppbar kontrollrelderna K1 och K2, vilka visas i schemat enligt fig. 43A-43F. The control relay part 605 (Fig. 28) consists of a relay rail 723, which carried the control relays K1 and K2, which are shown in the diagram according to Figs. 43A-43F.

Relaet K3, som styr kassaregistret, avlasningsanordning och uppteckningsanordningen for att forhindra att kassaregistret paverkas, da avlasningsanordningen och uppteckningsanordningen arbeta, ãr fastsatt pa uppteckningsanordningens bottenplatta bredvid kondensatorn 599. The relay K3, which controls the cash register, unloading device and the recording device to prevent the cash register from being affected when the unloading device and the recording device are operating, is fixed on the bottom plate of the recording device next to the capacitor 599.

Kontrollkretsarna med relderna Kl, K2 och K3 erhalla likspanning Over en likriktare 598, som ãr fastsatt pa en stOdplatta 725 ovanfor motorn. 601. The control circuits with the lines K1, K2 and K3 receive DC voltage across a rectifier 598, which is attached to a support plate 725 above the motor. 601.

Programorganen 606 innefatta en i och f8r sig kand stegvalj are och en programenhet, bestaende av en undre programpanel 733 och en ovre programpanel 734 (fig. 28 och 43E), vilka aro anordnade Over varandra. The program means 606 comprise a per se known step selector and a program unit, consisting of a lower program panel 733 and an upper program panel 734 (Figs. 28 and 43E), which are arranged one above the other.

Stegvaljaren har atta nivaer och kan intaga tjugo lagen samt är forsedd med en stegningsmagnet SS1 och de normala organen for drivning av kontaktarmarna, vilka drivorgan paverkas av ett magnetankare 729 och befinna sig i framdrivet lage, da magneten är magnetiserad samt driva och framstega armarn.a da magneten avmagnetiseras. The step selector has eight levels and can take up twenty layers and is provided with a step magnet SS1 and the normal means for driving the contact arms, which drive means are actuated by a magnetic anchor 729 and are in the driven position, as the magnet is magnetized and drive and advance the arms. when the magnet is demagnetized.

For varje program erfordras en valjarniva, varvid nivan SSI utnyttjas fOr program I, nivan SSII for program II osv. De ;UM kontaktnivaerna i stegvdljaren utnyttjas fOr de nodvandiga atta programstyrningarna, vilka program vartdera innehalla upp till aderton steg i en stansningsfoljd. For undvikande av onodig upprepning visas endast fyra nivaer i fig. 43D. For each program, a selector level is required, whereby the level SSI is used for program I, the level SSII for program II, and so on. The contact levels in the step selector are used for the necessary eight program controls, which programs each contain up to eighteen steps in a punching sequence. To avoid unnecessary repetition, only four levels are shown in Fig. 43D.

Nivans SSI nitton forsta kontakter dro individuellt forbundna med motsvarande uttag I den ovre programpanelen 734, sâ att kretsarna till de olika uttagen slutas i foljd alit efter valjararmen gar Over tillhorande kontaktfalt, vilken valjararm anslutes till motsvarande uttag pa en valjningspanel 748 (fig. 43D) pa kassaregistret, sasom beskrives i detalj nedan. PA liknande satt är kontakterna i nivaerna SSII, SSIII och SSIV individuellt anslutna till motsvarande uttag i den Ovre programpanelen 734. De olika nivaernas tjugonde kontakter an sammanfOrda till en ledare 1348, medelst vilken en krets for frarnstegning av stegvaljaren 726 fran utgangslaget styres sasom beskrives i samband med genomgangen av fig. 43A43F. Nivan's SSI nineteen first contacts were individually connected to the corresponding sockets in the upper program panel 734, so that the circuits to the various sockets are closed in sequence following the selector arm. on the cash register, as described in detail below. Similarly, the contacts of levels SSII, SSIII and SSIV are individually connected to the corresponding sockets in the Upper Program Panel 734. The twentieth contacts of the different levels are connected to a conductor 1348, by means of which a circuit for incrementing the step selector 726 from the output layer is controlled as described in in connection with the review of Fig. 43A43F.

Den nedre programpanelen 733 är forsedd med en sektion 735, som innehaller uttagsgrupper, vilka aro anslutna till kontaktarmarna i omkopplarna SR42a1—SR48a1 (fig. 43D), som aro tillordnade raderna 2-8 i kassaregistret. Genom att pa ldmpligt salt forbinda uttagen i den ovre programpanelen 734 med uttag i sektionen 735 medelst proppforbindningar, kan varje onskat antal av kassaregistrets omkopplare goras verksamt for att styra uppleckningsanordningen i en Onskad foljd, da stegvaljaren framstegas genom sina olika lagen, sasom fullstandigt forklaras, da fig. 43A-43F beskrivas. The lower program panel 733 is provided with a section 735, which contains socket groups, which are connected to the contact arms of the switches SR42a1 — SR48a1 (Fig. 43D), which are assigned to rows 2-8 in the cash register. By conveniently connecting the sockets in the upper program panel 734 to sockets in section 735 by means of plug connections, any desired number of cash register switches can be actuated to control the pick-up device in an unwanted sequence, as the step selector is advanced through its various laws, as explained as Figs. 43A-43F are described.

Den ovre programpanelen 734 innehaller ett flertal satser eller sektioner med uttag, vilka vardera svara mot en niva i stegvaljaren. I varje sats eller sektion är varje uttag anslutet till en av de forsta nitton kontakterna i varje niva i stegvaljaren. Den ovre programpanelen 734 innehaller aven ett flertal aterstallningsuttag 739, vilka vardera dro tilldelade en av stegvaljarens nivaer och vilka dro forbundna med varandra och med en krets, medelst vilken stegvalj area aterfores till utgangslaget vid slutet av ett program. The upper program panel 734 contains a plurality of kits or sections with sockets, each corresponding to a level in the step selector. In each set or section, each socket is connected to one of the first nineteen contacts in each level of the step selector. The upper program panel 734 also includes a plurality of reset sockets 739, each of which is assigned one of the levels of the step selector and which is connected to each other and to a circuit by which the step selection area is returned to the output layer at the end of a program.

De inre forbindningarna mellan den Ovre och undre programpanelen samt dessas funktioner i saraband med programstyrningen kommer att fullstandigt forklaras, da schemat beskrives. The internal connections between the upper and lower program panel as well as their functions in conjunction with the program control will be fully explained, as the diagram is described.

Kodningsenhet. Coding unit.

Diodkodningsenheten 609, vilken an av kand typ, visas i fig. 28 och 43F saint innefattar en symbolkodningspanel 1311, sifferkodningspanelen. 1315, en isolerande skiva 731 mellan de hada panelerna samt en konsol 732 f6r losbar fastsattning av enheten pa uppteckningsanordningens bottenplatta. The diode coding unit 609, which is of the cand type, shown in Figs. 28 and 43F, comprises a symbol coding panel 1311, the numeric coding panel. 1315, an insulating disc 731 between the hot panels and a bracket 732 for releasably attaching the unit to the bottom plate of the recording device.

Kassaregister. Cash register.

Kassaregistret, som utgor en del av anlaggningen är av valkand typ och kommer darfOr endast att helt kort berOras i den 151- jande beskrivningsdelen. The cash register, which forms part of the facility, is of the elective type and will therefore only be briefly mentioned in the 151st description part.

Kassaregistret 102 (fig. 1) ãr forsett med ett tangentbord 750, exempelvis av den typ, som visas i fig. 29 och som ãr forsett med en transaktionsrad 1 med atta tangenter 752, beloppsrader 2-6, vilka rader vardera innehalla nio tangenter 752, avdelnings- eller klassificeringsrader 7 och 8, vilka rader vardera omfatta Mo tangenter 753 samt en transaktionsrad 9 med fern tangenter 754. Vid rad 1 pa tangentbordet finnes en summaspak — -- 19 755, som kan installas i sju olika lagen for att maskinen skall utfora olika operationstyper. Vidare finnes en spak 756 for startande av vissa maskinoperationer. Belopps- och transaktionsdifferentialmekanismer av kand typ styra installningen av vissa omkopplare i maskinen, sasom kommer att beskrivas i det folj ande. The cash register 102 (Fig. 1) is provided with a keyboard 750, for example of the type shown in Fig. 29 and which is provided with a transaction line 1 with eight keys 752, amount lines 2-6, which lines each contain nine keys 752 , department or classification lines 7 and 8, which lines each comprise Mo keys 753 and a transaction line 9 with four keys 754. At line 1 on the keyboard there is a sum lever - - 19 755, which can be installed in seven different layers for the machine to perform different types of operations. Furthermore, there is a lever 756 for starting certain machine operations. Amount-type amount and transaction differential mechanisms control the installation of certain switches in the machine, as will be described in the following.

Natstromstallare och programpanel for kassaregistret. Natstromstallare and program panel for the cash register.

For tillforsel av spanning till uppteckningsanlaggningen i sin helhet och individuellt till avlasningsanordningen och uppteckningsanordningen finnas mauellt paverkbara stromstallare. For supplying voltage to the recording system in its entirety and individually to the unloading device and the recording device, there are manually actuable current generators.

Sdsom redan namnts ãr huvudstromstallaren 125 (fig. 1) belagen pa kassaregistrets 102 indikatorplat och slutes fOr anslutning av spanning till uppteckningsanlaggning. Denna stromstallare kan givetvis vara utrustad med en nyckel, sh att den endast kan paverkas av en person, som tilldelats en nyckel. Stromstallaren paverkas normalt vid arbetsdagens borjan och slas ifran vid dess slut. As already mentioned, the main switch 125 (Fig. 1) is located on the indicator plate of the cash register 102 and is closed for connection of voltage to the recording system. This switch can of course be equipped with a key, so that it can only be actuated by a person who has been assigned a key. The generator is normally affected at the beginning of the working day and switched off at the end of it.

Icke visade, manuellt parverkbara stromstallare kunna finnas for att tillfora avlasnings- respektive uppteckningsanordningen spanning, och dessa stromstallare kunna fastas vid en bakre plat 764 pa kassaregistret. Kassaregistrets utvaljningspanel 748 ar aven anbringad pa, den bakre platen 764 medelst fyra tappar 747 samt anvandes for uppstallfling av olika uppteckningsprogram, sasom kommer att framga i samband med beskrivningen av kretsarna enligt fig. 43A-43F. Manual pairable switches (not shown) may be provided to supply voltage to the unloading and recording device, respectively, and these switches may be attached to a rear plate 764 of the cash register. The cash register selection panel 748 is also mounted on the rear plate 764 by means of four pins 747 and is used for setting up various recording programs, as will appear in connection with the description of the circuits according to Figs. 43A-43F.

Kontrolltangentrad 1. Control keypad 1.

Nedtryckning av en tangent 751 i rad 1 medfor att en sats kontakter, som tillhora denna tangent komma att slutas. Pressing a key 751 in row 1 causes a set of contacts belonging to that key to be closed.

Var och en av tangenterna 751 ar forsedd med en stjalk 765, som ãr anordnad att glida vertikalt i tangentramen 766 (fig. 30 och 32) och som ar forsedd med en tapp 767, anordnad att kunna forskjutas upp och ner i en slits 768 i ett styrorgan 769, vilket är fastsatt vid tangentramen 766. Varje tangent 751 fores till sitt nedtryckta lage av en tryckfjader 770, som stracker sig mellan tapparna 767 och tangentramen 766. Each of the keys 751 is provided with a stem 765, which is arranged to slide vertically in the key frame 766 (Figs. 30 and 32) and which is provided with a pin 767, arranged to be displaceable up and down in a slot 768 in a guide member 769, which is attached to the key frame 766. Each key 751 is fed to its depressed layer by a compression spring 770 which extends between the pins 767 and the key frame 766.

En kamyta 771 pa anden av varje tapp 767 samverkar med en kuts 772 pa en kontaktfjader 773. Fjadern 773 till varje tangent samverkar med en gemensam ingangskontakt 774, sá att elektriska kontakter SC52a1 —SC59a1 bildas for respektive tangenter 2-9 i rad 1. Ett uttag 775 är forenat med var och en av bladfjadrarna 773 for anslutning av kontakterna SC52a1—SC59a1 till uppteckningsanlaggningens elektriska kretsar. A cam surface 771 on the spirit of each pin 767 cooperates with a socket 772 on a contact spring 773. The spring 773 of each key cooperates with a common input contact 774, so that electrical contacts SC52a1 —SC59a1 are formed for the respective keys 2-9 in row 1. A socket 775 is connected to each of the leaf springs 773 for connecting the contacts SC52a1 — SC59a1 to the electrical circuits of the recording device.

En ytterligare sats elektriska kontakter SC50a1 slutes, dá flagon av tangenterna i rad 1 nedtryckes. Namnda kontakters paverk ningsorgan komma nu att beskrivas. Sasom framgar av fig. 30 ãr ett sparrorgan 776 anordnat pa tangentramen 766 for rad 1 me-deist tva armar 777 och 778, som aro vridbart lagrad pa ramen 766 och vid sparrorganets 776 bada andar. Namnda sparrorgan fores at hoger (fig. 30) av en fjader 779, som ar fastsatt vid ramen 766 samt ar forsedd med sparrdelar 780, vilka samverka med tapparna 767 pa tangenterna 751. Ett andra sparrorgan 781 är glidbart anordnat pa spdrrorganet 776 saint fores at hoger av en mellan sparrorganen ansluten. fjader 782. Sparrorganet 781 ar forsett med en kamyta 783, som samverkar med tapparna 767 i tangenternas 751 i den forsta raden. stjalkar. An additional set of electrical contacts SC50a1 is closed when the flake of the keys in row 1 is depressed. The impact means of said contacts will now be described. As can be seen from Fig. 30, a locking member 776 is arranged on the key frame 766 for row 1 with two arms 777 and 778, which are rotatably mounted on the frame 766 and at both ends of the locking member 776. Said locking means is caused to be raised (Fig. 30) by a spring 779, which is fixed to the frame 766 and is provided with locking parts 780, which co-operate with the pins 767 on the keys 751. A second locking member 781 is slidably arranged on the locking member 776. hoger of one connected between the ratchet means. spring 782. The spar member 781 is provided with a cam surface 783 which cooperates with the pins 767 in the keys 751 in the first row. stalks.

En yta 784 pa sparrorganet 781 samverkar med en tapp 785 pd en arm 786, som ar vridbart lagrad ph ramen 766 pa samma vridtapp som armen 777 och som pressas medurs, sasom franigar av fig. 30, av en mellan armen 876 och ramen 766 ansluten fjader 787. En hake 788 pa armens 786 ande ingriper nor-malt med en fyrkanttapp 789, vilken ar fastsatt pa sparrorganet 776 for att forhindra att detta sparrorgan forflyttas at hoger av fjddern 779. A surface 784 of the ratchet member 781 cooperates with a pin 785 on an arm 786, which is rotatably mounted on the frame 766 on the same pivot pin as the arm 777 and which is pressed clockwise, as shown in Fig. 30, by a connector connected between the arm 876 and the frame 766 spring 787. A hook 788 on the spirit of the arm 786 normally engages a square pin 789, which is secured to the ratchet member 776 to prevent this ratchet member from being moved to the right of the spring 779.

Armen 778 (fig. 30) ar forsedd med en forlangning 790, som är anordnad att samverka med en rulle 791 pa en vinkelhdvarm 792, vilken ar fritt lagrad pd en axel med en rad tangentlas 793. Vinkelhavarmen 792 ar i sin andra ande slitsad for att upptaga en rulle 794 pa en av en annan vinkelhavarms 795 armar, vilken andra vinkelhavarm ãr anbringad i maskinstativet och vridbart ansluten till en lank 796 (fig. 30 och 31), som bibringas en omstallningsrorelse genom att en slits i lanken samverkar med en tapp 797, som ãr fastsatt vid en pd maskinstativet monterad konsol 798. Lankens 796 fria ande utskjuter genom den bakre platen 764 saint ar forsedd med en urtagning for ingrepp med en tapp 800 pa en arm 801, vilken ar vridbart lagrad pa en vid platen 764 fastsatt konsol 806. Armen 801 bestar av tvd delar, vilka dro installbara i forhallande till -varandra samt utgor paverkningsorgan for de pa platen 764 anbringade kontakterna SC50a1. The arm 778 (Fig. 30) is provided with an extension 790, which is arranged to cooperate with a roller 791 on an angular arm 792, which is freely mounted on a shaft with a row of key locks 793. The angle arm 792 is slotted in its second end for receiving a roller 794 on one of the arms of another angle holder 795, which second angle holder arm is mounted in the machine frame and rotatably connected to a link 796 (Figs. 30 and 31), which is imparted a rearrangement movement by a slot in the link cooperating with a pin 797, which is attached to a bracket 798 mounted on the machine frame. bracket 806. The arm 801 consists of two parts, which can be installed in relation to each other and constitute the actuating means for the contacts SC50a1 mounted on the plate 764.

Nedtryckning av nagon av tangenterna 751 iiad 1 medfor, forutom att tillhOrande kontakt av kontakterna SC52a1—SC59a1 slutes, aft .cp5rrnrgapPt 781 Ornstalles nedAt och At vanster (fig. 30) genom att tappen 767 pd den nedtryckta tangenten 751 Or kontakt med motsvarande kamyta 783 pa sparrorganet. Armen 786 omstalles harvid at vanster genom att ytan 784 samverkar med tappen 785, varvid haken 788 bringas ur ingrepp med fyrkanttappen 789. Hdrigenom frigores sparrorganet 776 och kan rora sig uppat och at hoger under inverkan av fjadern 779. Sparrdelarna 780 ph namnda sparrorgan flyttas till ingrepp med tangenttapparna 767, sa att den 71 — — nedtryckta tangenten 751 lases i nedtryckt tillstand och ovriga tangenter i rad 1 icke kunna nedtryckas. Rorelsen uppat och at Niger hos sparrorganet 776 medfor aven att armen 778 vrides moturs, sa att fOrlangningen 790 samverkar med rullen 791, varigenom vinkelhavarmarna 792 vrides medurs runt lasraden 793. Denna rorelse orsakar att kontakterna SC50a1 slutas medelst vinkelhavarmen 795, lanken 796 och armen 801. Depression of any of the keys 751 iiad 1 entails, in addition to closing the associated contact of the contacts SC52a1 — SC59a1, aft .cp5rrnrgapPt 781 on the sparring organ. The arm 786 is adjusted to the left by the surface 784 cooperating with the pin 785, whereby the hook 788 is brought out of engagement with the square pin 789. Thereby the ratchet member 776 is released and can move upwards and to the right under the influence of the spring 779. The ratchet parts 780 ph engagement with the key pins 767, so that the 71 - - key 751 is read in the depressed state and other keys in line 1 cannot be pressed. The upward movement and Niger of the ratchet member 776 also causes the arm 778 to rotate counterclockwise, so that the extension 790 cooperates with the roller 791, whereby the angle holders 792 are rotated clockwise around the laser row 793. This movement causes the contacts SC50a1 to be closed by the angle lever 79 .

Vid slutet av varje operationscykel vrides lasraden 793 moturs pA kant salt. En arm 802 är fastsatt vid lasraden 793 och roterar tillsammans med denna samt är fOrsedd med en yta 803, vilken samverkar riled en tapp 804 pa vinkelhavarmen 792, da tangentlasraden 793 vrides moturs. Genom att ytan 803 och tappen 804 samverka, kommer vinkelhavarmen att dragas med och vridas moturs tillsammans med armen 802. Harigenom omstalles lanken 796 At vanster, sasom framgar av fig. 30 och 31, varigenom en fjader 805, som stracker sig mellan armen 801 och den namnda armen uppbarande konsolen, svanger namnda arm medurs och 8ppnar kontakterna SC50a1. Vinkelhdvarmens 792 motursrorelse Overfores dessutom via rullen 791 och forldngningen 790 till sparrorganet 776, vilket harvid fares nedat och at vanster, sasom framgar av fig. 30, varigenom sparrhaken 780 pa namnda sparrorgan drages fran tappen 767 pA den nedtryckta tangenten i rad 1, sa att fjadern 770 kan aterfora tangenten till opaverkat lage samt varigenom fyrkanttappen 789 forflyttas till ett lage, i vilket den Aterigen kommer till ingrepp med haken 788 pa armen 786. Da den nedtryckta tangenten 751 aterfores till opaverkat lage omstalles sparrorganet 781 at hoger, sasom framgar av fig. 30, av sin fjader 787. I detta opaverkade lage ingriper haken 788 med fyrkanttappen 789 och hindrar darigenom sparrorganet 776 frau att rora sig uppat och at hoger, till dess en annan tangent i rad 1 nedtryckes. At the end of each operating cycle, the welding row 793 is turned counterclockwise on the edge of the salt. An arm 802 is attached to the welding row 793 and rotates together with it and is provided with a surface 803, which cooperates with a pin 804 on the angle lever 792, when the key laser row 793 is rotated counterclockwise. By the surface 803 and the pin 804 cooperating, the angle holder arm will be pulled with and rotated counterclockwise together with the arm 802. This changes the lane 796 to the left, as shown in Figs. 30 and 31, whereby a spring 805 extending between the arm 801 and the said arm carrying the console, the said arm swings clockwise and opens the contacts SC50a1. The counterclockwise movement of the angle heater 792 is further transmitted via the roller 791 and the extension 790 to the ratchet member 776, which is then lowered and left, as shown in Fig. 30, whereby the ratchet hook 780 on said ratchet member is pulled from the pin 767 on the depressed key in row 1. the spring 770 can return the key to the unaffected position and whereby the square pin 789 is moved to a position in which the Aterigen engages the hook 788 on the arm 786. When the depressed key 751 is returned to the unaffected position, the ratchet member 781 is moved to the right, as shown in fig. 30, of its spring 787. In this unaffected position, the hook 788 engages the square pin 789, thereby preventing the ratchet member 776 from moving upward and to the right until another key in row 1 is depressed.

Det är tydligt, att tangenterna i rad 1 aro anordnade sâ, att den paverkade kontakten av kontakterna SC52a1—SC59a1 kommer att slutas fore kontakterna SC50a1 vid nedtryckningen av en tangent, och att vid avslutandet av en operationscykel kontakterna SC50a1 oppnas fore den paverkade kontakten av kontakterna SC52a1--SC59a1, da motsvarande tangent 751 RprfArps till vilnmge. netta ham skett fOr att kontakterna SC50a1 i stallet for de individuella kontakterna SC52a1—SC59a1 skall sluta och bryta de Over dessa kontakter gaende kretsarna, vilket dr bast ur konstrukbons- och servicesynpunkter. It is clear that the keys in row 1 are arranged so that the affected contact of the contacts SC52a1 — SC59a1 will be closed before the contacts SC50a1 when a key is pressed, and that at the end of an operation cycle the contacts SC50a1 are opened before the affected contact of the contacts SC52a1 - SC59a1, then corresponding key 751 RprfArps to vilnmge. This has been done so that the contacts SC50a1 in the place of the individual contacts SC52a1 — SC59a1 will stop and break the circuits going over these contacts, which is due to design and service points of view.

Kontrollorgan for raderna 7 och 8. Control means for rows 7 and 8.

Vid nedtryckning av en tangent i en av eller hada raderna 7 och 8, paverkas organ for styrning av ett flertal elektriska kontakter. When a key is pressed into one of or had lines 7 and 8, means for controlling a plurality of electrical contacts are actuated.

Var och en av kassaregisterraderna 7 och 8 ar utrustad med ett kontrollsparrorgan 810 (fig. 33 och 35), som är anordnat i radernas 7 och 8 tangentram med hjalp av tva armar 811 och 812, som aro vridbart lagrade pa ramen och pa sparrorgan.ets 810 andpunkter och som fores uppat av en icke visad fjader. Pa sparrorganet 810 finnas kamytor 813, vilka ligga mitt cmot tappar 814 pa varje tangents 7531 raderna 7 och 8 stjalk. Each of the cash register rows 7 and 8 is equipped with a control locking means 810 (Figs. 33 and 35), which is arranged in the key frame of the rows 7 and 8 by means of two arms 811 and 812, which are rotatably mounted on the frame and on the locking means. ets 810 oppositions and which is carried up by a feather (not shown). On the ratchet member 810 there are cam surfaces 813, which lie opposite the pin 814 on the rows 7 and 8 stalks of each key 7531.

En forlangning 815 pa armen 812 uppbar en tapp 816, som samverkar med ett finger 817 pa ett organ 818, vilket är fritt lagrat pa kassaregistrets aterstallningsaxel 819. Ett andra finger 820 pa organet 818 samverkar med en tapp 821 pa en arm 822, vilken är fritt lagrad pa tangentlasaxeln 793. Sasom framgar av fig. 35 aro raderna 7 och 8 vardera forsedda med ett organ 818 och en arm 822. An extension 815 on the arm 812 carried a pin 816 which cooperates with a finger 817 on a member 818 which is freely mounted on the cash register 819 of the cash register. A second finger 820 on the member 818 cooperates with a pin 821 on an arm 822 which is freely mounted on the key laser shaft 793. As shown in Fig. 35, the rows 7 and 8 are each provided with a member 818 and an arm 822.

Var och en av armarna 822 är forsedd med en utskarning, vilken upptager bygeln 823 pa ett ok 824, vilket dr forsett med armar 825 och 826, som dr fritt lagrade pa tangentlasaxeln 793. Oket 824 Hires moturs runt tangentlasaxeln 793 av en fjader 827, som är forbunden med namnda arm och vanstra sidogaveln 828. Vid okets 821 bygel 823 ar en arm 829 fastsatt, vilken dr vridbart forbunden med ert lank 830 (fig. 33 och 34), som är glidbart anordnad i maskinstativet och som stracker sig genom en oppning i den bakre platen 764. Lankens ande dr forsedd med en installbar tapp 831, som samverkar med en kontaktfjader 832 i en sats kontakter SC48ac1—SC48bel pa platen 764. Each of the arms 822 is provided with a cutout which receives the yoke 823 on a yoke 824, which there is provided with arms 825 and 826 which are freely mounted on the key laser shaft 793. The yoke 824 is rotated counterclockwise around the key laser shaft 793 by a spring 827. which is connected to said arm and the left side end 828. At the yoke 821 yoke 823 is attached an arm 829 which is rotatably connected to your lane 830 (Figs. 33 and 34), which is slidably arranged in the machine frame and which extends through a opening in the rear plate 764. The second end of the link is provided with an installable pin 831, which cooperates with a contact spring 832 in a set of contacts SC48ac1 — SC48bel on the plate 764.

Vid nedtryckning av en tangent 753 (fig. 29) i en av eller bada raderna 7 och 8 pa tangentbordet omstalles motsvarande sparrorgan 810 nedat och at vanster, sasom framgar av fig. 33. Denna rorelse overfores genom armen 812, organet 818 och armen 822 till oket 824 och den darpa fastsatta armen 829, sa att Milken 8, fores at hoger (fig. 33 och 34). Tappen 831 pa lanken 830 samverkar med kontaktfjadern 832, sa att kontakterna SC48acl slutas och kontakterna SC48bel Oppnas. When a key 753 (Fig. 29) is pressed into one of or both rows 7 and 8 of the keyboard, the corresponding ratchet member 810 is rearranged downwards and left, as shown in Fig. 33. This movement is transmitted through the arm 812, the member 818 and the arm 822. to the yoke 824 and the darpa fastened arm 829, so that the Milken 8, fores at hoger (fig. 33 and 34). The pin 831 on the link 830 cooperates with the contact spring 832, so that the contacts SC48acl are closed and the contacts SC48bel are opened.

Vid slutet av operationscykeln frig8r en vanlig, har icke visad, frigoringsmekanism den eller de nedtryckta tangenterna i raderna 7 och 8, varvid dessa raders sparrorgan kunna aterga till norm.11age. Harvid forflyttas tappen 816 ur blockeringsldget med fingret 817 pa organet 818 och tillates fjadern 827 att aterfora organen 818, armarna 822, oket 824, armen 829 och Milken. 830 till de I fig. 33 visade lagena, varigenom kontakterna SC18ae1 oppnas och kontakterna SC48bc1 slutas. At the end of the operation cycle, a standard release mechanism (not shown) releases the key or keys pressed in rows 7 and 8, whereby the ratchet means of these rows can return to normal. In this case, the pin 816 is moved out of the blocking layer with the finger 817 on the member 818 and the spring 827 is allowed to return the members 818, the arms 822, the yoke 824, the arm 829 and the Milken. 830 to the layers shown in Fig. 33, whereby the contacts SC18ae1 are opened and the contacts SC48bc1 are closed.

Kontrollorgan for rad 9. Control body for row 9.

Vid nedtryckning av en tangent i rad 9 paverka organ elektriska kontakter for kon- — —21 troll av uppteckningsanlaggningens operationer. When a key in row 9 is pressed, means influence electrical contacts for controlling the operations of the recording facility.

Rad 9 i kassaregistrets tangentbord 750 är forsedd med tva sparrorgan 838 och 839 (fig. 37 resp. 36) med kamytor 840 och 841, vilka samverka med tappar 842 pa tangenter- nas 754 i rad 9 (fig. 29) stjalkar 843. Sparr- organet 839 (fig. 36) har endast en kamyta 841, vilken ligger mitt emot tappen 842 pa. Row 9 in the cash register keyboard 750 is provided with two ratchet members 838 and 839 (Figs. 37 and 36, respectively) with cam surfaces 840 and 841, which cooperate with pins 842 on the keys 754 in Row 9 (Fig. 29) stems 843. Ratchet the member 839 (Fig. 36) has only one cam surface 841, which is opposite the pin 842 pa.

»Debitering»-tangenten 754, medan sparror- ganet 838 har fyra kamytor 840 mitt emot tapparna 842 pa »Kontant»-, »Debitering»-, Retaining vid leverans»- och »Lagg undan»- tangenterna 754. Sparrorganen 838 och 839 aro forsedda med slitsar for tappar 844, vilka aro anbringade pa tangentramen for rad 9 (icke visad), sâ att namnda sparrorgan kunna glida i ramen. The "Debit" key 754, while the sparring means 838 has four cam surfaces 840 opposite the pins 842 on the "Cash", "Debit", Retaining on delivery "and" Save "keys 754. The sparring means 838 and 839 are provided with slots for pins 844, which are mounted on the key frame for row 9 (not shown), so that said ratchet means can slide in the frame.

Pa sparrorganet 838 finnes en tapp 845, som samverkar med ett finger 846 pa en lank 847, som ãr glidbart anordnad i maskinsta- tivet och som stracker sig genom en oppning i den bakre platen 764. Lankens andra ande uppbar en rulle 848, vilken samverkar med en kontaktfjader 849 for en sats kontakter SC61a1 pa platen 764. On the ratchet member 838 there is a pin 845 which cooperates with a finger 846 on a length 847 which is slidably arranged in the machine frame and which extends through an opening in the rear plate 764. The second end of the link carried a roller 848 which cooperates with a contact spring 849 for a set contacts SC61a1 on the plate 764.

Pa sparrorganet 839 finnes en tapp 850, vilken skjuter genom en av sparrorganets 838 slitsar, och samverkar med ett finger 851, som är forsett med en urtagning, pa en lank 852, vilken är glidbart anordnad pa samnm organ, som lanken 847, och som stracker sig genom en oppning i den bakre platen 764 samt uppbar en mile 853 med sin andra ande, vilken rulle samverkar med en kontaktfjader 854 for en sats kontakter SC47acl och SC47bc1, vilka sammanforts med de tidigare namnda kontakterna SC61a1 ph. platen 764. On the ratchet member 839 there is a pin 850, which projects through one of the slots of the ratchet member 838, and cooperates with a finger 851, which is provided with a recess, on a tongue 852, which is slidably arranged on the same member, as the tongue 847, and which extends through an opening in the rear plate 764 and carries a mile 853 with its second spirit, which roller cooperates with a contact spring 854 for a set of contacts SC47acl and SC47bc1, which are merged with the previously mentioned contacts SC61a1 ph. plates 764.

De hada lankarna 817 och 852 pressas nor-malt at hOger av en fjader 855, som ãr an- ordnad mellan en av lankarnas lagertappar och en tapp 856 pa Milken 847 och stracker sig genom en slits i lanken 852. The hinge lanes 817 and 852 are normally pressed to the right by a spring 855, which is arranged between one of the lugs' bearing pins and a pin 856 on the Milken 847 and extends through a slot in the lane 852.

Vid nedtryckning av flagon av tangenterna 754, med undantag av »Uteslutning»-tangen- ten, samverkar tappen 842 pa denna tangent med ytan 840, sa att sparrorganet 838 fores vanster. Denna rorelse Overfores genom tappen 845 och fingret 846 till lanken 847 och dess rulle 848, varigenom kontakterna SC61a1 slutas. When the flake of the keys 754 is depressed, with the exception of the "Exclusion" key, the pin 842 on this key interacts with the surface 840, so that the locking member 838 is moved to the left. This movement is transmitted through the pin 845 and the finger 846 to the tongue 847 and its roller 848, thereby closing the contacts SC61a1.

Om »Debitering»-tangenten 754 nedtryckes kommer dess tapp 842, forutom att fora sparrorganet 838 at vanster, att samverka med kamytan 841 och darvid fora sparrorganet 839 at vanster. Derma rOrelse overfores genera tappen 850 och fingret 851 till Milken 852 och dess rulle 853, varigenom kontakterna SC47acl slutas och kontakterna SC47bel oppnas. If the "Debit" key 754 is pressed, its pin 842, in addition to leading the ratchet member 838 to the left, will cooperate with the cam surface 841 and thereby guide the ratchet member 839 to the left. This movement is transferred from the pin 850 and the finger 851 to the Milken 852 and its roller 853, whereby the contacts SC47acl are closed and the contacts SC47bel are opened.

Vid siutet av maskinens operationscykel frigor en vanlig frigbringsmekanism nedtryekta tangenter I rad 9 saint tillatas sparrorganen 838 och 839 att aterga till sina nor mala lagen. Harvid iIppnas kontakterna SC61a1 och SC47acl och slutas kontakterna SC47bc1 medelst det ovan beskrivna lanksystemet. At the end of the machine's operating cycle, a conventional release mechanism releases depressed keys. The contacts SC61a1 and SC47ac1 are then opened and the contacts SC47bc1 are closed by means of the link system described above.

Selektoromkopplare. Selector switch.

Kontroll, klassificerings- och beloppdifferentialmekanismerna paverka kanda omkopplare, av vilka vissa styra utvaljningen av stansar i uppteckningsanordningen for stansning av de medelst tangenterna uppstallda vardena i enlighet med en forutbestamd kod, medan andra omkopplare utvalja ett stansningsprogram i Overensstammelse med vardenas betydelse och andra omkopplare utfora andra funktioner under uppteckningsanordningens operationer. Dessa omkopplare komma icke att beskrivas i detalj. The control, classification and amount differential mechanisms affect known switches, some of which control the selection of punches in the recording device for punching the values set by the keys in accordance with a predetermined code, while other switches select a punching program in accordance with other values. functions during the operations of the recording device. These switches will not be described in detail.

De med SR41a1, SR41a2 och SR41a3 beteeknade selektoromkopplarna installas me-deist tangenterna i tangentbordets rad 1, de med SR49a1, SR49a2 och SR49a3, betecknade omkopplarna installas medelst tangenterna rad 9 och de med SR42a1—SR48a1 betecknade omkopplarna installas medelst beloppsoch klassificeringsdifferentialmekanismerna raderna 2-8. The selector switches denoted by SR41a1, SR41a2 and SR41a3 are installed by means of the keys in row 1 of the keyboard, the switches denoted by SR49a1, SR49a2 and SR49a3 are installed by means of the row 9 keys and the class switches .

Motsvarande sifferkontakter i omkopplarna SR42a1—SR48a1 aro vardera forbundna med motsvarande ledare 888 (fig. 43D), vilka gâ till uttag, dvs. alla kontakter i »noll»-laget aro anslutna till samma uttagsledare, alla kontakterna i »ett»-laget aro anslutna till samma uttagsledare osv. Uttagsledarna aro anslutna till uttag i sektionen 889. pa kassaregistrets utvaljningspanel 748. The corresponding number contacts in the switches SR42a1 — SR48a1 are each connected to the corresponding conductors 888 (Fig. 43D), which go to sockets, ie. all contacts in the "zero" team are connected to the same socket conductor, all contacts in the "one" team are connected to the same socket conductor, and so on. The withdrawal leaders are connected to withdrawals in section 889. on the cash register's selection panel 748.

Omkopplarnas SR41a1, SR41a2 och SR49a1 kontakter aro Oxen anslutna till uttag i panelen 748. Omkopplarens SR41a1 olika kontakter aro individuellt fOrbundna med uttag i en sektion 890 (fig. 43D) I utvaljningspanelen 748, programomkopplarens SR41a2 olika kontakter aro individuellt forbundna med uttag i en sektion 891 i panelen 748 och omkopplarens SR49a1 olika kontakter aro individuellt forbundna med uttag i en sektion. 892 i panelen 748. Switches SR41a1, SR41a2 and SR49a1 contacts aro Taurus connected to sockets in panel 748. The switch's SR41a1 different contacts are individually connected to sockets in a section 890 (fig. 43D) 891 in the panel 748 and the various contacts of the switch SR49a1 are individually connected to sockets in a section. 892 in panel 748.

De aterstaende sektionerna i kassaregistrets programpanel komma att beskrivas i detalj i samband med genomgangen av fig. 43k-43.F och harvid kommer aven omkopplarnas och utvaljningspanelens 748 kontrollfunktioner och inverkan pa uppteckningsanlaggningen alt fArldaras. The remaining sections of the cash register's program panel will be described in detail in connection with the review of Figs.

Omkopplare tillhorande summaspaken. Switch belonging to the sum lever.

Omkopplingsorgan styras av summaspaken 755 och slutas i »addering»- och »summa poster»-lagena samt oppnas i .alla andra lagen. Switching means are controlled by the sum lever 755 and end in the "add" and "sum items" laws and are opened in all other laws.

Ett segment 988 (fig. 38) am fastsatt pa en axel 989, vilken styres av summaspaken 7pa kant sail. En slits 990 i segmentet 988 upptager en tapp 991, som ar fastsatt 1 an- 22- -If den pa en arm 992,'vi1ken är vridbart lagrad pa en i maskinstativet anbringad tapp 993, varvid slitsen har en sadan form med ett sidofOrskjutet parti, att da summaspaken 755 befinner sig i »addering»- eller »summa poster»-laget tappen 991 kommer att befinna sig i det sidoforskjutna partiet. En lank 994 ãr vridbart lagrad pa den fria anden pa armen 992 och utskjuter genom en oppning i den bakre platen 764 saint ãr med sin andra ande vridbart ansluten till en vinkelhaVarm 995 (fig. 38), vilken är vridbart lagrad ph en uwid platen 764 fastsatt konsol 996. En forlangning 997, som är installbart anbringad pa havarmen 995 är forsedd med en rulle 998, som samverkar med inbordes forbundna fjaderkontakter 999 och 1000 pa en sats kontakter SC44b1 och SC44b2 pa den bakre platen 764. A segment 988 (Fig. 38) is attached to a shaft 989, which is guided by the sum lever 7 on the edge sail. A slot 990 in the segment 988 receives a pin 991, which is fixed to it on an arm 992, which is rotatably mounted on a pin 993 mounted in the machine frame, the slot having such a shape with a laterally offset portion. , that when the sum lever 755 is in the "add" or "sum records" layer, the pin 991 will be in the laterally offset portion. A long 994 is rotatably mounted on the free spirit of the arm 992 and projects through an opening in the rear plate 764 saint with its second spirit rotatably connected to an angular heater 995 (Fig. 38), which is rotatably mounted on the outer plate 764. attached bracket 996. An extension 997, which is installably mounted on the sea arm 995, is provided with a roller 998, which cooperates with inboard connected spring contacts 999 and 1000 on a set of contacts SC44b1 and SC44b2 on the rear plate 764.

Det är tydligt, att da suMmaspaken 755 installes i »addering)- eller »summa posterlaget fran nagot av de ovriga lagena, sa kommer det sidoforskjutna partiet ph slitsen 990 att medf5ra att den dari belagna tappen 991 omstalles uppat, varvid armen 992 svanges moturs. Denna rorelse overfores medelst Milken 994 till havarmen 995, sa att denna vrides moturs, varvid rullen 998 trycker mot kontaktfjadrarna 999 och 1000, sá att kontakterna SC44b1 och SC44b2 slutas. Dessa kontakter komma att forbliva slutna sa lange summaspaken 755 star i »addering»- eller »summa poster»-lage och aterstallas till op-pet laze, dS spaken fares till annat lage. It is clear that when the sum lever 755 is installed in the "addition" - or "sum" of the poster layer from any of the other layers, the laterally displaced portion of the slot 990 will cause the pin 991 covered therein to be rearranged upwards, the arm 992 being pivoted counterclockwise. This movement is transmitted by means of the Milken 994 to the sea arm 995, so that it is turned counterclockwise, whereby the roller 998 presses against the contact springs 999 and 1000, so that the contacts SC44b1 and SC44b2 are closed. These contacts will remain closed as long as the total lever 755 is in the "add" or "total records" position and is restored to the open position, ie the lever is moved to another position.

Omkopplarorgan sarnhorande med paverkningsspaken. Switch means associated with the actuating lever.

FOr paverkning av vissa omkopplare i kassaregistret i sambandThied nednyckning av »paverknings»-spaken 756 oak for aterstallning av namnda omkopplare till deras normala lagen aro speciella organ anordnade. For the effect of certain switches in the cash register in connection with the lowering of the "influence" lever 756 also for the restoration of said switches to their normal law, special bodies are provided.

Spaken 756 Sr anordnad pa en slid 1100 Pa Milken 1107 finnes en stopplatta 1113, vars ovre kant normalt ingriper med den nedre kanten pa en halvcylindrisk tapp 1114, vilken Sr fastsatt pa en stang 1115, som fores nedat av en fjader 1116 och som kan bibringas glidningsrorelse genom samverkan mellan en slits 1117 i dess nedre ande och en tapp 1110 och genom samverkan mellan en slits i dess ovre ande och en tapp 1118 pa maskinstativet. En fOrlangning 1119 pa stangens 1115 ovre ande Sr fOrsedd med en tapp 1120, som glider i en slits 1121 i en yinkelhavarms 1122 ena arm, vilken vinkelhavarm Sr vridbart lagrad p5 tappen 1118. Ett paverkningsorgan 1123 Sr vridbart lagrat havarmens 1122 andra arm samt Sr forsett med en slits 1124 for upptagning av en tapp 1125 i maskinstativet, varigenom organet kan bibringas glidningsrorelse. Pa organet 1123 dr installbart anordnad en forlangning 1126, vars fria ande uppbar en rulle 1127, som samverkar med de inbOrdes forbundna kontaktfjddrarna 1128, 1129 och 1130 ph kontakterna SC45a1 respektive SC45a2 och SC45a3, vilka aro anbringade ph platen 764. The lever 756 is arranged on a slide 1100. On the Milken 1107 there is a stop plate 1113, the upper edge of which normally engages the lower edge of a semi-cylindrical pin 1114, which is fixed on a rod 1115, which is guided downwards by a spring 1116 and which can be imparted. sliding movement by the interaction between a slot 1117 in its lower spirit and a pin 1110 and by the interaction between a slot in its upper spirit and a pin 1118 on the machine frame. An extension 1119 on the upper end of the rod 1115 is provided with a pin 1120, which slides in a slot 1121 in one arm of an angle holder 1122, which angle holder arm is rotatably mounted on the pin 1118. An actuating member 1123 is rotatably mounted on the second arm of the lever arm 1122 and with a slot 1124 for receiving a pin 1125 in the machine frame, whereby the member can be provided with sliding movement. Arranged on the member 1123 is an extension 1126, the free spirit of which carries a roller 1127, which cooperates with the interconnected contact springs 1128, 1129 and 1130 ph contacts SC45a1 and SC45a2 and SC45a3, respectively, which are mounted on the plate 764.

Vid nedtryckning av spaken 756 fores genom armen 1105 och lanken 1107 stopplattan 1113 at 'lager ur banan for tappen 1114 pa stangen 1115, varigenom stangen frig8res och Ewes nedat av fjadern 1116. Harvid vrides vinkelhavarmen 1122 moturs och omstaller organet 1123, forlangningen 1126 och rullen 1127 St hoger, sa att namnda rulle samverkar med de inbordes fOrbundna kontaktfjadrarna 1128, 1129 och 1130 pa kontakterna SC45a1, SC45a2 och SC45a3 sa, att namnda kontakter slutas och kvarhallas i slutet lage till dess stangen 1115 aterfores till sitt normala lage. When the lever 756 is depressed, the stop plate 1113 is passed through the arm 1105 and the link 1107 to bear out of the path of the pin 1114 on the rod 1115, whereby the rod is released and Ewes downwards by the spring 1116. 1127 St right, so that said roller cooperates with the inboard connected contact springs 1128, 1129 and 1130 on the contacts SC45a1, SC45a2 and SC45a3 so that said contacts are closed and retained at the end position until the rod 1115 is returned to its normal position.

Stangen 1115 fiterfores till del i fig. 40 visade laget medelst en aterforingshavarm 1131. Pa tangentlasraden 793 Sr en arm 1132 fastsatt. En tapp 1133 ph armen 1132 samverkar med en motsvarande urtagning i hayarmen 1131, vilken Sven Sr anbringad tangen.tlasraden, sa att namnda havarm utfor samma rorelse, som armen 1132. Vid slutet av varje maskinoperationscykel vrides tangentlasraden 793 pa kant salt. Harvid kommer havarmen 1131 i kontakt med tap-pen 1134 pa stangen 1115, da stangen strax innan forts nedat och for stangen uplift till det i fig. 40 visade laget. Fjaderverkan hos kontaktfjadrarna 1128, 1129 och 1130 orsakar att de aterforas till de I fig. 40 visade ISgena, d. rullen 1127 fiirts at vanster, varigenom kontakterna SC45a1, SC45a2 och SC45a3 oppnas. The rod 1115 is partially lined with the layer shown in Fig. 40 by means of a return holder arm 1131. An arm 1132 is fixed to the tangent row 803. A pin 1133 ph arm 1132 cooperates with a corresponding recess in the shear arm 1131, which Sven Sr attached the tangent.las line, so that said sea arm performs the same movement as the arm 1132. At the end of each machine operation cycle, the tangent string 793 is rotated on edge salt. In this case, the sea arm 1131 comes into contact with the pin 1134 on the rod 1115, when the rod just before continues downwards and moves the rod uplift to the layer shown in Fig. 40. The spring action of the contact springs 1128, 1129 and 1130 causes them to be returned to the IS genes shown in Fig. 40, i.e. the roller 1127 is moved to the left, whereby the contacts SC45a1, SC45a2 and SC45a3 are opened.

Lanken 1107, som hallits i sitt paverkade lage till hoger om det i fig. 39 och 40 visade laget genom samverkan mellan tappen 1114 och den vertikala ytan 1135 pa. plattan 1113, kommer sedan att foras t vanster till det i fig. 39 och 40 visade laget, genom paverkan av fjadern 1112, sa att stopplattans 1113 ho- — —23 risontella yta komm . er sparrande forhallande till tappen 1114, varigenom stangen 1115 kyarhalles i det i fig. 40 visade laget. The link 1107, which is held in its impacted layer to the right of the layer shown in Figs. 39 and 40 by co-operation between the pin 1114 and the vertical surface 1135 pa. plate 1113, will then be moved to the left of the layer shown in Figs. 39 and 40, by the action of the spring 1112, so that the horizontal surface of the stop plate 1113 will come. is a sparring relation to the pin 1114, whereby the rod 1115 is held in the layer shown in Fig. 40.

Indikatorsegmentstyrda omkopplare. Indicator segment controlled switches.

For paverkan ay vissa omkopplare i kassaregistret under kontroll ay indikatorsegmentet i rad 1 finnas olika organ. For the influence of certain switches in the cash register under control of the indicator segment in row 1, there are different bodies.

Ett indikatorinstallande segment 873 (fig. 40) for rad 1 styres av denna rads differentialmekanism pa kant satt och installes i enlighet med laget av namnda differentialmekanism. En skiva 1144 (fig. 40 och 41), som ãr fastsatt yid segmentet 873 är forsedd med en slits 1145, i vilken en tapp glider, vilken tapp uppbares ay ena anden pa en havarm 1147, som ãr vridbart lagrad mellan sina andpunkter pa en konsol 1148, som ãr fastsatt pa maskinstativet. Slitsen 1145 ãr forsedd med ett nedat forskjutet parti i ett lage, som motsvarar differentialmekanismens lage 4 (eller kundnumret) samt med ett uppat forskjutet parti i ett lage, som motsvarar differentialmekanismens lage 9 (eller expeditnumret). En andra tapp 1149 är fastsatt pa havarmcns 1147 andra ande och in-griper med en gaffelformad anddel pa ett paverkningsorgan 1150, som är vridbart lag-rat pA en konsol 1151 pa platen 764. An indicator installation segment 873 (Fig. 40) for row 1 is controlled by the differential mechanism of this row on the edge and is installed in accordance with the layer of said differential mechanism. A disc 1144 (Figs. 40 and 41), which is fixed to the segment 873, is provided with a slot 1145, in which a pin slides, which pin is supported in one breath on a sea arm 1147, which is rotatably mounted between its points on a console 1148, which is fixed on the machine stand. The slot 1145 is provided with a downwardly offset portion in a layer, which corresponds to the differential mechanism layer 4 (or the customer number) and with an upwardly offset portion in a layer, which corresponds to the differential mechanism layer 9 (or the clerk number). A second pin 1149 is attached to the second end of the sea arm 1147 and engages with a fork-shaped portion on an actuator 1150 which is rotatably mounted on a bracket 1151 on the plate 764.

En rulle 1152 (fig. 41) pa en forlangning 1156, som är installbart fastsatt pa organets 1150 andra ande, ãr anordnad att samverka med en for kontakterna SC46acl och SC46bc1 gemensam kontaktfjader samt med tya inbOrdes forenade kontaktfjadrar 1154 och 1155, vilka bildar delar av kontakterna SC43a1 och SC43a2. Samtliga kontakter SC43a1, SC43a2 och SC46ael saint SC46bc1 aro fastsatta pa platen 764. A roller 1152 (Fig. 41) on an extension 1156, which is installably attached to the second end of the member 1150, is arranged to co-operate with a contact spring common to the contacts SC46ac1 and SC46bc1 and with the contact springs 1154 and 1155 joined together, which form parts of contacts SC43a1 and SC43a2. All contacts SC43a1, SC43a2 and SC46ael saint SC46bc1 are fixed on plate 764.

DA differentialmekanismen for rad 1 installes 1 godtyckligt lage, med undantag av lagena for 4 och 9, kommer tappen 1146 att ligga i sIitsens 1145 huvuddel, havarmen 1147 och payerkningsorganet 1150 befinna sig i det i fig. 41 visade laget och de av denna mekanism styrda kontakterna befinna sig i sina normala lagen. Kontakterna SC43a1, SC43a2 och SC46acl aro saledes oppna, medan kontakterna SC46bc1 aro slutna. When the differential mechanism of row 1 is installed in any bearing, with the exception of the bearings of 4 and 9, the pin 1146 will be in the main part of the seat 1145, the lever arm 1147 and the payer means 1150 will be in the layer shown in Fig. 41 and controlled by this mechanism. the contacts are in their normal laws. Contacts SC43a1, SC43a2 and SC46ac1 are thus open, while contacts SC46bc1 are closed.

DA differentialmekanismen for rad 1 installes 1 lage 4 (eller kundnununerlaget) omstalles skivan 1144 sa, att tappen 1146 glider in i det nedersta sidoforskjutna partiet i slitsen 1145, -varigenom havarmen 1147 svanges moturs och paverkningsorganet 1150 medurs, sa att rullen 1152 for de forbundna kontaktfjadrarna 1154 och 1155 at hOger, varvid kontakterna SC43a1 och SC43a2 slutas. Kontakterna SC46acl och SC46bc1 paverkas joke och forbliva salunda appna respektive slutna. When the differential mechanism for row 1 is installed in layer 4 (or customer base layer), the disc 1144 is rearranged so that the pin 1146 slides into the lower laterally offset portion of the slot 1145, thereby pivoting the lever 1147 counterclockwise and the actuator 1150 clockwise so that the roller 1152 for the connected the contact springs 1154 and 1155 at the right, closing the contacts SC43a1 and SC43a2. The contacts SC46acl and SC46bc1 are affected jokingly and remain thus the apps respectively closed.

Da differentialmekanismen for rad 1 installes i lage 9 (eller expeditnummerlaget) omstalles skivan 1144 sá, att tappen 1146 glider i det uppat sidoforskjutna partiet av slitsen 1145 yarigenom hayarmen 1147 vrides mednrs och paverkningsorganet 1150 moturs, sa att rullen 1152 for bladfjadern 1153 at vanster, varvid kontakterna SC46bc1 oppnas och kontakterna SC46acl slutas. Kontakterna SC43al. och SC43a2 paverkas icke och fOr- bliva salunda i oppet lage. When the differential mechanism for row 1 is installed in layer 9 (or the clerk number layer), the disc 1144 is rearranged so that the pin 1146 slides in the upwardly offset portion of the slot 1145 through the hay arm 1147 is rotated clockwise and the actuator 1150 counterclockwise so that the roller 1152 for leaf spring 1153 whereby the contacts SC46bc1 are opened and the contacts SC46acl are closed. Contacts SC43al. and SC43a2 is not affected and remains salunda in the open layer.

Kontrollorgan for omkopplare, som initiera uppteckning. Control means for switches, which initiate recording.

For styrning av en sats kontakter, vilka initiera en uppteckningsoperation finnas organ, vilka styras av kassaregistret. For controlling a set of contacts which initiate a recording operation there are means which are controlled by the cash register.

PS huvudkamaxeln 1036 i kassaregistret finnes en kamskiva 1161 (fig. 42), vilken samverkar med en rulle 1162 pa en arm 1163, Aitken är fritt lagrad pa en axel 1164, vilken Sr fastsatt i maskinstativet. Medelst en hylsa 1165 fir en andra arm 1166 fastsatt yid am-men 1163, vilken andra arm i sin ande uppbar en tapp 1167. En mellan armen 1166 och stativet anbringad fjader 1168 pressar armama 1163 och 1166 medurs, sA att rullen 1162 anligger mot kamskivan 1161. PS the main camshaft 1036 in the cash register there is a cam disc 1161 (Fig. 42), which cooperates with a roller 1162 on an arm 1163, the shaft is freely mounted on a shaft 1164, which is fixed in the machine frame. By means of a sleeve 1165 for a second arm 1166 attached to the frame 1163, which second arm in its spirit carried a pin 1167. A spring 1168 arranged between the arm 1166 and the frame presses the arms 1163 and 1166 clockwise, so that the roller 1162 abuts against the cam disc 1161

Tappen 1167 ar anordnad att samyerka med en stangs 1169 nedre ande for att fora stangen uppat, fig. 42, mot verkan av en fjader 1170, som stracker sig mellan en tapp 1171 pa stangen 1169 ovre ande och en andra tapp 1172, som Sr fastsatt pa en vinkelhavarm 1173 och som glider i en slits 1174 i stangen 1169. En av yinkelhayarmens 1175 armar Sr vridbart lagrad pa tappen 1171 ph stangens 1169 Ovre Uncle. Vinkelhavarmen 1175 Sr vridbart lagrad pa en ay platen 764 uppburen. konsol 1176. Vinkelhavarmens 1175 andra arm uppbar en installbart anbringad forlangning 1177, vars ande uppbar en rune 1178, som samverkar med kontaktfjadern 1179 pa en sats normalt oppna kontakter SC42a1. The pin 1167 is arranged to co-operate with the lower end of a rod 1169 to guide the rod upwards, Fig. 42, against the action of a spring 1170 extending between a pin 1171 on the upper end of the rod 1169 and a second pin 1172, which is fixed on an angle lever arm 1173 and which slides in a slot 1174 in the rod 1169. One of the arms of the angle shear arm 1175 is rotatably mounted on the pin 1171 ph rod 1169 Upper Uncle. The angle lever 1175 is rotatably mounted on a plate 764 supported. bracket 1176. The second arm of the angle holder 1175 carried an installable mounted extension 1177, the spirit of which carried a rune 1178, which cooperates with the contact spring 1179 on a set of normally open contacts SC42a1.

Kamskivan 1161 Sr sa utformad, att vid 175 graders vridning under en maskinoperation armarna 1163 och 1166 komma att vridas moturs (fig. 42) mot yerkan av fjadern 1168, sa att stangen 1169 fores uppat mot verkan ay fjadern 1170. Denna rorelse Oyerfores genom yinkelhavarmen 1175, forlangningen 1177 och rullen 1178 till kontaktfjadern 1179, vilken fOres At hoger, sasom framgar ay fig. 42, varvid kontakterna SC42a1 slutas. Dessa kontakter forbli slutna till dess kaniskivans 1161 hogsta punkt passerat rullen 1162, dá fjadern 1168 aterfor armarna 1163 och 1166 till de i fig. 42 visade lagena och fjadern 1170 aterfor stangen 1169, vinkelhavarmen 1175 och forlangningen 1177 till de i fig. 42 visade lagena. Kontaktfjadern 1179 fjadrar tillbaka och kontakterna SC42a1 oppnas. The cam disc 1161 Sr is so designed that at a rotation of 175 degrees during a machine operation the arms 1163 and 1166 will be rotated counterclockwise (Fig. 42) towards the surface of the spring 1168, so that the rod 1169 is raised upwards against the action of the spring 1170. This movement is transmitted through the angle lever. 1175, the extension 1177 and the roller 1178 to the contact spring 1179, which is advanced, as shown in Fig. 42, closing the contacts SC42a1. These contacts remain closed until the highest point of the rabbit disc 1161 passes the roller 1162, then the spring 1168 returns the arms 1163 and 1166 to the layers shown in Fig. 42 and the spring 1170 returns the rod 1169, the angle lever 1175 and the extension 1177 to the layers shown in Fig. 42. . The contact spring 1179 springs back and the contacts SC42a1 are opened.

Organ finnas for att forhindra att kontakterna SC42a1 slutas under den forsta cykeln under en summatagningsoperation. rr, 24— — PA en av havarrnens 1047 armar dr fastsatt en lank 1180 (fig. 42), vilken med sin andra ande dr vridbart lagrad vid en arm 1181, som Ar installbart anbringad pa en arm 1182, vilken dr fastsatt pa ena anden av en i maskinstativet anbringad axel 1183. Vid axelns 1183 andra ande fir fastsatt ett segment 1184 med tre styrytor 1185, 1186 och 1187. Dessa ytor dro anordnade att samverka med en tapp 1188, som Ar fastsatt ph vinkelhavarmen 1173, vilken fir vridbart lagrad pa en av platen 764 uppburen konsol 1189 och som fares medurs av en fjader 1190, som stracker sig mellan vinkelhavarmen och en konsol 1191, som dr fastsatt pa platen 764. Means are provided to prevent contacts SC42a1 from being closed during the first cycle of a sum collection operation. rr, 24— - ON one of the arms of the oats 1047 there is attached a long 1180 (fig. 42), which with its second spirit is rotatably mounted on an arm 1181, which is installably mounted on an arm 1182, which there is attached to one other of a shaft 1183 mounted in the machine frame. At the second end of the shaft 1183 a segment 1184 with three guide surfaces 1185, 1186 and 1187 is attached. a bracket 1189 supported by the plate 764 and which is moved clockwise by a spring 1190 which extends between the angle holder arm and a bracket 1191 which is fixed there on the plate 764.

Sasom redan namnts vrides havarmen 1047 nagot medurs, da summaspaken 755 fares till nagot av summatagningslagena. Denna rorelse Overfares genom lanken 1180, annul 1181 och axeln 1183 for installning av segmentet 1184 sa, att dess hogsta yta 1186 anligger med tappen 1188 pa vinkelhavarmen 1173. Vid denna rarelse vrides vinkelhavarmen moturs och darvid omstalles genom tap-pen 1172 och slitsen 1174 stangen 1169 at hoger till det lage, i vilket det delvis visas genom streckade linjer i fig. 42. As already mentioned, the sea arm 1047 is turned slightly clockwise, as the sum lever 755 is moved to something by the sum collection laws. This movement is passed through the line 1180, annulus 1181 and the shaft 1183 for installation of the segment 1184 so that its highest surface 1186 abuts with the pin 1188 on the angle lever 1173. In this movement the angle lever is turned counterclockwise and thereby adjusted through the pin 1172 and the slot 1174 the rod 1169 to the right of the layer, in which it is partly shown by broken lines in Fig. 42.

DA stangen 1169 befinner sig i det med streckade linjer antydda laget ligger den icke langre i tappens 1167 rorelsebana och kommer darfor icke att f8ras uppat och sluta kontakterna SC42a1 under den f5rsta maskincykeln vid en sunanatagningsoperation. Since the rod 1169 is in the layer indicated by dashed lines, it is no longer in the path of movement of the pin 1167 and will therefore not be moved upwards and close the contacts SC42a1 during the first machine cycle in a sun take operation.

Sasom namnts tillfores vid slutet av den forsta maskincykeln vid en summatagningsoperation havarmen 1047 en tillaggsrorelse medurs ph kant satt. Delta medfor att segmentet 1184 genom lanken 1180, armen 1181 och axeln 1183 installes sa, att .ytan 1187 anligger med tappen 1188 pa vinkelhavarmen 1173. Delta tillater vinkelhavarmen att vridas medurs av fjadern 1190 far att aterfora stangen till det i fig. 42 med heldragna linjer visade laget. Sedan kommer vid den andra maskincykeln vid en summatagningsoperation kamskivan 1161 att vrida armarna 1163 och 1166 moturs, sa att kontatkerna SC42a1 slutas en viss lid. As mentioned, at the end of the first machine cycle, in a sum collection operation, the sea arm 1047 is supplied with an additional movement clockwise. Delta causes the segment 1184 through the length 1180, the arm 1181 and the shaft 1183 to be installed so that the surface 1187 abuts the pin 1188 on the angle lever 1173. Delta allows the angle lever to rotate clockwise by the spring 1190 to return the rod to that of Fig. 42 in solid lines showed the team. Then, in the second machine cycle, in a summing operation, the cam disc 1161 will rotate the arms 1163 and 1166 counterclockwise, so that the contacts SC42a1 are closed a certain lid.

Vid slutet av den andra maskincykeln vid en summatagningsoperation vrides en hay-arm 1047 moturs, for att pa Hirt satt AterfOra havarmen till det i fig. 42 visade Idget. Harvid vrides segmentet 1184 sa, att ytan 1185 annu en gang anligger med tappen 1188 och lamnar stangens 1169 nedre ande tappens 1167 rarelSebana vid avslutandet av en summatagningsoperation. At the end of the second machine cycle in a sum-picking operation, a hay arm 1047 is rotated counterclockwise, so that the Hirt set the return lever to the Idget shown in Fig. 42. In this case, the segment 1184 is rotated so that the surface 1185 once again abuts the pin 1188 and leaves the lower end of the rod 1169 of the pin 1167 in the end of a sum-taking operation.

Organ for styrning av avlasningsanordningens blockeringsomkopplare. Means for controlling the locking switch of the unloading device.

Organ, som styras av kassaregisteroperationen finnas for att paverka en sats kontakter, vilka blockera avlasningsanordningen vid lampliga tidpunkter. Means controlled by the cash register operation are provided to actuate a set of contacts which block the unloading device at convenient times.

Tangentlasraden 793 uppbar en arm 1196 (fig. 37), vid vilken fir vridbart lagrad ena anden pa en lank 1197. Lanken 1197 fir vridbart forenad medelst sin andra dude med ett kopplingsutlosningssegment 1198, vilket dr anbringat pa en i maskinstativet fastsatt tapp 1199. Kopplingsutlosningssegmentet 1198 paverkas av tangentlasradens 793 medursvridning och utloser maskinkopplingsmekanismen pa kant satt och initierar ddrmed en maskincykel. The tangent row 793 carried an arm 1196 (Fig. 37), at which one other is rotatably mounted on a long 1197. The link 1197 is rotatably joined by its second dude to a clutch release segment 1198, which is mounted on a pin 1199 attached to the machine frame. 1198 is affected by the clockwise rotation of the key laser row 793 and triggers the machine clutch mechanism on the edge and thereby initiates a machine cycle.

Menai). lankens 1197 andpunkter dr fastsatt en med huvud f8rsedd tapp 1200, vilken dr anordnad att samverka med en slits i ena anden pa en lank 1202, som Ar glidbart anordnad medelst tva i maskinstativet anbringade tappar 1203, vilka samverka med motsvarande slitsar i lanken 1202. Vridbart lagrad pa lankens 1202 andra ande finnes en hay-arm 1204, vilken fir vridbart lagrad pa en av platen 764 uppburen konsol 1205. En vid havarmen 1204 installbart fastsatt forlangning 1206 dr forsedd med en rulle 1207, vilken samverkar med en kontaktfjader 1208 pa en sats normalt slutna kontakter SC60b1 pa platen 764. Menai). The 1197 points of the link there are fixed with a head-provided pin 1200, which is arranged to co-operate with a slot in one end of a line 1202, which is slidably arranged by means of two pins 1203 arranged in the machine frame, which co-operate with corresponding slots in the line 1202. Rotatable mounted on the second end of the lane 1202 is a hay arm 1204, which is rotatably mounted on a bracket 1205 supported by the plate 764. An extension 1206 which can be installed at the sea arm 1204 is provided with a roller 1207, which cooperates with a contact spring 1208 on a set normally closed contacts SC60b1 on plate 764.

DA tangentlasraden 793 vrides medurs vid bOrjan av vane cykel bringas tappen 1200 pa Milken 1197 till samverkan med slitsen 1201 far att forflytta lanken 1202 At hager, s'asom framgar av fig. 37. Harvid svanges havarmen 1204 och forlangningen 1206 moturs, varigenom rullen 1207 paverkar kontaktfjaciern 1208, sa. att kontakterna SC60b1 Oppnas och forhindra att avlasningsanordningen paverkas under kassaregisteroperationen. When the key laser row 793 is rotated clockwise at the beginning of the usual cycle, the pin 1200 on the Milken 1197 is brought into cooperation with the slot 1201 to move the link 1202. paverkar kontaktfjaciern 1208, sa. that the contacts SC60b1 are opened and prevent the unloading device from being affected during the cash register operation.

Darefter aterfores tangentlasraden under maskineykeln till utgangslaget, varvid armen 1196, lanken 1197, lanken 1202, havarmen 1204 och forlangningen 1206 aterforas till de i fig. 37 visade lagena och darmed kan. kOrltaktfjfidern 1208 aterfjadra, sa att kontakterna SC60b1 Ater kunna slutas. Thereafter, the key laser row is returned under the machine key to the output layer, whereby the arm 1196, the lane 1197, the lane 1202, the sea arm 1204 and the extension 1206 are returned to the layers shown in Fig. 37 and thus can. kOrltaktfjfidern 1208 aterfjadra, so that the contacts SC60b1 Ater can be closed.

Maskinfrigoringsmekanism. Machine release mechanism.

Organ finnas for att frigora kassaregistret far operation och dessa organ paverkas antingen manuellt eller elektriskt. Means are available to release the cash register for operation and these means are affected either manually or electrically.

Sasom redan namnts frigores kassaregistret for operation genom vridning av tangentlasraden 793 (fig. 37 och 41) medurs, vilken rorelse medelst lanken 1197 overfores till kopplingsutlosningssegmentet 1198. As already mentioned, the cash register for operation is released by turning the key laser row 793 (Figs. 37 and 41) clockwise, which movement is transmitted by means of the link 1197 to the clutch release segment 1198.

Tangentlasraden 793 pressas medelst en fjader medurs pa kant satt och kvarhalles mot rorelse medurs genom samverkan mellan en flat tapp 1215 (fig. 41), som Ar anbringad pa en pa tangentlasraden 793 fast arm 1216 och andytan pa en omstallningsklinka 1217, vilken dr vridbart lagrad pa en av maskinstativet uppburen axel 1218. The key laser row 793 is pressed by means of a spring clockwise on the edge set and is retained against movement clockwise by the interaction between a flat pin 1215 (Fig. 41), which is mounted on a fixed arm 1216 fixed on the key laser row 793 and the end face of a conversion latch 1217, which is rotatably mounted. on a shaft 1218 supported by the machine frame.

En slits 1219 i klinkan 1217 omsluter en tapp 1220 pa en lank 1221, som dr glidbart anordnad medelst tva tappar 1222, som aro — — fastsatta i maskinstinvet och som samverka med motsvarande slitsar i lanken. En fjader 1223, som stracker sig mellan en av tapparna 1222 och en tapp 1224 ph. lanken 1221 for lanken at vanster. En slits 1225 i lankens 1221 hogra ande upptager en tapp 1226 pa en vinkelhavarms 1227 ena arm, vilken vinkelhavarm är vridbart lagrad pa en pa platen 764 anordnad konsol 1228. En tapp 1232 ph vinkelhavarmens 1227 andra arm glider i en slits 1229 i en lank 1230 och fOres mot namnda slits nedre ande av en fjader 1231 mellan tappen 1232 och en tapp 1233 pa lanken 1230. Lanken 1230 ãr vridbart forenad med ett paverkningsorgan 1234 pa en elektromagnet L10, som är fast pa platen 764. Den ovan beskrivna anslutningen mellan lanken 1230 och vinkelhavarmen 1227 medgiver en viss dodgang has det av magneten styrda organet 1234 innan detta utsattes for full belastning, varigenom den erforderliga magnetiska kraften kan reduceras. A slot 1219 in the latch 1217 encloses a pin 1220 on a tongue 1221, which is slidably arranged by means of two pins 1222, which are fixed in the machine frame and which cooperate with corresponding slots in the tongue. A spring 1223 extending between one of the pins 1222 and a pin 1224 ph. lanken 1221 for lanken at vanster. A slot 1225 in the right direction of the lane 1221 receives a pin 1226 on one arm of an angle holder 1227, which angle holder arm is rotatably mounted on a bracket 1228 arranged on the plate 764. and is carried against said lower end of a spring 1231 between the pin 1232 and a pin 1233 on the link 1230. The link 1230 is rotatably connected to a actuating member 1234 on an electromagnet L10 fixed to the plate 764. The above-described connection between the link 1230 and the angle holder arm 1227 allows a certain deadlift to have the magnet-controlled member 1234 before it is subjected to full load, whereby the required magnetic force can be reduced.

Magnetiseringen av magneten L40 medfOr, sasom kommer att fullstandigt beskrivas i samband riled fig. 43A-43F, att paverkningsorganet 1234 fores neda.t, sasom framgar av fig. 41. Denna rorelse overfOres genom lanken 1230, vinkelhavarmen 1227 och lanken 1221 till klinkan 1217, sa att denna vrides moturs och darvid avlagsnas klinkans andyta fran det blockerande laget med tappen 1215. Da sa sker rOr sig tappen 1215 under klinkans 1217 hogra ande, sh att tangentlasraden 793 kan ph.verkas av tillhorande fjader for att initiera en maskinoperation. The magnetization of the magnet L40, as will be fully described in connection with Figs. 43A-43F, causes the actuating member 1234 to be lowered, as shown in Fig. 41. This movement is transmitted through the link 1230, the angle lever 1227 and the link 1221 to the latch 1217. , so that this is turned counterclockwise and thereby the end face of the latch is removed from the blocking layer with the pin 1215. Then the pin 1215 moves below the ridge 1217 of the latch 12, so that the key laser row 793 can be actuated by the associated spring to initiate a machine operation.

Kretsar. Circuits.

De fOr samordning av kassaregistrets,, avlasningsanordningens och uppteckningsenhetens operationer erforderliga elektriska kretsarna visas i fig. 43A-43F. I dessa figurer ha vissa omkopplare, vilka aro identiska med andra omkopplare, sasom exempelvis de differentialstyrda omkopplarna SR44a1— SR46al, utelanmats, eftersom deras verkningssatt är detsamma, som verkningssattet for den eller de visade omkopplarna och sdledes kan klargOras genom beskrivning av de visade omkopplarna. The electrical circuits required for coordinating the operations of the cash register, unloading device and recorder are shown in Figs. 43A-43F. In these figures, certain switches which are identical to other switches, such as the differential-controlled switches SR44a1-SR46al, have been omitted, since their mode of operation is the same as the mode of operation of the switch or switches shown and can thus be clarified by describing the switches shown.

Det är lampligt att beskriva kretsarna, sásom de fungera vid forberedelse av anlaggflinger% far operation och vid utforande av typiska operationer. Det antages har att kassaregistret, avlasningsanordningen och uppteckningsanordningen befinna sig i utgangslagen samt klara att rnottaga infOringar vid en ny transaktion. It is convenient to describe the circuits as they function in the preparation of plant flakes for surgery and in the performance of typical operations. It is assumed that the cash register, the unloading device and the recording device are in the initial law and are ready to receive information in the event of a new transaction.

Forst slutes huvudstromstallaren 125 (fig. 1) pa kassaregistrets hOlje. Paverkning av huvudstromstallaren 125 medfOr att kontakterna ST40a1 och ST40a2 (fig. 43A) slutas och ansluta kassaregistrets motor 1300, avlasningsanordningens motor 333 (fig. 43B), uppteckningsanordningens motor 601 saint likriktaren 598 till natvaxelspanningen. Fran likriktaren 598 uttages Over ledarna 1304 och 1305 likspanning till kontrollkretsarna. First, the main power switch 125 (Fig. 1) closes on the case of the cash register. Actuation of the main power switch 125 causes the contacts ST40a1 and ST40a2 (Fig. 43A) to close and connect the cash register motor 1300, the unloading device motor 333 (Fig. 43B), the recording device motor 601 and the rectifier 598 to the night shift voltage. From the rectifier 598, DC leads 1304 and 1305 are drawn to the control circuits.

Da spanning tillforts genom paverkan av huvudstromstallaren 125 och salunda denna stromstallares kontakter ST40a1 och ST40a2 slutits, tandes omedelbart en lampa 674 pa uppteckningsanordningen, varigenom indikeras att uppteckningsanordningen är redo och att spanning tillforts. When voltage is supplied by the action of the main switch 125 and thus the contacts ST40a1 and ST40a2 of this switch are closed, a lamp 674 is immediately lit on the recording device, thereby indicating that the recording device is ready and that voltage has been applied.

Patryckning av spanning ph ledarna 1304 och 1305 fran likriktaren 598 medfOr att relaet K3 slar till Over de normalt slutna kontakterna L2lbc1, de normalt slutna kontakterna SC33b2, de normalt slutna relakontakterna K1b12 och de normalt slutna kontakterna SP1bc1, vilka senare hOra till tryckknappen PB1 for frammatning av ledmonster. Vid tillslaget av relaet K3 oppnas relakontakterna K3b1 (fig. 43B), sa att kretsen till avlasningsanordningens och uppteckningsanordningens motorer 333 och 601 brytes. Vid relaets K3 magnetisering slutas kontakterna K3aell (fig. 43D) och forbereda avlasningsoch uppteckningsanordningen for operation, dá sá skall ske, och oppnas kontakterna K3bell (fig. 43e), vilka ligga i relaets K1 hallkrets for att namnda rela skall avinagnetiseras vid slutet av en uppteekningsoperation. Kontakterna K3be11 ha ingen speciell funktion vid denna tidpunkt. Vid magnetiseringen av relaet I(3 oppnas dessutom kontakterna K3b2 (fig. 43C) i kretsarna till kopplingsmagneterna L9A och L9B for stansarna. Pushing of voltage ph the conductors 1304 and 1305 from the rectifier 598 causes the relay K3 to turn on. of joint monsters. When the relay K3 is switched on, the relay contacts K3b1 are opened (Fig. 43B), so that the circuit of the motors 333 and 601 of the unloading device and the recording device is broken. During the magnetization of the relay K3, the contacts K3aell (Fig. 43D) are closed and the unloading and recording device is prepared for operation, when this is to take place, and the contacts K3bell (Fig. 43e) are opened, which are located in the relay K1 detection operation. The K3be11 connectors have no special function at this time. During the magnetization of the relay I (3), the contacts K3b2 (Fig. 43C) are also opened in the circuits of the coupling magnets L9A and L9B for the punches.

For att remsan skall kunna anvandas tillsammans med forekommande elektroniska raknemaskiner, andra kortstansningsutrustningar eller andra databehandlingsapparater erfordras att vane ande pit remsan forses med en »ledare». Dessa remsdelar f5rses antingen med ett flertal perforeringar, vilka bilda ett speciellt ledmonster eller ingangskod eller endast med frarnmatningshal och paforandet harav kontrolleras ph lampligt salt genom att en knapp PB1 (fig. 43C) for ledmonster nedtryckes. In order for the strip to be able to be used together with existing electronic shavers, other card punching equipment or other data processing apparatus, it is required that the accustomed pit strip be provided with a «conductor». These strip parts are provided either with a plurality of perforations, which form a special joint sample or input code, or only with a feed hall, the feeding of which is controlled by suitable salt by pressing a button PB1 (Fig. 43C) for joint samples.

Sasom redan beskrivits finnes tva kodningspaneler 1311 och 1315 (fig. 43F), vilka aro anbringade riled baksidorna mot varandra pa ett stod 732 och bilda kodningsenheten. 609. Varje kodningspanel ãr anordnad som en matris med atta kolumner och tio rader samt med en hallare eller sockel i vane korsningspunkt far en diod. Kodningen av siffror och symboler skcr genom att dioder insattas i socklarna pa ratta stallen. En i en av dessa socklar insatt diod fullbordar en elektrisk krets mellan den till sockeln horande raden och koiumnen. Dioder anvandas i dessa kretsar ph grund av att de endast leda strom i en riktning. Utan dioder skulle backstrOmkretsar Ora det omojligt att elektriskt isolera de olika sifferraderna, symbolraderna och stansutvaljningsmagneterna frail varand- 26- - ra, savida icke individuella kretsar anvandes i uppteckningsanlaggningen f Sr varje perforering, som erfordras under en stansningscykel. I samband med matriserna finnes aven, en rad med sju anslutningar, exempelvis anslutningarna 1308, 1309 och 1310 pa de hada diodpanelernas ovre del. Dessa anslutningar kunna forbindas for speciell kodning, eld sa erfordras. As already described, there are two coding panels 1311 and 1315 (Fig. 43F), which are mounted with the backs facing each other on a stand 732 and form the coding unit. 609. Each coding panel is arranged as a matrix with eight columns and ten rows and with a holder or base at the usual intersection point for a diode. The coding of numbers and symbols is done by inserting diodes into the sockets on the steering wheel. A diode inserted in one of these sockets completes an electrical circuit between the row belonging to the socket and the koi. Diodes are used in these circuits ph because they only conduct current in one direction. Without diodes, back-current circuits would make it impossible to electrically isolate the various number rows, symbol rows and punch selection magnets from each other, unless non-individual circuits are used in the recording plant for each perforation required during a punching cycle. In connection with the matrices there is also a row with seven connections, for example the connections 1308, 1309 and 1310 on the upper part of the had diode panels. These connections can be connected for special coding, fire as required.

Debiteringstransaktion. Debit transaction.

Sedan ledmonstret stansats Sr uppteckningsanlaggningen redo att uppteckna en transaktion. Som exempel antages att den beskrivna transaktionen galler en debitering, att en enda vara forekommer, att kort anvandas for att identifiera expedit och kund och att ett kort anvandes for varubeskrivningen samt slutligen antages att selektoromkopplaren 518 (fig. 22), med sina ansatser eller nivaer av kontakter SS20a1-SS20a7 befinner sig i det forsta laget. After the joint sample has been stopped, the recording facility is ready to record a transaction. As an example, it is assumed that the described transaction involves a debit, that a single item occurs, that cards are used to identify clerk and customer and that a card is used for the item description and finally it is assumed that the selector switch 518 (Fig. 22), with its approaches or levels of contacts SS20a1-SS20a7 are located in the first layer.

Eftersom det Dar sig om en debiteringstransaktion nedtryckes »Debitering»-tangenten i rad 9 pa kassaregistret, varigenom kontakterna SC61a1 (fig. 43B) och kontakterna SC47ac1 (fig. 43C) slutas samt kontakterna SC47bc1 (fig. 43C) oppnas. Since it is a debit transaction, the "Debit" key is pressed in line 9 of the cash register, whereby contacts SC61a1 (Fig. 43B) and contacts SC47ac1 (Fig. 43C) are closed and contacts SC47bc1 (Fig. 43C) are opened.

Ett kort f8r identifiering av expediten insattes darefter i avlasningsanordningen for uppteckning genom stansning av remsan av den for transaktionen ansvarige expeditens identitet. Vid inforandet av kortet slutas kontakterna SC23a1 (fig. 43B), varigenom en krets fullbordas fran ledaren 1304 till magneten L20 Over kontakterna K3acl 1 (fig. 43D), en ledare 1316, kontakterna SP24b1 (fig. 43B, SC21b1, SS20a2 (lage 1) SC23a1, SC37b1, sakringskontakterna 1326, vilka aro anordnade att appnas for den handelse att elektromagneten L20 skulle brinna sonder, magneten L20, kontakterna SC61a1, vilka sin-fits vid nedtryckningen. av »Debitering»-tangenten i rad 9 samt de normalt slutna kontakterna SC60b1. Kontakterna SC60b1 8ppnas vid tangentlasradens 793 vridning for att fOrhindra att avlasningsanordningen arbetar under kassaregisteroperationen. Vid denna tidpunkt aro de emellertid slutna, eftersom kassaregistret late Sr fardigt f8r operation. Magn.etisering av magneten L20 for inriktningstapparna och far aterstallningen medfor att kontakterna L20b1 (fig. 43A) i startkretsen for kassaregistret oppnas och att inriktningstapparna flyttas framat och ingripa i motsvarande iriktningshal i expeditkortet. Om kortet har blivit riktigt insatt i avlasningsanordningen kommer inriktningstapparna att ga genom oppningen i kortet och bringa Irontakterna SC2Obc1 (fig. 43B), i en krets till avlasningsanordningens kopplingsmagneter L22A och L22B, att oppnas samt kontakterna SC2Oacl (fig. 43G) att slutas, varigenom magneten L21 (fig. 43C) tillfores spanning, var igenom klamblocket 181 (fig. 6) paverkas och klammer fast expeditkortet, sa. att detta Mlles stadigt i lage. Sasom redan namnts frigores armen 414 vid magnetiseringen av magneten L21 genom ett lanksystem, som utgores av havarmen. 292 (fig. 21), lanken. 308 och lanken 416 mellan magneten och armen 414, varigenom de fern avkanningstradarna eller -tapparna, som kontrollera kontakterna SC25a1, SC26a1, SC27a1, SC28a1 och SC29a1 (fig. 43B) frigoras. A card for identification of the clerk was then inserted into the unloading device for recording by punching the strip of the identity of the clerk responsible for the transaction. Upon insertion of the card, the contacts SC23a1 (Fig. 43B) are closed, whereby a circuit is completed from the conductor 1304 to the magnet L20. ) SC23a1, SC37b1, the fuse contacts 1326, which are arranged to be opened in the event that the electromagnet L20 should burn probes, the magnet L20, the contacts SC61a1, which sin-fits at the depressing of the "Charging" key in row 9 and the normally closed contacts The contacts SC60b1 are opened at the rotation of the key laser row 793 to prevent the unloading device from operating during the cash register operation. Fig. 43A) in the starting circuit for the cash register is opened and that the alignment pins are moved forward and intervene in the corresponding direction shal in the clerk card. If the card has been properly inserted in the unloading device, the alignment pins will pass through the opening in the card and cause the IR contacts SC2Obc1 (Fig. 43B), in a circuit to the unloading device coupling magnets L22A and L22B, to be opened and the contacts SC2Oac1 (Fig. 43G) to be closed, thereby closing the magnet L21 (Fig. 43C) is supplied with voltage, through which the clamp block 181 (Fig. 6) is actuated and clamps the clerk card, said. that this Mlles steadily in lage. As already mentioned, the arm 414 is released during the magnetization of the magnet L21 by a link system, which is formed by the sea arm. 292 (Fig. 21), lengths. 308 and the link 416 between the magnet and the arm 414, thereby releasing the four sensing wires or pins which control the contacts SC25a1, SC26a1, SC27a1, SC28a1 and SC29a1 (Fig. 43B).

Vid magnetiseringen av magneten L21 slutas kontakterna L2lac1 (fig. 43B) och fullborda en krets Over kontakterna L21acl, SP24b1, SC21b1, SS20a2 (lage 1), SC23a1, SC37b1, sakringskontakterna 1326, magneten L20, kontakterna SC61a1 och kontakterna SC60b1 till magneten L20 saint Oppnas kontakterna L21bc1 (fig. 43c), varigenom relaet K3 avmagnetiseras. Harvid slutas kontakterna K3b1 (fig. 43B), sa att spanning tillfores motorerna 333 och 601, saint oppnas kontakterna K3ac11 (fig. 43D) och bryta den ursprungliga magnetiseringskretsen till magneten L20, vilken numera halles magnetiserad Over kontakterna L2lac1. Dessutom slutas kontakterna K3b2 (fig. 43C) och forbereda en magnetiseringskrets till stanskopplingsmagneterna L9A och L9B. Upon magnetization of the magnet L21, the contacts L2lac1 (Fig. 43B) are closed and complete a circuit Over the contacts L21ac1, SP24b1, SC21b1, SS20a2 (layer 1), SC23a1, SC37b1, the fuse contacts 1326, the magnet L20, the contacts SC61a1 and the contacts L60220 The contacts L21bc1 (Fig. 43c) are opened, whereby the relay K3 is demagnetized. Then the contacts K3b1 (Fig. 43B) are closed, so that voltage is supplied to the motors 333 and 601, then the contacts K3ac11 (Fig. 43D) are opened and the original magnetizing circuit is broken to the magnet L20, which is now kept magnetized over the contacts L2lac1. In addition, the contacts K3b2 (Fig. 43C) are closed and a magnetizing circuit for the punching magnets L9A and L9B is prepared.

For att starta avlasningsanordningen maste darfor »Debitering»-tangenten ha paverkats, expeditkortet ha insatts riktigt i avlasningsanordningen och kortet maste vara forsett med ett hal i »expeditlaget» i identifieringssektionen. DS motsvarande avkanningstapp eller -trad gar genom detta hall slutas kontakterna SC25a1 och fullborda en krets f Or magnetisering av kopplingsmagneterna L22a och L2213 Over kontakterna SC25al, kontakterna SS20a3 (lage 1), kontakterna SC33b1 i avlasningsanordningen, vilka arc slutna i avlasningsanordningens kamrads utgangslage och forsta 'age, saint kontakterna SC35b2. Kontakterna SC3.5b2 slutas f Or att fullborda en shuntkrets Over ett motstand 1317 pa 2000 ohm, varigenom man erhaller hog magnetiseringsspAnning fOr magneterna L22A och L22B. To start the unloading device, the "Debit" key must therefore have been activated, the clerk's card must have been inserted correctly in the unloading device and the card must be provided with a slide in the "clerk's team" in the identification section. DS corresponding to the sensing pin or wire passing through this hall, the contacts SC25a1 are closed and complete a circuit for magnetizing the coupling magnets L22a and L2213. 'age, saint contacts SC35b2. The contacts SC3.5b2 are closed to complete a shunt circuit over a resistor 1317 at 2000 ohms, whereby a high excitation voltage is obtained for the magnets L22A and L22B.

Om kortet liar insatts felaktigt i avlasningsanordningen kan avkanningstappen f8r kontakterna SC25a1 icke fOrflytta sig framat, eftersom nagot hal icke ligger framfor traden i kortets identifieringsdel. Kontakterna SC25a1 komma foljaktligen icke att slutas och magneterna paverkas icke for att starta ett avlasningsforlopp. Organ, vilka komma att beskrivas nedan, aro anordnade att under kontroll av en tryckknapp 490 (fig. 1) frigora ett felaktigt insatt kort. If the card is incorrectly inserted in the unloading device, the scanning pin for the contacts SC25a1 cannot move forward, since no slippery surface lies in front of the line in the identification part of the card. Consequently, the contacts SC25a1 will not be closed and the magnets will not be actuated to start a reading process. Means, which will be described below, are arranged to release an incorrectly inserted card under the control of a push button 490 (Fig. 1).

Antages, att ett riktigt kort har inforts i avlasningsanOrdningen och att kontakterna SC25a1 slutits och fullbordat en magnetiseringskrets till magneterna L22A och L22B, kommer kopplingen att sammankoppla karn- — ---27 . – raden med avlasmngsanordningens motor. SA.- som redan namnts, ãr kopplingen for sammankoppling ay kamraden med motorn 333 ay envarvstyp och inkopplas medelst magneterna L22A och L22B, for att kamraden skall vridas av motorn. Da detta kopplingsvarv slutforts urkopplas kopplingen och frig& kamraden frail motorn, savida icke magneterna L22A och L22B magnetiserats en andra gang. Sasom ovan beskrivits sker ingen avlasningsoperation vid kamradens forsta vary efter inforandet ay ett kort, emedan detta vary blott tillkommit for att avld.sningsanordningens olika komponenter skola kunna intaga ratta lagen for att avlasa kortet. Assuming that a real card has been inserted in the unloading device and that the contacts SC25a1 have been closed and completed a magnetizing circuit to the magnets L22A and L22B, the coupling will interconnect the core. The row with the engine of the unloader. SA.- as already mentioned, the coupling for interconnection in the cam row with the motor 333 is of the single-speed type and is connected by means of the magnets L22A and L22B, so that the cam row is rotated by the motor. When this clutch revolution is completed, the clutch and release chamber are disconnected from the motor, unless the magnets L22A and L22B are magnetized a second time. As described above, no unloading operation takes place at the first vary of the chamber row after insertion into a card, since this variation has been added only so that the various components of the unloading device can take the steering wheel to unload the card.

Under kopplingens fiirsta vary fares kamraden i av15.sningsanordningen fran utgangslaget till sitt forsta lage. Emedan kontakterna SC33b1 forbliva slutna i saval utgangslaget, som det forsta laget hos kamraden, kommer kretsen till magneterna L22A och L22B att farbliva sluten, sá att kopplingen utfar ett andra vary och sammankopplar kamraden med motorn, varigenom kamraden bibringas ett andra vary. During the first variation of the coupling, the chamber row in the discharge device travels from the starting layer to its first layer. While the contacts SC33b1 remain closed in the saval output layer, as the first layer of the chamber row, the circuit of the magnets L22A and L22B will remain closed, so that the coupling performs a second vary and interconnects the chamber row with the motor, thereby providing the chamber row a second vary.

Under detta andra vary farflyttas kamraden fran lage 1 till lage 2 och en symbol stansas pa remsan for att identifiera korttypen. Stansning ay denna symbol kan utforas genom det ena eller bada ay tva olika organ, beroende pa anyandningssattet av uppteckningsanlaggningen. Vanligtvis anyandes endast ett av dessa organ for stansning av en kortidentifieringssymbol pa uppteckningsremsan och det andra organet kan anvandas fr andra andamal. Detta andra organ kan exempelvis anvandas for stansning av speciella tillaggssymboler vid onskade tidpunkter under aylasningen av kortet. Dessa tillaggssymboler kunna exempelvis bilda mellanliggande aterstallningssignaler vid system for att Over-fora remsvardena till kort. Ett ay dessa hada organ kan ayen, om sa onskas, utnyttjas for stansning ay en »slut pa blocket»-symbol pa remsan, medan det andra utnyttjas for stansning ay en kortidentifieringssymbol eller for nagot annat andamal, om kortidentifieringssymbolen icke är nadvandig. During this second variation, the chamber row is moved from layer 1 to layer 2 and a symbol is punched on the strip to identify the type of card. Punching of this symbol can be performed by one or both of two different means, depending on the type of breathing of the recording equipment. Usually only one of these means for punching a card identification symbol on the record strip and the other means can be used for other purposes. This second means can, for example, be used for punching special additional symbols at desired times during the loading of the card. These additional symbols can, for example, form intermediate recovery signals in systems for transferring the strip values to cards. One of these means may, if desired, be used for punching an "end of the block" symbol on the strip, while the other may be used for punching a card identification symbol or for any other purpose, if the card identification symbol is not present.

Det ena av de hada organen for stansning av en kortidentifieringssymbol i remsan innefattar kontakterna SC34a1 (fig. 43F), vilka slutas ungefar 15 grader fore slutet av kopplingens far avlasnin.gsanordningen forsta vary. Genom dessa kontakter i samvprkn T1 med kontakterna SC35a1 (fig. 43F), vilka aro slutna mellan 5 och 130 grader av kopplingens vary, tillfores spanning till kontaktarmen for kontakterna SS20a6 (fig. 43F). lad denna tidpunkt under transaktionen befinner sig kontaktarmen i lage 1 och kretsen gar darfor Over motsvarande ledare i en kabel 1318 till ett uttag 1319 i en sektion 1320 i utvaljningspanelen 748 (fig. 43D). En los forbindningsledare, proppfarbindning, kan sedan anslu- tas mellan detta uttag och ett onskat uttag i siffer- eller symbolsektionerna 889 eller 1321 i panelen 748, sa att en krets slutes till en. eller flera av stansutvaljningsmagneterna PS1—PS8 for stansning av lamplig identifieringssymbol for expeditkortet. Sasom ett exempel visas en proppforbindning 1322 (fig. 43D), som forenar uttaget 1319 med ett uttag 1323 i en symbolsektion 1321 i panelen 748. En motsvarande ledare i kabeln 1325 farbinder uttaget 1323 med rad 2 i symboIkodningspanelen 1311 (fig. 43F). En diod visas, som forbincler denna rad med en ledare, vilken i sin tur är ansluten till stansutvaljningsmagneten PS8. Magnetisering av stansutvaljningsmagneten PS8 i den angivna kretsen, orsakar att motsvarande stansutyaljningshavarm sluter kontakterna SC3a1 (fig. 13C), vilken sluter en krets fran ledaren 1304 till stanskopplingsrnagneterna L9A och L9B Over kontakterna SS1bc21, K1bc1, SC2b1 och SC3al, varigenom namnda magneter L9A och L9B magnetiseras. Stanskopplingen sammankopplar darmed uppteckningsanordningens motor 601 med stanskamraden, sà att en stansningscykel, for stansning av ett hl i kanal 8 pa uppteekningsremsan for identifiering ay expeditkortet, startas. One of the means for punching a card identification symbol in the strip comprises the contacts SC34a1 (Fig. 43F), which are closed approximately 15 degrees before the end of the first unloading device of the coupling. Through these contacts in contact T1 with the contacts SC35a1 (Fig. 43F), which are closed between 5 and 130 degrees of the connection of the coupling, voltage is supplied to the contact arm of the contacts SS20a6 (Fig. 43F). At this time during the transaction, the contact arm is in position 1 and the circuit therefore passes over the corresponding conductor in a cable 1318 to a terminal 1319 in a section 1320 in the selection panel 748 (Fig. 43D). A loose connection conductor, plug connection, can then be connected between this socket and a desired socket in the number or symbol sections 889 or 1321 of the panel 748, so that a circuit is closed to one. or more of the punch selection magnets PS1 — PS8 for punching the lighted identification symbol for the clerk card. As an example, a plug connection 1322 (Fig. 43D) is shown, which connects the terminal 1319 to a terminal 1323 in a symbol section 1321 in the panel 748. A corresponding conductor in the cable 1325 connects the terminal 1323 to row 2 in the symbol coding panel 1311 (Fig. 43F). A diode is displayed, which connects this line with a conductor, which in turn is connected to the punch selection magnet PS8. Magnetization of the punch selection magnet PS8 in the indicated circuit causes the corresponding punch leveling arm to close the contacts SC3a1 (Fig. 13C), which closes a circuit from the conductor 1304 to the punch coupling magnets L9A and L9B. magnetized. The punching connection thus connects the motor 601 of the recording device to the punching chambers, so that a punching cycle, for punching a hl in channel 8 on the recording strip for identification on the clerk's card, is started.

Det andra ay de hada tillgangliga organ for att orsaka stansning ay en kortidentifieringssymbol i uppteckningsremsan omfattar identifieringskontakterna SC25a2, SC26a2, SC27a2, SC28a2 och SC29a2 (fig. 43F). Dessa kontakter stà under samverkande kontroll ay de fern Ginn angiyna avkanningstapparna, vilka styra kontakterna SC25a1—SC29a1 (fig 43B) och ay den installbara kamskivan 357 (fig.. 15) pa avlasningsanordningens kamrad. Far att flagon ay kontakterna SC25a2— SC29a2 skall slutas, maste darfor motsvarande avkanningstapp kunna rora sig fram- genom ett hal i det kort, som skall avlasas, mitt emot namnda avkanningstapp, och den framyridna delen pa kamskivan 357 ma.ste paverka kontakternas SC25a2—SC29a2 pa.- verkningsorgan. Det framgar att kamskivan 357 kan installas pa kamraden 359, sa att den ovan namnda delen paverkar payerkningsorganen for kontakterna yid varje Onskad tidpunkt under avlasningsoperationen. I and.amal att askadliggora verkningssattet antages har att kamskivan 357 är sa installd pa avlasningsanordningens kamrad, att den lampliga kontakten ay kontakterna SC25a2— SC29a2 slutes for att initiera stansning av en identifieringssymbol under kopplingens andra vary. The second means for having means available for punching a card identification symbol in the record strip comprises the identification contacts SC25a2, SC26a2, SC27a2, SC28a2 and SC29a2 (Fig. 43F). These contacts are under the cooperative control of the remote sensing pins, which guide the contacts SC25a1 — SC29a1 (Fig. 43B) and of the installable cam 357 (Fig. 15) on the chamber of the unloader. If the flake on the contacts SC25a2— SC29a2 is to be closed, the corresponding sensing pin must therefore be able to move through a hall in the card to be unloaded, opposite the said sensing pin, and the forward part of the cam disc 357 must affect the contacts SC25a2— SC29a2 pa.- effecting means. It can be seen that the cam plate 357 can be installed on the cam row 359, so that the above-mentioned part affects the payer means for the contacts at any desired time during the unloading operation. In order to assume that the actuating mode of action is assumed, the cam plate 357 is so set on the chamber of the unloading device that the lamp contact in the contacts SC25a2 - SC29a2 is closed to initiate punching of an identification symbol during the second change of the coupling.

Vid den beskrivna operationen, vid vilken ett expeditkort inforts i avlasningsanordningen„ slutas darfor kontakterna SC25a2. Dessa kontakter orsaka, 1 samyerkan med kontakterna SC35a1 (fig. 43F), vilka, sasom redan nlmnts, dro slutna mellan 5 och 130 grader av kopplingsvaryet, att spanning, Over en 28— — motsvarande ledare h en kabel 1327, tillfores ett uttag 1328 i en sektion 1329 pa utvaljningspanelen 748 (fig. 43D). En proppforbindning kan forena detta uttag med varje Onskat uttag i siffer- eller symbolsektionen pa panelen 748, for att sluta en krets till en eller flera av stansutvaljningsmagneterna PS1—PS8, i och for stansning av en lamplig identifieringssymbol for expeditkortet. For att askadliggora organen, vilka medfora stansning av en expeditkortidentifieringssymbol anvandes i stallet fOr forbindelseledaren 1322 en forbindelseledare 1330, vilken visas fOrbinda uttaget 1328 i sektionen 1329 med uttaget 1323 i panelens 748 symbolsektion 1324. Sasom redan angivits är uttaget 1323 fOrenat Over en motsvarande ledare i kabeln 1325 med rad 2 i kodningspanelen 1311 (fig. 43F) och en diod kan anvandas far att forbinda denna rad med en ledare, som i sin tur ãr ansluten till stansutvaljningsmagneten PS8. Magnetisering av magneten PS8 i den beskrivna kretsen, medfor att ett hal stansas i kanal 8 pa uppteckningsremsan for identifiering av expeditkortet, sa.som tidigare angivits. During the described operation, in which a clerk's card is inserted into the unloading device, the contacts SC25a2 are therefore closed. These contacts cause, in conjunction with the contacts SC35a1 (Fig. 43F), which, as already mentioned, draw closed between 5 and 130 degrees of the connection value, that voltage, Over a 28 - - corresponding conductor h a cable 1327, is supplied to a socket 1328 in a section 1329 on the selection panel 748 (Fig. 43D). A plug connection can connect this socket to any desired socket in the number or symbol section of panel 748, to connect a circuit to one or more of the punch selection magnets PS1-PS8, and to punch a suitable identification symbol for the clerk card. In order to damage the means which cause punching of a clerk card identification symbol, a connection conductor 1330 is used in the place of the connection conductor 1322, which is shown connecting the socket 1328 in the section 1329 to the socket 1323 in the symbol section 1324 of the panel 748. the cable 1325 with line 2 in the coding panel 1311 (Fig. 43F) and a diode can be used to connect this line to a conductor, which in turn is connected to the punch selection magnet PS8. Magnetization of the magnet PS8 in the described circuit, means that a slide is punched in channel 8 on the recording strip for identification of the clerk card, as previously stated.

Sedan det andra varvet palorjats, oppnas kontakterna SC33b1 (fig. 43B), vilka aro slutna i kamradens i avlasningsanordningen utgangslage och forsta lage, samt slutas kontakterna SC33a3 (fig. 43B), vilka aro oppna I utgangslaget och det forsta laget hos kamraden. Kontakterna SC4acl (fig. 43B), vilka aro anordnade pa uppteckningsanordningens kamrad, aro slutna mellan 215 och 310 grader av stansningscykeln och dro salunda slutna vid avslutandet av den akthella stansningsoperationen. Over kontakterna SC4acl och de numera slutna kontakterna SC33a3 (fig. 43B) fullberrdas en krets till kopplingsmagneterna L22A och L22B i avlasningsanordningen, sa att kopplingen utfor ett tredje kopplingsvarv. Detta tredje vary och de foljande varven medfor att avlasningsanordningens kamrad vrides, sà att successiva kamskivor pa kamraden frigora sina tillhorande satser avkanningstappar for avlasning av successiva kolumner pa kortet. Haien i varje kolumn pa kortet tillata motsvarande avkanningstappar att rora sig framat och sluta motsvarande kontakt av kontakterna SC36a1—SC36a5 (fig. 43F). Eftersom kontakterna SC35a1 (fig. 43F) slutas vid fern graders vridning av kopplingen i avldsningsanordningen fullbordas frau ledaren 1304 Over kontakterna SC35a1,1edaren 1305, den av kontakterna SC36a1—SC36a5, som ãr sluten samt motsvarande ledare i en kabel 1335 en krets till uttag i kodningspanelens 1315 sektion 1336. Losa forbindningsledare, proppforbindningar, anvandas fOr att forbinda dessa uttag med till ledarna i kabeln anslutna uttag, vilka ledare i kabeln i sin tur aro anslutna till stansutvaljningsmagneterna PS1—PS8. Forbindningsledaren 1337 i fig. 13F, som forenar uttagen 1338 och 1339 visas sasom ett exernpel pa dylika losa forbindningsledare eller proppforbindningar. sasom redan angivits medfor magnetiseringen av den ulvalda stansutvaljningsmagneten i den beskrivna kretsen, att motsvarande stansutvaljningsarm sluter kontakterna SC3a1 (fig. 43C) °eh fullbordar en krets fran ledaren 1304 till stanskopplingsmagneterna L9A och L9B Over kontakterna SS1bc21, Klbel, SC2b1 och SC3a1. Harvid startas en stansningscykel och da stansmekanismen gatt 215 grader slutas kontakterna SC4acl (fig. 43B) och fullborda en krets for magnetisering av kopplingsmagneterna L22A och L22B i avlasningsanordningen, sa att kopplingen i avlasningsanordningen utfor en ytterligare operationscykel. After the second turn has been palorized, the contacts SC33b1 (Fig. 43B) are opened, which are closed in the output layer and first layer of the chamber row in the unloading device, and the contacts SC33a3 (Fig. 43B) are closed, which are opened in the output layer and the first layer of the chamber row. The contacts SC4ac1 (Fig. 43B), which are arranged on the chamber of the recording device, are closed between 215 and 310 degrees of the punching cycle and are thus closed at the end of the acute punching operation. Above the contacts SC4ac1 and the now closed contacts SC33a3 (Fig. 43B) a circuit of the coupling magnets L22A and L22B in the unloading device is completed, so that the coupling performs a third coupling revolution. This third variation and the following turns cause the chamber of the unloading device to be rotated, so that successive cam discs on the chamber row release their associated sets of scanning pins for unloading successive columns on the card. The sharks in each column of the card allow the corresponding sensing pins to move forward and close the corresponding contact of the contacts SC36a1 — SC36a5 (Fig. 43F). Since the contacts SC35a1 (Fig. 43F) are closed by four degrees of rotation of the coupling in the holding device, the conductor 1304 is completed from the contacts SC35a1,1 conductor 1305, the one of the contacts SC36a1 — SC36a5, which is closed, and the corresponding conductor in a cable 1335. section 1315 of the coding panel 1315. Loose connecting conductors, plug connections, are used to connect these sockets to sockets connected to the conductors in the cable, which conductors in the cable are in turn connected to the punch selection magnets PS1 — PS8. The connecting conductor 1337 of Fig. 13F, which joins the terminals 1338 and 1339, is shown as an example of such loose connecting conductors or plug connections. As already stated, the magnetization of the selected punch selection magnet in the described circuit means that the corresponding punch selection arm closes the contacts SC3a1 (Fig. 43C) and completes a circuit from the conductor 1304 to the punch coupling magnets L9A and L9B over the contacts SS1b21 and Kl1b1 SC1b21, Kl1b1B1, Kl1b1 and Kl1. Then a punching cycle is started and when the punching mechanism has reached 215 degrees, the contacts SC4ac1 are closed (Fig. 43B) and complete a circuit for magnetizing the coupling magnets L22A and L22B in the unloading device, so that the clutch in the unloading device performs a further operation cycle.

Kamradens kamskivor i avlasningsanordningen aro sá utformade, att den del av varje kamskiva, som medfor frigoring av avkanningstapparna fOr den siffra, som skall avlasas, vrides till detta tappfrigoringslage strax fore slutet av ett fOregaende vary av avlasningsanordningens koppling, sa att kontakterna SC35a1 komma att slutas och fullborda kretsen vid bOrjan av det kopplingsvary, under vilket siffran avlases. Eftersom varje kopplingsvarv paborjas genom att kretsen till kopplingsmagneterna L22A och L22B fullbordas Over kontakterna SC4acl (fig. 43B) pa uppteckningsanordningens kamrad, maste varje foljande avlasningsoperation invanta Hitt uppteckning av den foregaende :avlasningsoperationen. Detta avlasningsforfarande fortskrider, till dess samtliga informationer pa kortet ha avlasts av avlasningsanordningen och upptecknas av uppteckningsanordningen. The cam discs in the unloading device are designed so that the part of each cam disc which causes the scanning pins for the figure to be unloaded is rotated to this pin release position just before the end of a previous change of the unloading device coupling, so that the contacts SC35a1 are closed. and complete the circuit at the beginning of the switching condition during which the number is read. Since each coupling revolution is drilled by completing the circuit of the coupling magnets L22A and L22B across the contacts SC4ac1 (Fig. 43B) on the chamber of the recording device, each subsequent unloading operation must be familiar with this recording of the previous unloading operation. This unloading process proceeds until all the information on the card has been unloaded by the unloading device and is recorded by the recording device.

Sedan avlasningen av ett kort avslutats utfares en aterstallningsoperation for att vrida kamraden i avlasningsanordningen tillbaka till utgangslaget, sasom en forberedelse for en foljande operation. Aterstallningsoperationen initieras genom att »slut pa kortet»- kontakter for det avlasta kortet oppnas. I f6- religgandc fall Or det ett expeditkort, som avlasts, varfOr kontakterna SC21b1 (fig 43B) for denna korttyp oppnas. »Slut pa kortet»- kontakterna aro anbringade pa avlasningsanordningens kararad och anordnade att Oppnas vid en viss tidpunkt under avlasningsoperationen, vilken tidpunkt beror pa det avlasta kortets lãngd. Da kontakterna SC21b1 Oppnas brytes kretsen till magneten L20, varigenom magneten avmagnetiseras. Detta orsakar att inriktningstapparna dragas tillbaka ur inriktningshalen i expeditkortet, sa att kortet kan skjutas ut ur avlasningsanordningen. Da inriktningstapparna dragas tillbaka Oppnas aven kontakterna SC2.0ac1 (fig. 43C) samt slutas kontakterna SC2Obc1 (fig. 43B). Da. kontakterna SC2Oac1 oppnas brytes kretsen till magneten L21, varigenom denna avmag-. netiseras. Avmagnetisering av magneten L21. i90823 —29 1 medfiir att kontakterna L2lac1 (fig. 43B) i en magnetiseringskrets for magneten L20 Oppnas saint att kontakterna L21bc1 (fig. 43C) slutas. After the unloading of a card is completed, a recovery operation is performed to turn the chamber row in the unloading device back to the output layer, as a preparation for a subsequent operation. The recovery operation is initiated by opening the "end of card" contacts for the unloaded card. In f6- religgandc case Or it is a clerk card, which is unloaded, for which the contacts SC21b1 (fig 43B) for this card type are opened. "End of card" - the contacts are placed on the square of the unloading device and arranged to be opened at a certain time during the unloading operation, which time depends on the length of the unloaded card. When the contacts SC21b1 are opened, the circuit of the magnet L20 is broken, whereby the magnet is demagnetized. This causes the alignment pins to be retracted from the alignment tail of the dispatch card, so that the card can be slid out of the unloader. When the alignment pins are retracted, the contacts SC2.0ac1 (Fig. 43C) are also opened and the contacts SC2Obc1 (Fig. 43B) are closed. Yes. when the contacts SC2Oac1 are opened, the circuit to the magnet L21 is broken, whereby this de-energizes. netiseras. Demagnetization of the magnet L21. i90823 —29 1 means that the contacts L2lac1 (Fig. 43B) in a magnetizing circuit for the magnet L20 are opened until the contacts L21bc1 (Fig. 43C) are closed.

Da kontakterna SC4acl (fig. 43B) slutas vid sIutet av den operation, vid vilken stans- ning av den sista siffran eller syrnbolen slier, fullbordas en magnetiseringskrets till magneterna L22A och L2213 Over de normalt slutna kontakterna K6b11, kontakterna SC4acl, kon- takterna SC33a3, vilka aro slutna utorn i kamradens i avlasningsanordningen utgangslage och fOrsta lage samt Over kontakterna SC35b2. Da dessa magneter magnetiserats slutas kontakterna L22a1 (fig. 43B). Kontakterna fullborda tillsammans med de numera slutna kontakterna SC2Obc1 och kontakterna SC33a3 en hallningskrets till magneterna L22A och L22B for att avarhalla dessa magneter i magnetiserat tillstand, sedan kontakterna SC4acl oppnats, dà uppteckningsanordningens stansmelianism fuIlbordat sin operationscykel, Kopplingen i avlasningsanordningen Mlles darfor i verksamt lage, sá att motorn och kamraden i avlasningsanordningen forbliva sammankopplade, till dess kamraden har framyridits till sitt trettiosjatte lage. Under kopplingens trettiosjatte vary oppnas kontakterna SC33a3, vilka, sasom nanints, Oro Oppna i kamradens utgangslage och forsta lage, varigenom magneterna L22A och L2213 avmagnetiseras och avlasningsanordningens koppling frigOr kamraden fran motorn Yid slutet av det trettiosjatte varvet, varigcnom kamraden i avlasningsanordningen forts till utgangslaget. Vid avmagnetiseringen av magneterna L22A och L22B oppnas liven kontakterna L22a1. - FOr att en viss operationsfoljd under uppteckningsfOrloppet shall erhallas, maste omliopplaren 518 (fig. 22) for foljdvalet installas i ett foljande lage efter aylasningen av expeditkortet. Under uppteckningen av data frail expeditkortet, fulibordade kontakterna SC33a4 (fig. 43C), vilka voro oppna endast i kamradens i avlasningsanordningens utgangslage och forsta lage, da de slotos, en krets f8r magnetisering av valjarmagneten SS20 over kontakterna SC20aC1 (fig. 43C), vilka slotos, da inriktningstapparna skoto in i inriktningshalen i expeditkortet, kontakterna SC33a4, de normalt slutna kontakterna SC46bc1 samt kontakterna SS20a5 (lage 1). DO magneten L20 avmagnetiserades yid fullbordande av expeditkortaylasningen och darYid orsakade att kontakterna SC20ael Opp-nudes, brats kretsen till magneten SS20 fOr foljdomkopplaren. Foljdomkopplaren eller -valjaren 518 (fig. 22), medsatserna ay kontakter SS20a1—SS20a7, som visas i foreliggande utforingsexempel, Or ay den typ, som framstegas till ett foljande lage, da dess magnet avmagnetiseras. Avmagnetiseringen av magneten SS20 medfor darfor att selektorom kopplarcn framstegas tilt ett foljande lage, villiet i detta fall Or lage 2. When the contacts SC4ac1 (Fig. 43B) are closed at the end of the operation in which punching of the last digit or the arrow ball slides, a magnetizing circuit to the magnets L22A and L2213 is completed. , which are closed towers in the output layer and first layer of the chamber of the chamber in the unloading device as well as the over contacts SC35b2. When these magnets have been magnetized, the contacts L22a1 are closed (Fig. 43B). The contacts together with the now closed contacts SC2Obc1 and the contacts SC33a3 complete a tilting circuit to the magnets L22A and L22B to keep these magnets in a magnetized state, after the contacts SC4ac1 are opened, when the punch melianism of the recording device completes its operation cycle, that the motor and the cam row in the unloading device remain connected until the cam row has been moved to its thirty-sixth position. During the thirty-sixth shift of the clutch, the contacts SC33a3 are opened, which, as nanints, Oro Open in the output layer and first layer of the cam row, whereby the magnets L22A and L2213 are demagnetized and the unloading device coupler releases the cam from the motor Yid at the end of the thirty-sixth rotation. During the demagnetization of the magnets L22A and L22B, the live contacts L22a1 are opened. In order to obtain a certain operating sequence during the recording process, the envelope selector 518 (Fig. 22) must be installed in a following layer after the unloading of the clerk card. During the recording of the data from the clerk's card, the contacts SC33a4 (Fig. 43C), which were open only in the chamber row in the output layer and first layer of the unloader, when they were closed, formed a circuit for magnetizing the selector magnet SS20 over the contacts SC20aC1 (Fig. 43C), which slotos, as the alignment pins slide into the alignment hole in the clerk card, the contacts SC33a4, the normally closed contacts SC46bc1 and the contacts SS20a5 (layer 1). The DO magnet L20 was demagnetized by completion of the clerk card reading and caused the contacts SC20ael to be up-nudged, breaking the circuit to the magnet SS20 for the follower switch. The follower switch or selector 518 (Fig. 22), the attachments ay contacts SS20a1 — SS20a7 shown in the present embodiment, Or ay the type which is advanced to a following layer when its magnet is demagnetized. The demagnetization of the magnet SS20 causes the selector switch to advance to a following position, in this case Or position 2.

Vid den foljande beskrivningert av nasta steg i operationsfoljden Or ett kundkort i avlasningsanordningen for att en uppteckning av kundrumiret i transaktionen shall ske pa remsan. DO ett kundkort infores slutas liontakterna SC23a1 (fig. 43B), varvid en krets fullbordas fran ledaren 1304 till magneten L20 (fig. 43B) Over kontakterna K3ac11 (fig. 43D), ledaren 1316, kontakterna SP241)1 (fig. 43B), »slut pa kundliortet»-kontakterna SC22b1, vilka forbliva slutna till dess avlOsningen ay kundkortet fullbordats, kontakterna SS20a2 (lage 2), kontakterna SC23a1, »ingen upprepning»-kontakterna SC37b1, sakringskontakterna 1326, magneten L20, kontakterna SC61a1, vilka slutits genom rtedtryckning av »Debitering»-tangenten i rad 9 pa kassaregistret sand de normalt slutna liontakterna SC60b1. In the following description of the next step in the sequence of operations Or a customer card in the unloading device so that a recording of the customer room in the transaction should take place on the strip. When a customer card is inserted, the lion beats SC23a1 (Fig. 43B) are closed, whereby a circuit is completed from the conductor 1304 to the magnet L20 (Fig. 43B). "End of customer" contacts SC22b1, which remain closed until customer card replacement is completed, contacts SS20a2 (layer 2), contacts SC23a1, "no repeat" contacts SC37b1, fuse contacts 1326, magnet L20, contacts closed by SC61a1, of the "Debit" key in row 9 on the cash register sand the normally closed lion rates SC60b1.

Sasom beskrivits i samband med avlasningen av expeditkortet medfor magnetise-ring av magneten L20, att inriktningstapparna roras framat och intranga i motsvarande inriktningshal i kundkortet. Magneten L21 magnetisera.s darefter fed. att fastklamma kundkortet och halIa det sakert i riktigt lage och for att frigiva de fern identifieringstapparna, vilka styra kontakterna SC25a1—SC29a1 (fig. 43 B). Sasom Oven tidigare beskrivits tillfOres arlasningsanordningens och uppteckningsanordningens motorer 333 respektiye 601 vid denna tidpunkt spanning Over kontakterna K3b1, vilka slutas dO kontakterna L2lbc1 bryta kretsen till relaet K3. As described in connection with the unloading of the clerk card, magnetization of the magnet L20 entails that the alignment pins are moved forward and penetrate into the corresponding alignment hall in the customer card. The magnet L21 magnetisera.s then bold. to clamp the customer card and hold it securely in the correct position and to release the four identification pins which control the contacts SC25a1 — SC29a1 (Fig. 43 B). As previously described, the motors 333 and the recording device motors 333 and 601, respectively, are supplied at this time with voltage across contacts K3b1, which are stopped when contacts L21bc1 break the circuit to relay K3.

Om ratt kort, dvs. ett kundkort, inforts i avlasningsanordningen fullbordas en krets Over kontakterna SC26a1 (fig. 43B), vilka slutas, genom att tillhorande avkanningstapp intranger i ett hal i det kundkort, som shall aylasas. Kretsen stracker sig fran ledaren 1304 Over kontakterna SC26al, SS20a3 (lage 2), SC33b1, vilka, sasom redan natunts, Oro slutna i utgangslaget och lage 1 bus avlas- ningsanordningens kamrad samt magneterna L22A och L22B for avlasningsanordningens koppling, varvid dessa magneter magnetiseras saint ornstalla kopplingen, sa att avIasningsanordningens motor sammankopplas med kamraden. Stansning av en identifieringssymbol och avlasning av kundkortet slier darefter pa. samma salt, som redan beskrivits i samband med avlasningen ay expeditkortet samt fortgar till dess aviasningen ay handkortet Or fullstandigt. If the steering wheel is short, ie. a customer card, is inserted into the unloading device, a circuit is completed across the contacts SC26a1 (Fig. 43B), which are closed by the associated scanning pin penetrating a hall in the customer card to be aylased. The circuit extends from the conductor 1304 across the contacts SC26a1, SS20a3 (layer 2), SC33b1, which, as already at night, are closed in the output layer and layer 1 bus of the unloading device chamber and the magnets L22A and L22B for the unloading device coupling, whereby these magnets are magnetized saint disassemble the coupling, so that the motor of the unloader is connected to the cam row. Punching an identification symbol and unloading the customer card then slips on. the same salt, which has already been described in connection with the unloading ay the clerk card and continues until the aviasing ay hand card Or completely.

Efter avlasningen av samtliga informationer ph kundkortet och stansning ay dessa pa remsan sker en aterstallningsoperation, initieras genom att »slut pa kundkortet»- kontakterna SC22b1 (fig. 43B) oppnas. HarYid brytes kretsen till magneten L20 och denna magnet avmagnetiseras. Aterstallningsoperationen sker darefter pa det salt, som - - beskrivits i saraband med avlasningen av expedi tkortet. After unloading all the information on the customer card and punching these on the strip, a recovery operation takes place, initiated by opening the "end of the customer card" contacts SC22b1 (Fig. 43B). HarYid breaks the circuit of the magnet L20 and this magnet is demagnetized. The recovery operation then takes place on the salt, which is described in connection with the unloading of the expedition card.

For att ratt operationsfoljd efter avldsningen av kundkortet skall erhallas, maste selektoromkopplaren 518 (fig. 22) stegas till efterfoljande lage, vilket har är lage 3. Under avlasningen av kundkortet, da kontakterna SC33a4 (fig. 43C), vilka voro oppna endast i utgangslage och lage 1 hos avlasningsanordningens kamrad, fullbordades en krets Over kontakterna SC2Oacl (fig. 43C), vilka slatos, dá inriktningstapparna forflyttades in I inriktningshalen i kundkortet, kontakterna SC33a4, kontakterna SC47ac1, vilka slutas vid nedtryckning av »Debitering»-tangenten pa kasaregistrets tangentbord (det erinras om att eftersom den beskrivna transaktionen är en debiteringstransaktion, sá nedtryckes fran borjan »Debitering»-tangenten) saint kontakterna SS20a5 (1fige 2) for att magnetisera orakopplarmagneten SS20. DA magneten L20 vid fullbordandet av avlasningen av kundkortet avmagnetiserades, varvid kontakterna SC2Oacl (fig. 43C) oppnades, brats kretsen till omkopplarmagneten SS20. Detta medlar-de att omkopplaren 518 (fig. 22) framstegades till efterfoljande lage, i delta fall lage 3, pa det satt, som redan beskrivits. In order to obtain a correct operating sequence after the debugging of the customer card, the selector switch 518 (Fig. 22) must be stepped to the subsequent layer, which has layer 3. During the unloading of the customer card, the contacts SC33a4 (Fig. 43C), which were open only in the output layer and layer 1 of the chamber of the unloader, a circuit was completed. (it is recalled that since the described transaction is a debit transaction, the key "Debit" is pressed from the beginning) saint contacts SS20a5 (1fige 2) to magnetize the uncoupler magnet SS20. When the magnet L20 was demagnetized upon completion of the reading of the customer card, whereby the contacts SC2Oac1 (Fig. 43C) were opened, the circuit of the switch magnet SS20 was broken. This meant that switch 518 (Fig. 22) was advanced to subsequent layer, in some cases layer 3, in the manner already described.

Under nasta steg i operationsfoljden är ett varukort infort i avlasningsanordningen, for att en beskrivning av den forsalda varan skall stansas pa remsan efter expedit- och kunddatavardena. Vid insattning av ett varukort slutas kontakterna SC23a1 (fig. 43B), varvid en krets fullbordas fran ledaren. 1304 till magneten L20 (fig. 43B) Over kontakterna K3acll (fig. 43D), ledaren 1316 kontakterna SP24b1 (fig. 43B), de normalt slutna kontakterna K2Obd1, kontakterna SS20a2 (lage 3), kontakterna SC23a1, kontakterna SC37b1, sakringskontakterna 1326, magneten L20, kontakterna SC61a1, vilka slutits vid nedtryckningen av »Debitering»-tangenten i rad 9 pa kassaregistrets tangentbord saint de normalt slutna kontakterna SC60b1. During the next step in the sequence of operations, a product card is inserted into the unloading device, so that a description of the pre-sold product is punched on the strip according to the clerk and customer data values. When inserting a product card, the contacts SC23a1 (Fig. 43B) are closed, whereby a circuit is completed from the conductor. 1304 to the magnet L20 (Fig. 43B) Over the contacts K3ac11 (Fig. 43D), the conductor 1316 the contacts SP24b1 (Fig. 43B), the normally closed contacts K2Obd1, the contacts SS20a2 (layer 3), the contacts SC23a1, the contacts SC37b1, the fuse contacts 1326, the magnet L20, the contacts SC61a1, which are closed when the »Debit» key is pressed in row 9 on the cash register's keyboard saint the normally closed contacts SC60b1.

Sasom redan beskrivits I samband med avlasningen av expedit- och kundkorten, medfOr magnetisering av magneten L20, att inriktningstapparna rams framat och intranga i motsvarande hal i varukortet och att kontakterna SC2Oacl slutas. Magneten L21 magnetiseras Over kontakterna SC2Oacl for att klamma fast varukortet och for att frigora de fern identifieringstapparna, vilka styra kontakterna SC25acl-SC29a1 (fig. 43B). Relaet 1(3 avmagnetiseras aven, sasom tidigare beskrivits, varvid kontakterna K3b1 Ater slutas och tillfora spanning till avlasningsanordningens och uppteckningsanordningens motorer 333 och 601. As already described in connection with the unloading of the clerk's and customer cards, magnetization of the magnet L20 means that the alignment pins are framed forward and penetrate in the corresponding hall in the product card and that the contacts SC2Oac1 are closed. The magnet L21 is magnetized over the contacts SC2Oac1 to clamp the product card and to release the four identification pins which control the contacts SC25ac1-SC29a1 (Fig. 43B). The relay 1 (3 is also demagnetized, as previously described, closing the contacts K3b1 again and applying voltage to the motors 333 and 601 of the unloading device and the recording device.

Varukortet kan ha en av tre bestamda langder, vilka har kallas nr 1, nr 2 eller nr 3. Var och en av de tre korttyperna identifieras genom ett hal i ett visst lage pa kortets identi fieringsdel. Da darfor de fern identifieringstapparna frigoras for att utfora en avkan- kommer den tapp, som ligger mitt emot hala i ett infort varukort, att passera genom halet, som Or karakteristiskt for korttypen och medfara att motsvarande kontakter slutas. Kontakterna SC27a1 styras av den avkanningstapp, som avkanner ett identifieringshal i varukortet med den langd, som kallas nr 1. Kontakterna SC28a1 styras av den avkdnningstapp, sorn avkanner ett identifieringshal i varukortet med langden nr -2. Kontakterna SC29a1 styras av den avkanningstapp, sorn avkanner ett identifieringshail varukortet nand langden nr 3. The product card can have one of three specified lengths, which have been called No. 1, No. 2 or No. 3. Each of the three card types is identified by a hall in a certain layer on the identification part of the card. Therefore, when the four identification pins are released to perform a detachment, the pin opposite the slide in an imported goods card will pass through the tail, which is characteristic of the card type and cause corresponding contacts to be made. Contacts SC27a1 are controlled by the scanning pin, which scans an identification hall in the product card with the length, called No. 1. Contacts SC28a1 are controlled by the sensing pin, which scans an identification hall in the product card with length no. -2. The contacts SC29a1 are controlled by the scanning pin, which scans an identification hail product card nand length no. 3.

Om exempelvis ett varukort med langden nr 1 infores i avlasningsanordningen slutas kontakterna SC27a1, da avkanningstapparna, som styra kontakterna SC25a1-SC29a1 frigoras. En krets fullbordas da Over kontakterna SC27a1, >> slut pa varukortet»-kontakterna SC30b1, kontakterna SS20a3 (lage 3) kontakterna SC33b1, vilka aro slutna i kamradens i avlasningsanordningen utgangslage och lage 1, kontakterna SC35b2 och magneterna L22A. och L22B, vilka magneter harvid magnetiseras och omstalla kopplingen for en operationscykel, sa. att avlasningsanordningens kamrad sammankopplas med avlasningsanordningens motor 333. If, for example, a goods card with length no. 1 is inserted into the unloading device, the contacts SC27a1 are closed, then the scanning pins, which guide the contacts SC25a1-SC29a1, are released. A circuit is completed when the contacts SC27a1, the "end of the product card" contacts SC30b1, the contacts SS20a3 (layer 3) the contacts SC33b1, which are closed in the chamber of the output device and layer 1 of the chamber, the contacts SC35b2 and the magnets L22A. and L22B, which magnets are thereby magnetized and reposition the clutch for an operating cycle, said. that the chamber of the unloading device is connected to the motor 333 of the unloading device.

Pa sarama gang, som magneterna L22A och L22B magnetiseras fullbordas en krets fran ledaren 1304 Over kontakterna SC27a1 (fig. 4313), SC30b1, K2Obd11, SS20a4 (lage 3) och ett reld 1(20 fOr magnetisering av detta rela, varigenorn kontakterna K2Oad11 (fig. 43B) slutas, varefter kontakterna K2Obdll (fig. 43B) oppnas. Harvid fullbordas en hallningskrets far relaet 1(20 fran ledaren 1304 Over kontakterna SS1bc21 (fig. 43C), ledaren 1340, kontakterna K2Oad11, kontakterna SS20a4 (lage 3) och relaet 1(20, sa att relaet halles magnetiserat. At the same time as the magnets L22A and L22B are magnetized, a circuit from the conductor 1304 is completed. Fig. 43B) is closed, after which the contacts K2B relay 1 (20, said that the relay is kept magnetized.

Det erinras om, att vid avlasningen av varukortet magnetiserades ursprungligen magneten L20 Over kontakterna K3acl 1 (fig. 43 D), leclaren 1316, kontakterna SP24b1 (fig. 43 B), 1fi2Obd1, SS20a2 (laze 3), SC23a1, SC37b1, magneten L20, kontakterna SC61a1 och kontakterna SC60b1. Vid magnetiseringen av relaet 1(20 appnas kontakterna K2Obd1 for brytaing av den ursprungliga magnetiseringskretsen, saint slutas kontakterna 1(2Oadl, varigenorn en magnetiseringskrets till magneten L20 fullbordas Over kontakterna SC27a1 och SC30b1. Avlasnings- och uppteckningsoperationen, som utfOres under kontroll av varukortet, fullbordas med magneten L20 magnetiserad i denna krets, vilken Or densamma, som bes revs i samband riled expedit- och kundkorten. It is recalled that when unloading the product card, the magnet L20 was originally magnetized over the contacts K3ac1 1 (Fig. 43 D), the leclar 1316, the contacts SP24b1 (Fig. 43 B), 1fi2Obd1, SS20a2 (laze 3), SC23a1, SC37b1, the magnet L20 , contacts SC61a1 and contacts SC60b1. During the excitation of the relay 1 (20, the contacts K2Obd1 are opened to break the original excitation circuit, then the contacts 1) are closed, whereby a excitation circuit to the magnet L20 is completed. Over the contacts SC27a1 and SC30b1. with the magnet L20 magnetized in this circuit, which Or the same, which is requested torn in connection riled clerk and customer cards.

I samband med stansningen av en identifieringssymbol for det varukort, som avlases, bor tint observeras, att om de kodnings- — —31 organ, som innefatta kontakterna SS20a6 (fig. 43F), anvandas kommer samma identifieringssymbol att utnyttjas, oavsett vilken av de tre mojliga varukorten, som anvandas. Om andra sidan de kodningsorgan, som innefatta kontakterna SC25a2—SC29a2 (fig. 43F), anvandas, ãr det mojligt att stansa olika identifieringssymboler for olika kortlangder och harigenom kunna de olika varukorten, som avlasas, identifieras. In connection with the punching of an identification symbol for the product card being read, it should be noted that if the coding means, which include the contacts SS20a6 (Fig. 43F), are used, the same identification symbol will be used, regardless of which of the three possible product cards, which are used. On the other hand, if the coding means, which comprise the contacts SC25a2-SC29a2 (Fig. 43F), are used, it is possible to punch different identification symbols for different card lengths and thereby the different product cards which are unloaded can be identified.

Dá samtliga informationer avlasts fran varukortet och dessa informationer stansats pa kortet sker en aterstallningsoperation, vilken startas av de »slut pa varukorteb-kontakter, som svara mot langden pa det avlasta kortet. Sasom framgar av fig. 43B ligga »slut pa varukortet»-kontakterna for varje sifferlangd i serie med motsvarande kontakter, som styras av identifieringstapparna. Detta innebar att >> slut pa varukortet»-kontakterna SC30b1 for kort av den forsta sifferlangden ligger i serie med kontakterna SC27a1, att »slut pa varukortet»-kontakterna SC31b1 for varukort med den tredje sifferlangden ligga i serie med kontakterna SC28a1 och att »slut pa varukortet»-kontakterna SC32b1 for varukort av den tredje sifferlangden ligger i serie med kontakterna SC29a1. Var och en av kontaktsatserna SC30b1, SC31b1 och SC32b1 styras genom kamradens i wvlasningsanordningen installning och aro anordnade att oppnas vid en viss tidpunkt under kamradens vridning, vilken tidpunkt beror pa den bestamda langden hos var och en av de tre varukorttyperna. Vid oppnandet av de »slut pa varukortet»- kontakter, som motsvara langden pa det kort, som avlases, brytes kretsen till magneten L20, vilken darvid avmagnetiserds. Aterstallningsoperationen slutfores sedan, sasom beskrivits i samband med avlasningen av expeditkortet och kundkortet. When all information is unloaded from the product card and this information is stopped on the card, a recovery operation takes place, which is started by the "end of product card contacts", which correspond to the length of the unloaded card. As can be seen from Fig. 43B, the "end of the product card" contacts for each digit length are in series with the corresponding contacts, which are controlled by the identification pins. This meant that the "end of the product card" contacts SC30b1 for cards of the first digit length are in series with the contacts SC27a1, that the "end of the product card" contacts SC31b1 for goods cards with the third digit length are in series with the contacts SC28a1 and that "end on the goods card »contacts SC32b1 for goods cards of the third digit length are in series with the contacts SC29a1. Each of the contact sets SC30b1, SC31b1 and SC32b1 is controlled by the installation of the chamber row in the welding device and is arranged to be opened at a certain time during the rotation of the chamber row, which time depends on the determined length of each of the three product card types. When the "end of the product card" contacts, which correspond to the length of the card being read, are obtained, the circuit of the magnet L20 is broken, which is thereby demagnetized. The recovery operation is then completed, as described in connection with the unloading of the clerk card and the customer card.

Relaet K20 har tillkommit for att framtvinga anvandning av kassaregistret i uppteckningsanlaggningen efter varje varukortavlasning fOr registrering och uppteckning av data, som hora till varan, sasom exempelvis varupriset. Sedan en kassaregisteroperation avslutats kan ett annat varukort avlasas, sâ att transaktionen kan innefatta godtyckligt antal varuposter. Da samtliga onskade varukort avlasts och motsvarande forsaljningspriser registrerats pa kassaregistret, kan sum-man framraknas, varvid omkopplaren 518 (fig. 22) kterstalles till sitt forsta lase, sasom kommer att beskrivas nedan. Relay K20 has been added to force the use of the cash register in the recording facility after each product card reading for registration and recording of data, which belongs to the product, such as the product price. After a cash register operation has been completed, another goods card can be read, so that the transaction can include any number of goods items. When all the desired goods cards have been unloaded and the corresponding sales prices have been registered in the cash register, the sum can be deducted, whereby the switch 518 (Fig. 22) is reset to its first read, as will be described below.

Avlasning av mer an ett varukort, utan paverkan av kassaregistret forhindras genom att kontakterna K2Obd1 (fig 43B) oppnas vid magnetiseringen av relaet K20. Da kontakterna K2Obd1 aro oppna, kan magneten L20 icke ater magnetiseras, efter att en gang ha avmagnetiserats efter fullbordandet av den forsta varukortavlasningen. Detta tillstand kvarstar, till dess relaet K20 avmagnetiseras under uppteckningen av data, som harrOra fran en kassaregisteroperation. Unloading of more than one goods card, without affecting the cash register, is prevented by opening the contacts K2Obd1 (Fig. 43B) during the magnetization of the relay K20. When the contacts K2Obd1 are open, the magnet L20 can not be magnetized again, after being demagnetized once after the completion of the first product card unloading. This condition persists until the relay K20 is demagnetized during the recording of data obtained from a cash register operation.

Vid magnetiseringen av relaet K20 oppnas aven kontakterna E20be12 (fig. 43A) och slutas kontakterna K20ac12. Av fig. 43A framgar att oppnandet av kontakterna K20bc12 och slutandet av kontakterna K20ac12 forandrar kretsarna, sâ att den enda tangent pa kassaregistret, som vid nedtryckning medfor magnetisering av omstallningsmagneten L40 f8r tangentlasraden, dr varutangenten »VA-RA», vilken vid nedtryckning sluter kontakterna SC58a1. During the magnetization of the relay K20, the contacts E20be12 are also opened (Fig. 43A) and the contacts K20ac12 are closed. Fig. 43A shows that the opening of the contacts K20bc12 and the closing of the contacts K20ac12 change the circuits, so that the only key on the cash register, which when pressed entails magnetization of the changeover magnet L40 in front of the key laser row, SC58a1.

Vid en varuoperation pa kassaregistret uppstalles varupriset, eller andra onskade data, pa tangentbordcts beloppsdel och varutangenten MDSE nedtryckes. Vid slutningen av kontakterna SC58a1, genom nedtryckningen av denna tangent, fullbordas en krets fran en vaxelstromsledare 1341 Over kontakterna_ L20b1, vilka slutits, da magneten L20 avmagnetiserats, de normalt slutna kontakterna SS20b14, kontakterna SS20a1 (lage 3), kontakterna K20ae12, de normalt slutna kontakterna SC48bc1, vilka styras av tangenterna i raderna 7 och 8 pa kassaregistret, kontakterna SC58a1, vilka styras av MDSE-tangenten,. kontakterna SC50a1, vilka slutas, da nagon. av tangenterna i rad 1 helt nedtryckes, magneten LIO och kontakterna K1b13, vilka aroanordnade att astadkomma en lure lasning av uppteckningsanordningen, da de slutas vid_ fullbordandet av en foregaende operationscykel hos uppteckningsanordningen, till magneten L40 (fig. 43A) for omstallning av tangentlasraden, vilken magnet salunda magnetiseras. Magnetisering av magneten L40 medfor att de nedtryckta tangenterna lasas i sina_ nedtryckta lagen samt att kontakterna SC41a1 (fig. 43A) genom mekanisk pa.verkan slutas. far fullbordandet av en paverkningskrets till motorn 1300 i kassaregistret Over namnda motors hastighetskontrollkontakterna SC40b1 och kontakterna SC41a1, varigenom kassaregistret bringas att utfOra en operationscykel. In a commodity operation on the cash register, the commodity price, or other desired data, is set on the keyboard part of the keyboard and the commodity key MDSE is pressed. At the close of the contacts SC58a1, by pressing this key, a circuit from an AC conductor 1341 is completed. contacts SC48bc1, which are controlled by the keys in lines 7 and 8 of the cash register, contacts SC58a1, which are controlled by the MDSE key ,. the contacts SC50a1, which are closed, da nagon. of the keys in row 1 are completely depressed, the magnet L10 and the contacts K1b13, which are arranged to effect a trickle reading of the recording device, when they are completed at the completion of a previous operation cycle of the recording device, to the magnet L40 (Fig. 43A) for switching the key laser row. magnet salunda magnetized. Magnetization of the magnet L40 means that the depressed keys are locked in their depressed layers and that the contacts SC41a1 (Fig. 43A) are closed by mechanical action. the completion of an actuating circuit to the motor 1300 in the cash register Over the said motor speed control contacts SC40b1 and the contacts SC41a1, whereby the cash register is caused to perform an operation cycle.

Vid en forutbestamd tidpunkt under kassaregistrets operationscykel efter det att samtliga mot de olika tangentbankarna och andra mekanismer svarande selektoromkopplareha installts riktigt, sluter en mekanism i kassaregistret »starta uppteckningen»-kontakterna SC42a1 (fig. 43D) for att starta en uppteckningsoperation for uppteckning av data under kontroll av kassaregistret. Vid slutningen av kontakterna SC42a1 fullbordas en krets. frail ledaren 1304 Over den ena eller bada av de hada parallellkopplade kontakterna K3acl 1 (fig. 43D) och K2022, vilka aro slutna vid denna tidpunkt, de normalt slutna kontakterna • SC44b1, som kontrolleras av summaspaken pa kassaregistret samt kontakterna SC42a1 till kontaktarmen pa programomkopplaren SR41a2 (fig. 43D) for rad 1. At a predetermined time during the cash register operation cycle after all the selector switches corresponding to the various key banks and other mechanisms have been installed correctly, a mechanism in the cash register "starts recording" contacts SC42a1 (Fig. 43D) closes to start a recording operation for recording data. control of the cash register. At the end of the contacts SC42a1 a circuit is completed. frail conductor 1304 Over one or both of the had parallel connected contacts K3acl 1 (Fig. 43D) and K2022, which are closed at this time, the normally closed contacts • SC44b1, which are controlled by the sum lever on the cash register and the contacts SC42a1 to the contact arm on the program switch SR41a2 (Fig. 43D) for row 1.

Var och en av omkopplarens SR41a2 tb 32— — kontakter, som representera de tio olika tangentlagena i rad 1, är medelst en ledare i en kabel 1342 ansluten till en programvaljningssektion 891 pa kassaregistrets utvaljningspanel 748. Each of the switches SR41a2 tb 32 - - contacts, representing the ten different key layers in row 1, is connected by means of a conductor in a cable 1342 to a program selection section 891 on the cash register selection panel 748.

Vid det i samband med foreliggande utforingsform av uppfinningen anvanda kassaregistret ãr tangenten i attonde laget i rad 1 varutangenten, och sasom ett exempel kan antagas, att uttag 8 i sektionen 891 pa utvaljningspanelen 748 är medelst en proppforbindning, vilken i fig. 43D antycles genom den streck-prickade linjen 1344, ansluten till ett uttag for program I i panelens 748 sektion 1345 for utvaljning av det forsta stansningsprogrammet for stansning av varudata. Uttaget i sektionen 1345 är i sin tur anslutet Over en ledare i en kabel 1346 till valjarens SSI (fig. 43E) kontaktarm, vilken valjare lit- gOres av niva. I i stegvaljaren 726. Antag vi- dare att omkopplarens SR41a2 (fig. 431)) kontaktarm instants differentiellt i kontaktlage 8 under en kassaregisteroperation, vid vilken »VARA»-tangenten nedtryckts. Eftersorn valjarens SSI kontaktarm är ansluten till uttaget 1347 vid borjan av en uppteckningsoperation, kommer den ovan beskrivna kretsen till kontaktarmen i stegvaljarnivan SSI att fortsatta over uttaget 1347, ledaren 1348 och de normalt slutna kontakterna K1bd11 (fig. 43D) for magnetisering av relaet K1 (fig. 43C). In the context of the present embodiment of the invention using the cash register, the key in the eighth layer in row 1 is the commodity key, and as an example it can be assumed that socket 8 in section 891 of the selection panel 748 is by means of a plug connection, which in Fig. 43D is anticipated by the dash-dotted line 1344, connected to a socket for program I in section 1345 of the panel 748 for selecting the first punching program for punching goods data. The socket in section 1345 is in turn connected via a conductor in a cable 1346 to the switch's SSI (Fig. 43E) contact arm, which switch is litgOres of level. I in the step selector 726. Further assume that the contact arm of the switch SR41a2 (Fig. 431)) is instantaneously differentiated in contact position 8 during a cash register operation, in which the "BE" key is pressed. After the SSI contact arm of the selector is connected to the socket 1347 at the beginning of a recording operation, the above-described circuit of the contact arm in the step selector level SSI will continue across the socket 1347, the conductor 1348 and the normally closed contacts K1bd11 (Fig. 43D) for magnetizing the relay K1 ( Fig. 43C).

Det ar uppenbart att det o-van beskrivna kopplingssattet endast utgor ett exempel pa mojliga programmeringar av uppteckningsanlaggningen. Om sa onskas kunna proppforbindningar giiras mellan godtyckliga uttag i sektionen 891, vilka motsvara kontakterna omkopplaren SR41a2, till ett uttag i sektionen 1345, som dr f8rbundet med den onskade nivan av nivaerna SSI, SSII, SSIII eller SSIV i stegvaljaren 726. It is obvious that the connection method described above is only an example of possible programming of the recording system. If desired, plug connections can be made between any sockets in section 891, which correspond to the contacts switch SR41a2, to a socket in section 1345, which is connected to the desired level of levels SSI, SSII, SSIII or SSIV in step selector 726.

Relaet K1 (fig. 43C) magnetiseras i den forut beskrivna kretsen mcd foljande resultat. Relay K1 (Fig. 43C) is magnetized in the previously described circuit with the following result.

Kontakterna Klad11 (fig. 43C) slutas och fullborda en hallningskrets till relaet K1 Over kontakterna K2b12 och ledaren 1304. The contacts Klad11 (fig. 43C) are closed and complete a tilting circuit to the relay K1 Over the contacts K2b12 and the conductor 1304.

Kontakterna 1{1b12 (fig. 43C) oppnas for avmagnetisering av relaet K3. Detta inedfOr att kontakterna K3b1 (fig. 43B) slutas och fullborda en krets till avlasningsanordningens motor 333 och uppteckningsanordningens motor 601. Dessutom Oppnns kontakterna K3acll (fig. 43B) vid avmagnetiseringen av relaet 1(3. Contacts 1 {1b12 (Fig. 43C) are opened for demagnetization of relay K3. This means that the contacts K3b1 (Fig. 43B) are closed and complete a circuit to the motor 333 of the unloading device and the motor 601 of the recording device.

Oppnandet av kontakterna K1b12 (fig. 43C) forhindrar awn en operation for paforing av ledmonster, genom att kretsen till kontakterna SP1acl brytes. The opening of the contacts K1b12 (Fig. 43C) awn prevents an operation for driving the lead sample, by breaking the circuit of the contacts SP1ac1.

Kontakter K1bc2 (fig. 43C) oppnas for brytning av kretsen Over kontakterna K2bc2, vilken anvandes i saraband med aterstallningsoperationer, men icke vid denna operation. Contacts K1bc2 (Fig. 43C) are opened for breaking the circuit Above contacts K2bc2, which is used in conjunction with recovery operations, but not in this operation.

Kontakter Klbc1 (fig. 43C) oppnas for brytning av hallningskretsen till relaet K2 (fig. 43C), vilket arbetar vid ledmonsterpaforingsoperationer saint f Or brytning av kretsen till anslutningen 1308 pa symbolkodningspanelen 1311 (fig. 43F) frail kontakterna SS1ac21 (fig. 43C), cla stegvaljaren 726 lamnat utgangslaget och relaet K2 magnetiseras. Spanningen pa anslutningen 1308 medfOr att icke onskade ledmonstersymboler stansas. Contacts Klbc1 (Fig. 43C) are opened for breaking the inclination circuit to the relay K2 (Fig. 43C), which operates in joint sample paging operations. , cla the step selector 726 leaves the output layer and the relay K2 is magnetized. The voltage at connection 1308 causes unwanted articulation symbols to stop.

Kontakter K1ac2 (fig. 43C) slutas och fullborda en krets fran ledaren 1304 till stegningsmagneten SS1 (fig. 43C) Over kontakterna SS1bc21, K2bc1, Klac2 och SS1b11. Da magneten SS1 magnetiseras, drages en fjader, som driver kontakarmarna tillbaka pa stegvaljaren 726 och Oppnas kontakterna. SS1b11. Da kontakterna SS1b11 oppnas avmagnetiseras magneten SS1. Harvid frigores kontaktarmarnas drivfjader och stegar fram armarna till deras forsta lage. Contacts K1ac2 (Fig. 43C) are closed and complete a circuit from the conductor 1304 to the stepping magnet SS1 (Fig. 43C) over the contacts SS1bc21, K2bc1, Klac2 and SS1b11. When the magnet SS1 is magnetized, a spring is pulled, which drives the contact arms back on the step selector 726 and opens the contacts. SS1b11. When the contacts SS1b11 are opened, the magnet SS1 is demagnetized. This releases the drive spring of the contact arms and advances the arms to their first position.

Kontakterna Klac1 och K1a3 slutas i en magnetiseringskrets for reldet K2, vilken krets stracker sig fran ledaren 1304 Over kontakterna SSlac21, Klacl, SC2b1, SS1b1 och K1a3. DA stegvaljarens kontaktarm forflyttas fran utgangsIaget Oppnas kontakterna SS1bc21 och slutas kontakterna SSlac21 for patryckning av spanning pa relaet 1(2 Over kontakterna K1ac1, SC2b1, SS1b1 och K1a3. Relat 1(2 halles darefter magnetiserat Over egna hallningskontakter K2a3, vilka overbrygga kontakterna K1a3 och SS1b1. The contacts Klac1 and K1a3 are terminated in a magnetizing circuit for the current K2, which circuit extends from the conductor 1304 Over the contacts SSlac21, Klacl, SC2b1, SS1b1 and K1a3. The contact arm of the step selector is moved from the output layer. .

Kontakter K2ac2 (fig. 43C) slutas och fullborcla en krets frail ledaren 1304 till stegvaljarmagneten SS1, sa att denna magnetiseras. Vid magnetiseringen av magneten SS1 slutas kontakterna SS1a3 (fig. 43D) och fullborda en krets Over kontakterna SSlac21 (fig. 43C), K2ac2, SS1a3 och programvaljaren SR41a2 till kontaktarmen for nivan SSI (fig. 43E) i stegvaljaren, sasom redan beskrivits. Contacts K2ac2 (Fig. 43C) are closed and a full circuit of the conductor 1304 to the step selection magnet SS1 is filled, so that it is magnetized. Upon magnetization of the magnet SS1, the contacts SS1a3 (Fig. 43D) are closed and complete a circuit Over the contacts SSlac21 (Fig. 43C), K2ac2, SS1a3 and the program selector SR41a2 to the contact arm for the level SSI (Fig. 43E) in the step selector, as already described.

Anordningen dr nu klar att uppteckna data I stansningsprogram I, lage 1. Dessa data kunna vara fasta och anvandas vid samtliga uppteckningar, som styras av program I eller ocksa fOranderliga data, som kunna uppstallas medelst kassaregistret och variera under olika uppteckningsoperationer, vid vilka program I anvandes. The device is now ready to record data in punching program I, layer 1. This data can be fixed and used in all records, which are controlled by program I or also variable data, which can be stored by the cash register and vary during different recording operations, in which programs I used.

Magneten SS1 forblir magnetiserad till dess en stansningsoperation sker, varvid kontakterna SC2b1 (fig. 43C) oppnas i relaets 1(2 hallningskrets. The magnet SS1 remains magnetized until a punching operation takes place, whereby the contacts SC2b1 (Fig. 43C) are opened in the inclination circuit of the relay 1 (2).

Med stegvaljarmagneten magnetiserad for patryckning av spanning till kontaktarmen i niva I, sasom beskrivits, kommer darfOr kretsen att fortsatta Over kontakten i lage 1 till en stansutvaljningsmagnet. With the step selector magnet magnetized to press voltage to the contact arm in level I, as described, therefor the circuit will continue across the contact in position 1 to a punch selection magnet.

Antag att niva. I i stegvaljaren 726 ar programmerad for att forst uppteckna informationer frail kassaregistrets rad 9 och darefter fOljd fran beloppsraderna 6-2 samt slutligen fran kassaregistrets kontrollrad 1, varefter en aterstallningsoperation for aterstall- — —33 fling av stegvaljarelis 726 kontaktarm till utgangsldget startas. Vid en varuoperation aro raderna 7 och 8 klassificeringsrader och anvandas icke, da varukortet avlases, eftersom kortet innehaller de informationer, som i annat fall skulle inforas medelst raderna 7 och 8. Suppose to level. I in the step selector 726 is programmed to first record information from the cash register line 9 and then follow from the amount lines 6-2 and finally from the cash register control line 1, after which a reset operation for resetting the step selector 726 contact arm to the output layer is started. In a commodity operation, rows 7 and 8 are classification rows and are not used when the commodity card is read, since the card contains the information that would otherwise be entered by means of rows 7 and 8.

Eftersom den forsta stansningsoperationen vid program I anvandes for uppteckning av informationer fran kassaregistrets kontrollrad 9, dr uttag 1 for program I i den Ovre programpanelen 734 (fig. 43E) anslutet genom en proppforbindning, som i fig. 43E angives genom en streck-prickad liaje 1356, till ett avlasningsuttag 1357 for rad 9 i avlasnings-sektionen 735 pa den nedre programpanelen 733. Uttaget ãr anslutet till en ledare i en kabel 1360, vilken ledare i sin tur är ansluten till kontaktarmen i kassaregistrets avlasningsomkopplare SR49a1 (fig. 43D), som instants i motsvarighet till den nedtryckta tangenten i rad 9 pa kassaregistret. Since the first punching operation in program I is used to record information from the cash register control line 9, socket 1 for program I in the upper program panel 734 (Fig. 43E) is connected by a plug connection, which in Fig. 43E is indicated by a dashed line. 1356, to a reading socket 1357 for row 9 in the reading section 735 of the lower program panel 733. The socket is connected to a conductor in a cable 1360, which conductor is in turn connected to the contact arm of the cash register readout switch SR49a1 (Fig. 43D), as an instance corresponding to the pressed key in line 9 of the cash register.

Eftersom i det valda exemplet Debitering»- tangenten i lage 8 i rad 9 är nedtryckt, har vid en kassaregisteroperation onikopplaren SR49a1 mekaniskt instants med sin kontaktarm pa kontakt 8. Since in the selected example the Debit »key in layer 8 in row 9 is pressed, in a cash register operation the oncoupler SR49a1 has a mechanical instant with its contact arm on contact 8.

Omkopplarens SR49a1 kontakter aro anslutna till motsvarande uttag i sektionen 892 pa kassaregistrets utvaljningspanel 748, me-deist ledare i en kabel 1362. Dessa uttag kunna forbindas genom proppforbindningar till uttag I panelens 748 siffersektion 889, vilken sektion Over motsvarande sifferledare i en kabel 1364 ãr ansluten till sifferkodningspanelens 1315 ingangsledare eller till uttag i symbolsektioncn 1324, som är forbunden Over ledare i kabeln 1325 till symbolkodningspanelens 1311 ingangsledare. The contacts of the switch SR49a1 are connected to the corresponding sockets in section 892 of the cash register selection panel 748, with conductors in a cable 1362. These sockets can be connected by plug connections to sockets in the panel 748's numerical section 889, which section above the corresponding numerical conductor in a cable 1364 to the input conductor of the numerical coding panel 1315 or to the sockets in the symbol section 1324, which are connected via conductors in the cable 1325 to the input conductor of the symbol coding panel 1311.

Antag sasom ett exempel, att uttag 8 i en sektion 892 pa panelen 748 (fig. 43D), vilket uttag hOr till valjaren SR49a1, ãr forbundet medelst en proppforbindning, som i fig. 43D angives genom den streckade linjen 1365, med ett uttag 1366 i panelens 748 symbolsektion 1324. Med valjarens SR49a1 kontaktarm i lage 8 kommer dâ en krets till kontaktarmen frail ett stegvaljaruttag Over en ledare i kabeln 1360 att gA Over valjaren SR49a1 till uttag 8 i sektionen 892, darifran Over en proppfOrbindning 1365, ett uttag 1366, en ledare i kabeln 1325, ingangssymbolledare 3 (icke visad) for symbolkodningspanelen 1311 (fig. 43F) och dioder i de utvalda raderna pa kodningspanelen 1311 till motsvarande stansmagneter, for stansning i utvalda kanaler pa remsan. Fullbordandet av kretsarna till dessa magneter startar en stansningscykel, varvid en av hal i de utvalda rernskanalerna representerad symbol stansas. As an example, suppose that socket 8 in a section 892 of panel 748 (Fig. 43D), which socket belongs to the selector SR49a1, is connected by means of a plug connection, which in Fig. 43D is indicated by the broken line 1365, with a socket 1366 in the panel 748 symbol section 1324. With the selector SR49a1 contact arm in position 8, then a circuit to the contact arm frail a step selector socket Over a conductor in the cable 1360 will go Over the selector SR49a1 to socket 8 in section 892, thence Over a plug connection 1365, a socket 1366, a conductor in the cable 1325, input symbol conductor 3 (not shown) for the symbol coding panel 1311 (Fig. 43F) and diodes in the selected rows on the coding panel 1311 for corresponding punching magnets, for punching in selected channels on the strip. The completion of the circuits of these magnets starts a punching cycle, in which case a symbol represented by slippery in the selected channel channels is punched.

Under stansningen av remsan oppnas kontakterna SC2b1 (fig. 43C) for avmagnetisering av relaet K2, vilket i sin tur Oppnar kontakterna K2ac2 (fig. 43C) for avmagnetisering av stegvaljarmagneten SS1 och fram stegning av kontaktarmarna till lage 2. Avmagnetisering av stegvaljarmagneten SS1 medfor att kontakterna SS1a3 (fig. 43D) Oppnas och bryta kretsen Over stegvaljarens kontaktarm, d kontaktarmen gar frail lage 1 till lage 2. Harigenom elimineras gnistbildning mellan kontaktarmen och kontakten under rorelse fran kontakt till kontakt. During the punching of the strip, the contacts SC2b1 (Fig. 43C) are opened for demagnetizing the relay K2, which in turn opens the contacts K2ac2 (Fig. 43C) for demagnetizing the step selection magnet SS1 and advancing the contact arms to position 2. Demagnetization of the step selection magnet SS1 contacts SS1a3 (fig. 43D) Open and break the circuit Over the contact arm of the step selector, where the contact arm goes from position 1 to position 2. This eliminates spark formation between the contact arm and the contact during movement from contact to contact.

Vid 185 grader av stansningscykeln slutas ater kontakterna SC2b1 for magnetisering av relaet K2 och stegvaljarmagneten SS1, vilken i sin tur sluter kontakterna SS1a3 for fullbordande av en krets Over stegvaljararmen i niva I och lage 2 i stegvaljaren 726. At 185 degrees of the punching cycle, the contacts SC2b1 for magnetizing the relay K2 and the step selector magnet SS1 are closed again, which in turn closes the contacts SS1a3 to complete a circuit Over the step selector arm in level I and position 2 in the step selector 726.

I enlighet med det for niva. I uppstallda prograrnmet skall harefter informationer frail kassaregistrets beloppsrad 6 upptecknas. DA program I uppstalles i uppteckningsanordningen, maste en proppforbindning, som i fig. 43E representeras av en streckprickad linje 1367, anslutas mellan uttag 2 for program I I programpanelen 734 och ett avlasningsuttag 1368 for rad 6 i programpanelens 733 avlasningssektion 735. Uttaget 1368 är forbundet med en ledare i kabeln 1360, vilken ledare i sin tur ãr ansluten till kontaktarmen i kassaregistrets avlasningsomkopplare SR46a1 (icke visad), sorn installts i motsvarighet Lill den pa rad 6 i kassaregistret inforda siffran. In accordance with that for niva. In the set-up program, information from the cash register's amount line 6 must then be recorded. When program I is set up in the recording device, a plug connection, which in Fig. 43E is represented by a dashed line 1367, must be connected between socket 2 for program II program panel 734 and a unloading socket 1368 for row 6 in the unloading section 735 of program panel 733. The socket 1368 is connected to a conductor in the cable 1360, which conductor is in turn connected to the contact arm of the cash register unloading switch SR46a1 (not shown), which is installed corresponding to the number entered on line 6 in the cash register.

Antag exempelvis, att tangent 3 i rad 6 nedtryckts. Vid en kassaregisteroperation kommer da avlasningsomkopplaren SR46a1 att mekaniskt installas med sin kontaktarm pa kontakt 3. For example, suppose that key 3 in row 6 is pressed. In a cash register operation, the unloading switch SR46a1 will then be mechanically installed with its contact arm on contact 3.

Sasom framgar av fig. 43D aro motsvarande sifferkontakter i var och en av avlasningsomkopplarna SR42a1—SR48a1, motsvarande raderna 2-8 pa kassaregistret, fOrenade med varandra genom ledare i kabeln 1364, vilka ledare fortsatta till motsvarande sifferrader pa sifferkodningspanelen 1315 (fig. 43F). DA omkopplaren SR46a1 är installd i lage 3, kommer dess viiijararrn att fullborda en krels fran uttag 2 i program I Over ledaren 1367, uttaget 13158, tillhorande ledare i kabeln 1360, kassaregisteravlasningsomkopplaren SR46a1 och ledare »3» i kabeln 1364 till ingangssifferledaren 3 (icke visad) i sifferkodningspanelen. 11315. Dioder aro insatta fOr att f Orbinda ingangsledare 3 med vissa av stansutvaljningsmagneterna PS1—PS8 (fig. 43F) i enlighet med den onskade kodningen. Fullbordandet av kretsarna till dessa magneter medfor att tillhorande stansar valjas och att en starisningscykel startas, under vilken siffran 3 stansas i remsan genom att motsvarande remskanaler perforeras av de valda stansarna. As shown in Fig. 43D, the corresponding number contacts in each of the readout switches SR42a1 — SR48a1, corresponding to rows 2-8 of the cash register, are interconnected by conductors in the cable 1364, which conductors continue to the corresponding number rows on the digit coding panel 1315 (Fig. 43F). . Since the switch SR46a1 is installed in layer 3, its receiver will complete a circuit from terminal 2 in program I Over conductor 1367, terminal 13158, associated conductor in cable 1360, cash register unloading switch SR46a1 and conductor "3" in cable 1364 to the input digit conductor. shown) in the numeric coding panel. 11315. Diodes are inserted to connect input conductor 3 to some of the punch selection magnets PS1 — PS8 (Fig. 43F) in accordance with the desired coding. The completion of the circuits of these magnets means that the associated punches are selected and that a staring cycle is started, during which the number 3 is punched in the strip by perforating corresponding strip channels by the selected punches.

Under programmets andra stansningscykel oppnas Ater kontakterna SC2b1 (fig. 43C) for avimagnetisering av relaet K2 och stegningsmagneten, sa att kontaktarmarna framstegas till 'age 3 och vid 185 grader av stansningscykeln slutes Ater kontakterna SC2b1 34— — for magnetisering av reldet K2 och stegningsmagneten SS1, vilken sluter kontakterna SS1a3 och fullbordar kretsen over uttaget 3 i program I i programpanelen 734 och over en proppforbindning till ett uttag i panelens 733 sektion 735 samt motsvarande ledare i kabeln 1360 till omkopplarens SR45a1 (icke visad) kontaktarm, for uppteckning av informationen fran kassaregistrets beloppsrad 5. Under stansningen av den tredje siffran forflyttas kontaktarmarna till lage 4. During the second punching cycle of the program, the contacts SC2b1 (Fig. 43C) are opened again for deimagnetization of the relay K2 and the stepping magnet, so that the contact arms are advanced to age 3 and at 185 degrees of the punching cycle the re-contacts SC2b1 are closed , which closes the contacts SS1a3 and completes the circuit over the socket 3 in program I in the program panel 734 and over a plug connection to a socket in the panel 733 section 735 and the corresponding conductor in the cable 1360 to the switch SR45a1 (not shown) contact arm, for recording the information from the cash register amount line 5. During the punching of the third digit, the contact arms are moved to position 4.

Pa samma salt, som ovan beskrivits, upptecknas informationerna frail de olika avlasningsomkopplarna SR44a1—SR42al, vilka motsvara beloppsraderna 4-2 pa kassaregistret. On the same salt, as described above, the information from the different unloading switches SR44a1 — SR42al is recorded, which corresponds to the amount lines 4-2 on the cash register.

Efter fullbordandet av informationsupp- teckning fran beloppsraderna 62, anskar man uppteckna informationer fran kassaregistrets kontrollrad 1. DA program I skall uppstallas i uppteckningsanordningen, maste en proppfarbindning, som i fig. 43E representeras av en streck-prickad linje 1369, anslutas mellan uttag 9 for program I i programpanelen 734 och ett avlasningsuttag 1370 far rad 1 i panelens 733 avlasningssektion 735. Uttaget 1370 är forbundet med en ledare i kabeln 1360, vilken ledare i sin tur at forbunden med kontaktarmen i avlasningsomkopplaren SR41a1 (fig. 43D) far kontrollrad 1, vilken omkopplare i foreliggande fall är in-stand i lage 8, eftersom »VARA»-tangenten nedtryckts i denna rad. After completion of information recording from the amount lines 62, it is requested to record information from the cash register control line 1. DA program I must be set up in the recording device, a plug connection, which in Fig. 43E is represented by a dotted line 1369, must be connected between sockets 9 for program I in the program panel 734 and a unloading socket 1370 have row 1 in the unloading section 735 of the panel 733. The socket 1370 is connected to a conductor in the cable 1360, which conductor in turn is connected to the contact arm in the unloading switch SR41a1 (Fig. 43D). which switch in the present case is capable of position 8, since the "BE" key is pressed in this row.

Da omkopplaren SR41a1 är installd i lage 8 fullbordar dess kontaktarm en krets fran uttag 9 for program I Over proppforbindningen 1369, uttaget 1370, motsvarande ledare i kabeln 1360, omkopplaren SR41a1 och 8- ledaren i kabeln 1371 till motsvarande uttag siffer- och symbolsektionen 890 i panelen. 748 (fig. 43D). Delta uttag Or medelst proppforbindningar anslutet till uttag i panelens 748 siffersektion 889, vilka Oro farenade over motsvarande sifferledare i en kabel 1364 med ingangsledare i sifferkodningspanelen 1315 eller ocksâ aro forstnamnda uttag anslutna till uttag i symbolsektionen 1324, vilka aro forenade over ledare i kabeln 1325 med ingangsledare i symbolkodningspanelen 1311. Dessa proppforbindningar kunna utforas pa samma salt, som de forut beskrivna forbindningarna far uppteckning av informationer fran kassaregistrets kontrollrad 9. DA. omkopplarens SR4la1 kontaktarm är i iäge 8 fullbordas en krets till de utvalda ingangsledarna i symbolkodningspanelen eller sifferkodningspanelen och Over diodforbindningar till valda stansmagneter for startning av stansningscykeln, varvid en symbol eller siffra, som representeras av hal i motsvarande remskanaler, upptecknas. Since the switch SR41a1 is installed in position 8, its contact arm completes a circuit from socket 9 for program I Over the plug connection 1369, socket 1370, corresponding conductor in cable 1360, switch SR41a1 and 8-conductor in cable 1371 to corresponding socket number and symbol section 890 in the panel. 748 (Fig. 43D). Delta sockets Or by means of plug connections connected to sockets in the number section 889 of the panel 748, which are connected to the corresponding numerical conductor in a cable 1364 with input conductors in the numerical coding panel 1315 or also the former sockets are connected to sockets in the symbol section 1324. input conductor in the symbol coding panel 1311. These plug connections can be made on the same salt as the previously described connections for recording information from the cash register control line 9. DA. the switch arm of the switch SR4la1 is in position 8, a circuit to the selected input conductors in the symbol coding panel or numeric coding panel and Over diode connections to selected punch magnets for starting the punching cycle are completed, a symbol or number represented by hal in corresponding stripe channels.

Sedan alla informationer, som avlasts fran raderna 9 och 6-1 pa kassaregistrct upptecknats är det nadvandigt att stegvaljarens 726 kontaktarmar aterfaras till sina utgangslagen. Den nodvandiga programstyrningen for att astadkomma delta nadvandiggor en proppforbindning for varje program, vilka forbinda aterstallningsuttagen 739 for varje program med det uttag, som ligger omedelbart efter det uttag, som anvants vid uppteckningen av varje programs sista data. En sadan proppforbindning representeras exempelvis i fig. 43E av en streckprickad linje 1374, vilken forbinder ett aterstallningsuttag 739 med ett uttag 1375 for program I i programpanelen 734. Uttaget 1375 liar antagits vara det uttag, som foljer omedelbart efter det, som styr uppteckningen av de sista upptecknade vardena i program I. Da kontaktarmen i stegvaljarens 726 niva I framstegats till en med uttaget 1375 forbunden kontakt, fullbordas en krets Over niva I, uttaget 1375, proppfaorbindningen 1374, aterstallningsuttaget 739 och en ledare 1376 till relaet K3 Over kontakterna K2a13 (fig. 43C). Dessa kontakter slutas, old reldet K2 magnetiseras och medfor att reldet K3 magnetiseras. Da reldet K3 magnetiseras oppnas kontakterna K3bell for avmagnetisering av reldet Kl, emedan kontakterna K2b12 Oro Oppna vid denna tidpunkt. Kontakterna Klac1 Oppnas salunda och bryta kretsen till reldet K2 och kopplingsmagneterna LOA och L9B. Kontakterna Klbc2 slutas och fullborda en krets Over kontakterna S51ac21, K2bc2, Klbc2 och SS1b11 till stagvaljarmagneten SS1. Da magneten SS1 magnetiseras oppnas sjalybrytningskontakterna SS1b11, varigenom magneten SS1 avinagnetiseras och framstegar kontaktarmarna ett steg. Da magneten SS1 avmagnetiseras slutas ater kontakterna SS1b11, varigenom magneten SS1 Ater magnetiseras. After all the information read from lines 9 and 6-1 on the cash register has been recorded, it is necessary that the contact arms of the step selector 726 be returned to their initial layers. The necessary program control to provide participant accesses a plug connection for each program, which connects the reset sockets 739 for each program to the socket immediately after the socket used in recording the last data of each program. Such a plug connection is represented, for example, in Fig. 43E by a dashed line 1374, which connects a reset socket 739 to a socket 1375 for program I in the program panel 734. The socket 1375 is assumed to be the socket immediately following that which records the recording of the last recorded values in program I. When the contact arm in the step I 726 level I is advanced to a contact connected to the socket 1375, a circuit Over level I, the socket 1375, the plug connection 1374, the reset socket 739 and a conductor 1376 to the relay K3 Over the contacts K2a13 are completed (fig. 43C). These contacts are closed, the old fire K2 is magnetized and causes the fire K3 to be magnetized. When the fire K3 is magnetized, the contacts K3bell are opened for demagnetization of the fire K1, because the contacts K2b12 Oro Open at this time. Contacts Klac1 Open salunda and break the circuit to the line K2 and the coupling magnets LOA and L9B. The contacts Klbc2 are closed and complete a circuit Over the contacts S51ac21, K2bc2, Klbc2 and SS1b11 to the stay selection magnet SS1. When the magnet SS1 is magnetized, the shear break contacts SS1b11 are opened, whereby the magnet SS1 is de-magnetized and the contact arms advance one step. When the magnet SS1 is demagnetized, the contacts SS1b11 are closed again, whereby the magnet SS1 is magnetized again.

Delmar aterstallningsoperation fortsatter till dess kontaktarmarna i stegvaljaren nar sina utgangslagen. Vid denna tidpunkt oppna kontakterna SS1ac21 aterstallningskretsen Over kontakterna K2bc2, K1bc2 och SS1b11 till stegvaljarmagneten SS1. I stegvaljarens utgangslage slutes kontakterna SS1bc21. Anordningen har nu upptecknat alla de informationer, som erfordras i program I och stagvaljarens 726 kontaktarmar ha atergatt till utgangslaget. Delmar recovery operation continues until the contact arms in the step selector reach their starting positions. At this time, the contacts SS1ac21 open the reset circuit Over the contacts K2bc2, K1bc2 and SS1b11 to the step selection magnet SS1. In the output mode of the step selector, the contacts SS1bc21 are closed. The device has now recorded all the information required in program I and the contact arms of the stay selector 726 have returned to the output layer.

Avmagnetisering av reldet K20 for inre lasning mellan avlasningsanordningen och kassaregistret foljer efter paborjandet av operationen for uppteckning av i kassaregistret infarda informationer. Det erinras can, att stegvaljarens 726 initialoperation medfOr att kontakterna SS1bc21 (fig. 43C) appnas. vid brytes kretsen frail ledaren 1304 over kontakterna SS1bc21, en ledare 1340, kontakter R2Oadll (fig. 43B), SS20a4 Gage 3) till reldet K20, sa att detta raid avmagnetiseras. Demagnetization of the line K20 for internal loading between the unloading device and the cash register follows the start of the operation for recording information entered in the cash register. It may be recalled that the initial operation of the step selector 726 causes the contacts SS1bc21 (Fig. 43C) to be opened. at the circuit frail the conductor 1304 is broken across the contacts SS1bc21, a conductor 1340, contacts R2Oadll (Fig. 43B), SS20a4 Gage 3) to the line K20, so that this raid is demagnetized.

Vid reldets K20 avmagnetisering slutas kontakterna K2Obd1 (fig. 43B) och ytterligare ett — — varukort kan avlasas av avlasningsanordningen, orn sá onskas, vid fullbordandet av uppteckningen av de i kassaregistret infi5rda informationerna. Kontakterna K2Obel2 (fig. 43A) slutas aven och nu kan nagon av »Insattning»-, »rabatt»-, »skatt»- eller »diverse»-tangenterna i rad 1, vilka respektive styra kontakterna SC42a1, SC53a1, SC57a1 och SC56a1 anvandas, for att starta en kassaregisteroperation, om sa är lampligt. During the demagnetization of the line K20, the contacts K2Obd1 are closed (Fig. 43B) and a further product card can be unloaded by the unloading device, if desired, upon completion of the recording of the information entered in the cash register. Contacts K2Obel2 (Fig. 43A) are also closed and now any of the "Deposit", "Discount", "Tax" or "Miscellaneous" keys in row 1 can be used, which respectively control the contacts SC42a1, SC53a1, SC57a1 and SC56a1. , to start a cash register operation, if appropriate.

Det ãr tydligt, att avlasning av varukorten och tillhorande kassaregisteroperationer vid en transaktion, som omfattar mer an en for-said artikel, kommer att medfora uppteckning av informationer far varje artikel, pa det satt, sow redan beskrivits vid forsaljning och uppteekning av en enda artikel. It is clear that unloading of the goods cards and associated cash register operations in a transaction, which includes more than one requested item, will result in the recording of information for each item, as it has already been described when selling and recording a single item. .

Den beskrivna debiteringstransaktionen avslutas genom att transaktionens summa framtaps, vilken summa kan innehalla en eller flera forsalda artiklar. Summatagningen vid en debiteringsoperation medfor aven att foljdomkopplaren 518 (fig. 22) flyttas tillbaka till lage 1, sa att den är installd for en foljande transaktion. Det i den beskrivna anlaggningen anvanda kassaregistrets mekaniska konstruktion är sadan, att spaken 756 mekaniskt blockeras, da. spaken 755 ãr i adderingslage. Vid forflyttning av spaken 755 till »summa»-lage frigores spaken 756, sa att den kan nedtryckas. Vid summatagning medfor darfor nedtryckning av spaken 756, att kontakterna SC45a1 (fig. 43A) slutas, varigenom en krets Iran en vaxelspanningsledare 1341 fullbordas till omstallningsmagneten L40 for tangentlasraden. Vid magnetiseringen av magneten L40 frigores tangentlasraden 793, sa. att den kan vridas. Vridning av tangentlasraden 793 medfor i sin tur att kontakterna SC41a1 (fig. 43A), vilka styras av kamskivor pa tangentlasraden, slutas, varvid en summatagningsoperation startas i kassaregistret. The described debiting transaction is terminated by losing the sum of the transaction, which sum may contain one or more pre-sold items. The sum taking in a debiting operation also means that the tracking switch 518 (Fig. 22) is moved back to layer 1, so that it is installed for a following transaction. The mechanical construction of the cash register used in the described installation is such that the lever 756 is mechanically blocked, da. lever 755 years in addition. When the lever 755 is moved to the "sum" position, the lever 756 is released so that it can be depressed. When summing, therefore, depressing the lever 756 causes the contacts SC45a1 (Fig. 43A) to close, thereby completing a circuit Iran and an AC voltage conductor 1341 to the switching magnet L40 for the key laser row. During the magnetization of the magnet L40, the tangent laser row 793 is released, said. that it can be rotated. Rotation of the key laser row 793 in turn causes the contacts SC41a1 (Fig. 43A), which are controlled by cam discs on the key laser row, to be closed, whereby a sum collection operation is started in the cash register.

Nedtryckning av spaken 756 fOr en summatagningsoperation vid en debiteringstransaktion pa foreliggande kassaregistertyp, medfOr att differentialmekanismen for rad 1 i maskinen gar in i silt femte lage, sa att programomkopplarens SR41a2 (fig. 43D) kontaktarm installes pa den femte kontakten, vilken är forbunden med motsvarande uttag i panelens 748 (fig. 43D) sektion 891 Over en ledare i kabeln 1342. Namnda uttag kan genom en proppforbindning anslutas till ett uttag i panelens 748 programsektion 1345, for utvaljning av en onskad niva i stegvaljaren SS1 for summaprogrammet. Depressing the lever 756 for a sum operation in a debit transaction on the present cash register type causes the differential mechanism for row 1 of the machine to enter the fifth layer, so that the contact arm of the program switch SR41a2 (Fig. 43D) is installed on the fifth contact, which is connected to the corresponding socket in the panel 748 (fig. 43D) section 891 Over a conductor in the cable 1342. Said socket can be connected by means of a plug connection to a socket in the program section 1345 of the panel 748, for selecting a desired level in the step selector SS1 for the sum program.

Vid ett kassaregister av den liar anvanda typen erfordras tva maskincykler fOr en summatagningsoperation. Omkopplarna SR42a1SR48a1 (fig. 43D) installas, under en summatagningsoperation, i enlighet med den av kassaregistret beraknade summan. »Starta uppteckningen»-kontakterna SC42a1 (fig. 43D) pa.verkas, sasom namnts, av kassare- gistrets huvudkamrad 1036 och slates, under en summatagningsoperation, forst under den andra maskincykeln. I foreliggande fall aro kontakterna anordnade att slutas vid 535 grader och att ater oppnas vid 585 grader av summatagningsoperationen. D kontakterna SC42a1 slutas startas en uppteckningscykel, vid vilken till summatagningsoperationen horande informationer stansas pa remsan, i enlighet med programmeringen av den utvalda nivan i stegvaljaren SS1. In the case of a cash register of the type used, two machine cycles are required for a sum collection operation. The switches SR42a1SR48a1 (Fig. 43D) are installed, during a sum collection operation, in accordance with the sum calculated by the cash register. The "Start Recording" contacts SC42a1 (Fig. 43D) are actuated, as mentioned, by the cash register 1036's main chamber and are slated, during a sum collection operation, only during the second machine cycle. In the present case, the contacts are arranged to be closed at 535 degrees and to be reopened at 585 degrees by the summing operation. When the contacts SC42a1 are closed, a recording cycle is started, in which information belonging to the summing operation is punched on the strip, in accordance with the programming of the selected level in the step selector SS1.

Det kan exempetvis vara Onskvart att forst uppteckna ett antal bestamda siffror, vilka identifiera den vid transaktionen anvanda maskinen. Om fyra siffror eller symboler onskas stansade forbindas de fyra forsta uttagen pa den Ovre programpanelen 734, vilka svara mot de fyra forsta kontakterna i den valda nivan i stegvaljaren 726, exempelvis niva. II, genom proppforbindningar med uttag i siffersektionen. 738 eller symbolsektionen 737 i den nedre programpanelen 733. Uttagen 1 siffersektionen 738 aro Over ledare i kabeln 1364 anslutna till motsvarande ingangar i sifferkodningspanelen 1315 (fig. 43F). Uttag i symbolsektionen 737 aro Over ledare i kabeln 1325 anslutna till motsvarande ingangar i symbolkodningspanelen 1311. Harigenom kommer de lampliga stansutvaljningsmagneterna PS1—PS8, (la stegvaljaren 726 stegas genom sina fyra forsta lagen, att magnetiseras, varigenom stansning sker i remsan av de bestamda identifieringssiffrorna eller -symbolerna. For example, it may be unwise to first record a number of specific numbers, which identify the machine used in the transaction. If four numbers or symbols are desired to be punched, the first four sockets on the Upper Program Panel 734 are connected, which correspond to the first four contacts in the selected level in the step selector 726, for example level. II, through plug connections with sockets in the number section. 738 or the symbol section 737 in the lower program panel 733. The sockets 1 in the numeric section 738 are across conductors in the cable 1364 connected to the corresponding inputs in the numeric coding panel 1315 (Fig. 43F). Sockets in the symbol section 737 aro Over conductors in the cable 1325 connected to the corresponding inputs in the symbol coding panel 1311. As a result, the lamp punch selection magnets PS1 — PS8, (let the step selector 726 be stepped through its first four layers) are magnetized, thereby punching or symbols.

Del kan vara onskvart att stansa den av kassaregistret beraknade summan vid en summatagningsoperation, fastan sa normalt icke sker vid den beskrivna utforingsformen av en uppteckningsanlaggning. Denna summa installes pa omkopplarna SR42a1—.S.R48a1. Den pa dessa omkopplare uppstallda informationen kan upptecknas, genom all lampliga uttag, sow svara mot den valda stegvaljarnivan, i den ovre programpanelen 734 medelst proppforbindningar anslutas till uttag i den nedre programpanelens 733 sektion 735. De pa omkopplarna SR42a1—SR48a1 uppstallda informationerna upptecknas pa remsan, pa samma satt, som forut beskrivits i samband med uppteckningen av det med kassaregistrets beloppstangenter installda forsaljningspriset. It may be unreasonable to punch the sum calculated by the cash register in a sum collection operation, although this does not normally happen in the described embodiment of a recording facility. This sum is installed on the switches SR42a1 — .S.R48a1. The information displayed on these switches can be recorded, through all lamp sockets, as well as corresponding to the selected step selector level, in the upper program panel 734 by means of plug connections connected to sockets in the section 733 of the lower program panel 733. , in the same way as previously described in connection with the recording of the sale price set with the cash registers' amount keys.

Programmeringen av en utvald stegvaljarniva for ett summaprogram fullbordas genom att det lampliga stegvaljaruttaget anslutes till ett aterstallningsuttag, sasom forut beskrivits. - Vid nedtryckning av spaken 756 slutas aven kontakterna SC45a2 (fig. 43C) for fullbordandet av en krets fran ledaren 1304 Over kontakterna SS20a7 (lase 3), SC44b2, SC45a2, SS20a5 (lage 3) till magneten SS20 for magnetisering av denna. Vid en foljande frigoring av spaken. 756 8ppnas kontakterna SC45a2 och bryta nyssnananda krets, varigenom magne- 36— — ten SS20 avmagnetiseras, sa att omkopplaren 518 gar tillbaka till lage 1. The programming of a selected step selector level for a sum program is completed by connecting the appropriate step selector socket to a reset socket, as previously described. When the lever 756 is depressed, the contacts SC45a2 (Fig. 43C) are also closed to complete a circuit from the conductor 1304. At a subsequent release of the lever. 756 8 open the contacts SC45a2 and break the newly connected circuit, whereby the magnet SS20 is demagnetized, so that the switch 518 returns to position 1.

I samband med beskrivningen av uppteckning vid en debiteringstransaktion bor det observeras, att en debiteringstransaktion kan genomfOras och upptecknas av den ovan beskrivna uppteckningsanlaggningen, aven om varken expedit-, kund- eller varukort anvandas. In connection with the description of a record in a debit transaction, it should be noted that a debit transaction can be carried out and recorded by the record facility described above, even if no clerk, customer or goods card is used.

Liksom tidigare inledes transaktionen med omkopplaren 518 i sitt forsta lage och anlaggningen fOrberedes for en debiteringstransaktion genom nedtryckning av »Debitering»- tangenten. Eftersom inget expeditkort anvandes, maste expeditnumret uppstallas pa kassaregistrets beloppsrader 2-8. As before, the transaction with the switch 518 begins in its first state and the plant is prepared for a debiting transaction by pressing the "Debit" key. Since no clerical card was used, the clerical number must be displayed on cash registers amount lines 2-8.

»Expeditnummer»-tangenten i rad 1 nedtryckes sedan, for att sluta, kontakterna SC59a1 (fig. 43A). Harigenom fullbordas en krets frau vaxelspanningsledaren over kontakterna L20b1 (fig. 43A), SS20b14, SS20a1 (lage 1), SC59al, SC50al, omstallningsmagneten L40 for tangentlasraden samt kontakterna K1b13 till magneten L40, vilken, sasom namnts, vid magnetiseringen sluter kontakterna SC41a1 (fig. 43A), sá att kassaregistret startas for en operationscykel. The "clerk number" key in row 1 is then pressed, to close, the contacts SC59a1 (Fig. 43A). This completes a circuit from the AC voltage conductor across the contacts L20b1 (Fig. 43A), SS20b14, SS20a1 (layer 1), SC59al, SC50al, the switching magnet L40 for the tangent line and the contacts K1b13 to the magnet L40, which, as mentioned, closes the contacts during the magnetization. 43A), so that the cash register is started for an operating cycle.

Vid nedtryckningen av »expeditnummer»- tangenten installes aven programomkopplarens SR41a2 kontaktarm i lage 9, vilket, sasom redan beskrivits, kan vara anslutel for utvaljning av en forutbestarnd niva i stegvaljaren 726, som är programmerad for uppteckning av ett expeditnummer. When the "clerk number" key is pressed, the contact arm of the program switch SR41a2 is also installed in layer 9, which, as already described, can be connected for selecting a predetermined level in the step selector 726, which is programmed to record a clerk number.

Kassaregisteroperationen medfor att »Starta uppteckningen»-kontakterna SC42a1 (fig. 43D) slutas, varefter uppteckning sker av det pa kassaregistrets beloppsrader installda expeditnumret, forutom varje annan onskad identifieringssymbol eller information i enlighet med programmeringen av den utvalda nivan i stegvaljaren 726, sasom forut beskrivits. The cash register operation entails that the "Start the record" contacts SC42a1 (Fig. 43D) are closed, after which the clerk number installed on the cash register amount rows, in addition to any other desired identification symbol or information in accordance with the programming of the selected level in step selector 726, is described. .

Kassaregisteroperationen medfor oven att kontakterna SC46acl (fig. 43C) slutas och att kontakterna SC46bc1 (fig. 43C) Oppnas. Dessa kontakter styras i enlighet med install-. ningen av indikatorsegmentet for rad 1 i kassaregistret, vilket segment omstalles till expeditnummerlage, under en expeditnummeroperation. Dá kontakterna SC46acl slutas, fullbordas en krets frail ledaren 1304 over kontakterna SS20bc13, SC44b2, SC46acl, SS20a5 (lage 1) till magneten SS20, varvid denna magnetiseras. Harigenom oppnas kontakterna SS20bc13 och magneten SS20 avmagnetiseras salunda och orsakar framstegning av omkopplaren 518 till lage 2. Oppnandet av kontakterna SC46bc1 forhindrar att en krets fullbordas Over kontakterna SC46acl, SC46bc1 och SC47acl till kontakternas SS20a5 lage, varigenom magneten. SS20 Ater skittle magnetiseras vid denna tidpunkt. The cash register operation also causes the contacts SC46ac1 (Fig. 43C) to be closed and the contacts SC46bc1 (Fig. 43C) to be opened. These contacts are controlled in accordance with install. the indicator segment for line 1 in the cash register, which segment is converted to the clerk number law, during a clerk number operation. When the contacts SC46ac1 are closed, a circuit frail the conductor 1304 is completed over the contacts SS20bc13, SC44b2, SC46ac1, SS20a5 (layer 1) of the magnet SS20, whereby this is magnetized. This opens the contacts SS20bc13 and the magnet SS20 is thus demagnetized, causing advancement of the switch 518 to layer 2. The opening of the contacts SC46bc1 prevents a circuit from being completed. The SS20 Ater skittle is magnetized at this time.

Vridomkopplaren 518 kommer icke att gá forbi lage 2 under en expeditnummeroperation, eftersom flagon krets till magneten SS20 over kontakterna SS20a5 (lage 2) harunder icke fullbordas. Uppteckningsanlaggningen ar darfOr bcredd att uppteckna ett kundnummer, sedan uppteckningen av ett expeditnummer avslutats. The rotary switch 518 will not bypass layer 2 during a clerk number operation, since the flagon circuit to the magnet SS20 over the contacts SS20a5 (layer 2) has not been completed during it. The recording facility is therefore prepared to record a customer number, after the recording of a clerk number has been completed.

For startning av en operation for uppteckning av kundnummer, installes kundnumret pa beloppsradernapa kassaregistret och »kundnummer»-tangenten nedtryckes for slutning av kontakterna SC54a1 (fig. 43A). Harigenom fullbordas en krets over kontakterna L20b1, SS20b14, SS20a1 (lage 2) SC54a1, SC50a1, magneten L40 och kontakterna K1b13, sa att magneten L40 magnetiseras och startar en kassaregisteroperationscykel. To start an operation for recording customer numbers, the customer number is installed on the amount lines next to the cash register and the "customer number" key is pressed to close contacts SC54a1 (Fig. 43A). This completes a circuit across contacts L20b1, SS20b14, SS20a1 (layer 2) SC54a1, SC50a1, magnet L40 and contacts K1b13, so that magnet L40 is magnetized and starts a cash register operation cycle.

Vid nedtryckning av »kundnummer»-tangenten installes Oven programomkopplarens SR41a2 (fig. 43D) kontaktarm i lage 4, vilket, pa satt, som tidigare beskrivits, Or anslutet for val av en forutbestamd niva i stegvaljaren 726, som Or programmerad for uppteckning av ett kundnummer. When the "customer number" key is pressed, the contact arm SR41a2 (Fig. 43D) of the program switch is installed in layer 4, which, as previously described, is connected for selecting a predetermined level in the step selector 726, which is programmed to record a customer number.

Kassaregisteroperation medfOr att »starta uppteckningen»-kontakter SC42a1 (fig. 43D) slutas och uppteckning av det pa kassaregistrets beloppsrader installda kundnumret och andra identifieringssymboler eller and-ma onskade informationer sker sedan, i enlighet med programmeringen av den ulvalda nivan i stegvaljaren 726, sasom forut beskrivits. Cash register operation involves closing the "start recording" contacts SC42a1 (Fig. 43D) and recording of the customer number and other identification symbols or other requested information installed on the cash register amount rows then takes place, in accordance with the programming of the selected level in step selector 726. previously described.

Kassaregisteroperation medfor Oven att kontakterna SC43a2 (fig. 43C) slutas. Dessa kontakter styras i enlighet med installningen av indikatorinstallningssegmentet for rad 1 i kassaregistret, vilket segment installts i kundnummerlaget under en kundnummeroperation. DA kontakterna SC43a2 slutas, fullbordas en krets fran ledaren 1304 Over kontakterna SS20bc13, SC44b2, SC43a2, SS20a5 (lage 2) till magneten SS20, vilken magnetiseras. Detta medfor i sin tur att kontakterna SS20bc13 oppnas, varigenom magneten S520 avmagnetiseras, sa ati omkopplaren 518 gar fran lage 2 till lage 3. Cash register operation also means that the contacts SC43a2 (Fig. 43C) are closed. These contacts are controlled in accordance with the installation of the indicator installation segment for line 1 in the cash register, which segment is installed in the customer number layer during a customer number operation. When the contacts SC43a2 are closed, a circuit is completed from the conductor 1304 Over the contacts SS20bc13, SC44b2, SC43a2, SS20a5 (layer 2) to the magnet SS20, which is magnetized. This in turn causes the contacts SS20bc13 to be opened, whereby the magnet S520 is demagnetized, so that the switch 518 goes from layer 2 to layer 3.

Kontanttransaktion. Cash transaction.

Vici en kontanttransaktion utnyttjas vissa komponenter i uppteckningsanlaggningen, som icke anvandas vid en debiteringstransaktion. Vid den foljande beskrivningen av en kontanttransaktion, komma endast de moment, soul vasentligen skilj a sig frail motsvarande moment vid en debiteringstransaktion, att behandlas detaljerat. Det antages att transaktionen endast omfattar ett forsaljningsob jekt, att ett kort anvandes for identifiering av expediten och att ett kort anvandes for yarnbeskrivningen och slutligen, att omkopplaren 518 med sine_ satser eller nivaer av kontakter SS20al—SS20a7 befinner sig i sitt forsta lage. - Eftersom det ror sig om en kontantfOrsalj-- ni 9, in S1 4: te sl ei fi sf - - 37 ning, nedtryckes »Itontant»-tangenten i rad 9, vilket, dA kassaregistret darefter startas, medfor att kontaktarmarna i omkopplarna SR49a1 (fig. 43D), SR49a2 och SR49a3 (fig. 43A) for rad 9 installas pa sina nionde kontakter samt att kontakterna SC61a1 (fig. 43B) slutas. In the case of a cash transaction, certain components of the record facility are used, which are not used in a debit transaction. In the following description of a cash transaction, only those elements, which essentially differ from the corresponding elements in a debit transaction, will be treated in detail. It is assumed that the transaction only involves a sales object, that a card is used to identify the clerk and that a card is used for the yarn description, and finally, that the switch 518 with its sets or levels of contacts SS20al-SS20a7 is in its first layer. - Since this is a cash sale 9, in S1 4th sl ei fi sf - - 37 ning, the «Itontant» key is pressed in line 9, which, when the cash register is then started, causes the contact arms in the switches SR49a1 (Fig. 43D), SR49a2 and SR49a3 (Fig. 43A) for row 9 are installed on their ninth contacts and the contacts SC61a1 (Fig. 43B) are closed.

Ett expeditidentifieringskort insattes därefter i avldsningsanordningen och en avldsnings- och uppteckningsoperation utfores pa samma Ott som redan beskrivits i samband med en debiteringstransaktion. A clerk identification card is then inserted into the holding device and a holding and recording operation is performed on the same Ott as already described in connection with a debiting transaction.

Vid en debiteringstransaktion framstegades omkopplaren 518, sasom ndmnts, frail lage 1 till ldge 2, da avlasningen av expeditkortet avslutats. Vid en kontanttransaktion, som den nu beskrivna, forbliva kontakterna SC47bc1 (fig. 43C), vilka oppnas under en debiteringstransaktion, da »Debitering»-kontakten nedtryckes, slutna. Da kontaktarmen for kontakterna SS20a5 nâr ldge 2, slutes darfor en krets fran ledaren 1304 over avbytarkontakterna SS20bc13 (fig. 43C), kontakterna SC44b2, SC47bc1, SS20a5 (lage 2) till magneten SS20, vilken magnetiseras. Harigenom oppnas kontakterna SS20bc13 och magneten SS20 avmagnetiseras samt framstegar omkopplaren 518 till ldge 3. Laze 2 passeras pa delta salt vid en kontanttransaktion, eftersom hdr icke foreligger flagon anledning att identifiera kunden. In a debit transaction, the switch 518, as mentioned, progressed from layer 1 to ldge 2 when the unloading of the clerk card was completed. In a cash transaction, such as the one now described, the contacts SC47bc1 (Fig. 43C), which are opened during a debit transaction, when the "Debit" contact is depressed, remain closed. When the contact arm of the contacts SS20a5 reaches ldge 2, a circuit is therefore closed from the conductor 1304 over the replacement contacts SS20bc13 (Fig. 43C), the contacts SC44b2, SC47bc1, SS20a5 (layer 2) to the magnet SS20, which is magnetized. This opens the contacts SS20bc13 and the magnet SS20 is demagnetized and advances the switch 518 to ldge 3. Laze 2 is passed on delta salt in a cash transaction, since there is no reason to identify the customer.

Varudata upptecknas med omkopplaren 518 i lap 3 pa samma satt, som beskrivits vid en debiteringstransaktion. Item data is recorded with the switch 518 in lap 3 in the same way as described in a debit transaction.

Sedan inforandet av samtliga varudata avslutats kunna depositions-, rabatt-, skatt- eller andra inforingar gliras, varefter en del-summa tages pa kassaregistret, genom att summaspaken 755 kires till »detsamma»-ldge och motorspaken nedtryckes, varvid kontakterna SC45a1 (fig. 43A) slutas och fullborda en magnetiseringskrets till magneten L40 for att starta en registeroperationscykel, vid vii-ken summan for alla varor plus alla andra varden, sasom skatt etc. beraknas och indikeras av kassaregistret, utan att flagon uppteckning pa remsan sker. After the entry of all goods data has been completed, deposit, discount, tax or other entries can be slipped, after which a partial sum is taken in the cash register, by moving the sum lever 755 to the "same" value and depressing the motor lever, whereby the contacts SC45a1 (fig. 43A) terminates and completes a magnetization circuit to the magnet L40 to start a register operation cycle, at which the sum of all goods plus all other values, such as tax etc. is calculated and indicated by the cash register, without flagging on the strip.

Darefter infores det av kunden, sasom betalning for den av kassaregistret beraknade summan, overldmnade beloppet pa beloppsraderna och en maskinoperation startas genom nedtryckning av »Uppburet belopp»- tangenten i rad 1. Spaken 755 har automatiskt forts lillbaka till »addering»-laget vid avslutandet av den foregaende transaktionen. Then it is entered by the customer, as payment for the amount calculated by the cash register, the overdue amount on the amount lines and a machine operation is started by pressing the "Cash amount" key in line 1. The lever 755 has automatically continued back to the "add" team at the end of the previous transaction.

Da »Uppburet belopp»-tangenten i rad 1 nedtryckes, slutas kontakterna SC55a1 (fig 43A), varigenom en krets fullbordas fran vaxelspanningsledaren 1341 over kontakterna L20b1, SS20b14, SS20a1 (Idge 3) K20bc12, SR49a2 (vars kontaktarm befinner sig i ldge 9, beroende pa. att »Kontant»-tangenten i rad 9 nedtryckts), SS55a1, SC50a1, magneten L40 och kontakterna K1b13, sá att magneten L magnetiseras och startar en maskincykel, ph salt, som redan beskrivits. Det betalda beloppet infOres i kassaregistret och indikeras och tryckes pa ldmpligt uppteckningsmaterial, men stansas icke pa remsan. When the "Receivable amount" key in row 1 is pressed, the contacts SC55a1 (Fig. 43A) are closed, whereby a circuit is completed from the AC voltage conductor 1341 over the contacts L20b1, SS20b14, SS20a1 (Idge 3) K20bc12, SR49a2 (whose contact arm is located in ld, depending on the "Cash" key in row 9 being pressed), SS55a1, SC50a1, the magnet L40 and the contacts K1b13, so that the magnet L is magnetized and starts a machine cycle, ph salt, as already described. The amount paid is entered in the cash register and is indicated and printed on appropriate recording material, but is not stamped on the strip.

For fullbordande av kontanttransaktionen, sker en summatagning, genom att spaken 755 fores till »summa poster»-ldge och genom att spaken 756 nedtryckes. Kassaregistrets mekaniska konstruktion är, sasom ndmnts, sadan, att differentialmekanismen for rad 1 gar in i 'age 1, om kunden skall ha vaxel tillbaka och in i ldge 5, om kunden icke ãr berattigad till vaxel. Vaxelbeloppet, eller det belopp, som kunden är skyldig, raknas, indikeras och tryckes pa kvittot av kassaregistret. Dessutom kommer differentialmekanismen for rad 1 att orsaka omstallning av kontaktarmarna i omkopplarna SR41a1 (fig. 43D), SR11a2 (fig. 43D) och SR41a3 (fig. 43A) for rad 1, i enlighet med installningen av ndnanda differentiahnekanism. Installningen av omkopplarens SR41a2 kontaktarm i ldge 1 eller ldge 5 Or att spanning tillfores en utvald niva I stegvaljaren 726 over programpanelen 748, (fig. 43D), for uppteckning av ett summa-program, sasom tidigare beskrivits. I foreliggande utforingsform av uppteckningsanldggningen är den utvalda nivan i stegvaljaren 726 vanligtvis programmerad for att uppteckna en serie bestamda siffror, vilka identifiera den vid transaktionen anvanda maskinen och for att uppteckna ett referensnum- som identifierar transaktionen. To complete the cash transaction, a sum is taken, by moving the lever 755 to the «total items» ledge and by depressing the lever 756. The mechanical construction of the cash register is, as mentioned, such that the differential mechanism for row 1 goes into age 1, if the customer is to have gear back and into ldge 5, if the customer is not entitled to gear. The bill amount, or the amount owed by the customer, is tracked, indicated and printed on the receipt by the cash register. In addition, the differential mechanism for row 1 will cause rearrangement of the contact arms in the switches SR41a1 (Fig. 43D), SR11a2 (Fig. 43D) and SR41a3 (Fig. 43A) for row 1, in accordance with the installation of the said differential mechanism. Installation of the switch arm SR41a2 contact arm in ldge 1 or ldge 5 Or that voltage is applied to a selected level in the step selector 726 over the program panel 748, (Fig. 43D), for recording a sum program, as previously described. In the present embodiment of the recording facility, the selected level in the step selector 726 is usually programmed to record a series of determined numbers, which identify the machine used in the transaction and to record a reference number which identifies the transaction.

Vid den avsedda anvandningen av den beskrivna utforingsformen av uppteckningsanldggningen, innefattar uppteckningsprogrammet for en summaoperation vid en kontanttransaktion icke uppteckning av informationer fran flagon av raderna 1-9 i kassaregistret. Prograrnmet kan emellertid anordnas sa, att det innefattar uppteckning av informationer fran en eller flera av dessa rader, om sa onskas vid en speciell anvandning. In the intended use of the described embodiment of the recording facility, the recording program for a sum operation in a cash transaction does not include recording of information from the flag of lines 1-9 in the cash register. However, the software may be arranged to include recordings of information from one or more of these lines, if desired in a particular application.

Kort-, frigiirings- och aterstallningsorgan. Card, release and recovery means.

Vid nedtryckning av knappen 490 (fig. 1) oppnas kontakterna SP24b1, varigenom kretsen till magneten L20 brytes. Kretsen gar Over kontakterna K3acll (fig. 43D), SP24b1 (fig. 43B), SS20a2, SC23a1, SC37b1, sdkringskontakterna 1326, magneten L20 och kontakterna SC61a1 och SC60b1. Harigenom avmagnetiseras magneten L20, sá att avldsningsanordningens inriktningstappar dragas ur kortet. Vid tillbakadragandet av dessa inriktningstappar oppnas kontakterna SC2Oacl (fig 43C), varigenom magneten L21 avmagnetiseras, vilket i sin tur medfOr att kortet frigOres, s. att det kan avliigsnas fran avldsningsanordningen och ratt kort insattes for avlasning. SA snart emellertid avlasningen av kortet paborjats, och detta sker automatiskt, da rhitt kort insatts 1 avldsningsanordningen, blir 38- -- knappen 490, som styr kontakterna SP24b1 verkningslos och kan icke frigora kortet, eftersom magnetens L20 magnetiseringskrets shuntar kontakterna SP24b1 genom kontakterna SS20ac13 (fig. 43B), da omkopplaren 518 befinner sig i lage 1 eller 2. Oppnandet av kontakterna SP24b1 vid en sadan tidpunkt, medfor darfor icke, att kretsen till magneten L20 brytes, eftersom kretsen kommer att hallas sluten genom kontakterna SS20ac13, la.ge 1 eller 2hos kontakterna SS20a2, kontakterna SC23a1, kontakterna SC37b1, sakringskontakterna 1326, magneten L20, kontakterna SC61a1 och kontakterna SC6Oh1. Da omkopplaren 518 ar i lage 3, shuntas kontakterna SP24b1 me-deist en av de kretsar, sorn ga genom en av de satserna avkanningskontakter SC27a1, SC28a1 eller SC29a1 och motsvarande »slut pa korteb-kontakter SC30b1, SC31b1 eller 8C32b1, kontakterna K2Oadl, SS202 3), SC23a1, SC37b1, sakringskontakterna 1326, magneten L20, kontakterna SC61a1 och kontakterna SC60b1. When the button 490 (fig. 1) is pressed, the contacts SP24b1 are opened, whereby the circuit of the magnet L20 is broken. The circuit passes over the contacts K3ac11 (Fig. 43D), SP24b1 (Fig. 43B), SS20a2, SC23a1, SC37b1, the circuit contacts 1326, the magnet L20 and the contacts SC61a1 and SC60b1. As a result, the magnet L20 is demagnetized, so that the alignment pins of the holding device are pulled out of the card. Upon retraction of these alignment pins, the contacts SC2Oac1 are opened (Fig. 43C), whereby the magnet L21 is demagnetized, which in turn causes the card to be released, so that it can be detached from the holding device and the steering wheel card inserted for unloading. However, as soon as the unloading of the card is started, and this happens automatically, when the card is inserted in the holding device, the 38- button 490, which controls the contacts SP24b1, becomes inoperative and cannot release the card, because the magnet L20 excitation circuit shunts the contacts SP24b1 through the contacts SS20ac13 ( Fig. 43B), when the switch 518 is in position 1 or 2. The opening of the contacts SP24b1 at such a time, therefore, does not mean that the circuit of the magnet L20 is broken, since the circuit will be kept closed by the contacts SS20ac13, la.ge 1 or 2hos contacts SS20a2, contacts SC23a1, contacts SC37b1, fuse contacts 1326, magnet L20, contacts SC61a1 and contacts SC6Oh1. When the switch 518 is in position 3, the contacts SP24b1 are shunted by means of one of the circuits passed through one of the sets of sensing contacts SC27a1, SC28a1 or SC29a1 and the corresponding »end of shortb contacts SC30b1, SC31b1 or 8C32b1, the contacts K2Oad1, 3), SC23a1, SC37b1, fuse contacts 1326, magnet L20, contacts SC61a1 and contacts SC60b1.

Samma tryckknapp 490, som styr kontakterna SP24b1, anvandes aven for att aterstalla avlasningsanordningen till utgangslaget, for det fall att spanningen till uppteckningsanlaggningen bortfallit under en tidigare kortavlasningsoperation, innan avlasningen hunnit fullbordas. Vid nedtryckning av knappen 490 slutas kontakterna SP24a2 (fig. 43C), varigenom en krets slutes for kopplingsmagneterna L22A och L22B. Kretsen stracker sig fran den positiva ledaren 1304 over kontakterna L2lbc1 (fig. 43C), vilka aro slutna, eftersom det kort, som holt pa att avlasas innan spanningen brots, utskjutits fran avlasningsanordningen vid spanningsbortfallet, vid vilkct magneten L21 avmagnetiserades, kontakterna SP42a2, kontakterna SC33a3 (fig. 43B), vilka aro slutna, eftersom avlasningsanordningens kamrad icke befinner sig i utgangslaget eller lage 1, kontakterna SC35b2 och kopplingsmagneterna L22A och L22B. Magnetisering av magneterna L22A och L22B i den ovan angivna kretsen, medfor att kontakterna L22a1 (fig. 43B) slutas och fullborda en hallningskrets for magneterna L22A och L22B fran ledaren 1304 over kontakterna SC2Obc1 (fig. 43B), vilka aro slutna, beroende pa att nagot kort icke finnes i avlasningsanordningen, kontakterna L22a1, kontakterna Sc33a31 och kontakterna SC35b2. Magneterna L22A och L22B forbliva magnetiserade i denna krets, aven orn kontakterna SP24a2 Ater Oppnas genom att tryckknappen 490 slappes. Kretsen Over kontakterna L22a1 till magneterna L22A och L22B forblir sluten, till dess avlasningsanordningen kamrad vridits till utgangslaget, dâ kontakterna SC33a3 Oppnas och avmagnetisera magneterna L22A och L22B. Aterstallning av avlasningsanordningens kamrad kan salunda ske, genom att knappen 490 nedtryckes sedan ett spanningsbortfall avbrutit avlasningen av ett kort, vilket delvis avlasta kort aven utskjutits frail avlasningsanordningen. The same pushbutton 490, which controls the contacts SP24b1, is also used to return the unloading device to the output layer, in the event that the voltage to the recording system has been lost during a previous short unloading operation, before the unloading has been completed. When the button 490 is pressed, the contacts SP24a2 are closed (Fig. 43C), whereby a circuit is closed for the switching magnets L22A and L22B. The circuit extends from the positive conductor 1304 over the contacts L21bc1 (Fig. 43C), which are closed because the card, which was to be unloaded before the voltage was broken, is ejected from the unloading device at the voltage drop, at which the magnet L21 was demagnetized, the contacts SP42a2 SC33a3 (Fig. 43B), which are closed because the chamber of the unloader is not in the output layer or layer 1, the contacts SC35b2 and the coupling magnets L22A and L22B. Magnetization of the magnets L22A and L22B in the above circuit, causing the contacts L22a1 (Fig. 43B) to close and complete a tilt circuit for the magnets L22A and L22B from the conductor 1304 over the contacts SC2Obc1 (Fig. 43B), which are closed, depending on no card is present in the unloading device, contacts L22a1, contacts Sc33a31 and contacts SC35b2. The magnets L22A and L22B remain magnetized in this circuit, even if the contacts SP24a2 are opened again by releasing the pushbutton 490. The circuit Over the contacts L22a1 to the magnets L22A and L22B remains closed, until the unloading device chamber is turned to the output layer, when the contacts SC33a3 are opened and demagnetize the magnets L22A and L22B. Restoration of the chamber of the unloading device can thus take place by pressing the button 490 after a voltage failure has interrupted the unloading of a card, which partially unloads the card and has also been ejected from the unloading device.

For att aterstallning av avlasningsanordningens kamrad skall ske, maste kretsen till anordningens motor 333 (fig. 43B) slutas Over kontakterna K3b1 (fig. 43B). Dessa kontakter aro slutna under aterstallningsoperationen, beroende pa att relaet K3 är avmagnetiserat, eftersom kontakterna SC33b2 (fig. 43C) i reldets K3 magnetiseringskrets aro oppna, utom dâ avlasningsanordningens kamrad ãr i utgangslaget eller lage 1, och forbliva darfor oppna, till dess aterstallningen av avlasningsanordningens kamrad fullbordats. In order for the unloading device's chamber row to be restored, the circuit to the device's motor 333 (Fig. 43B) must be closed above the contacts K3b1 (Fig. 43B). These contacts are closed during the recovery operation, due to the relay K3 being demagnetized, since the contacts SC33b2 (Fig. 43C) in the magnetizing circuit of the real K3 are open, except when the unloading device chamber is in the output layer or layer 1, and therefore remain open until the recovery of the unloading device chamber has been completed.

Utbytbar enhet fi5r val av foljden. Interchangeable unit for selection of the sequence.

Sasom angivits i samband med beskrivningen av avlasningsanordningens rnekaniska konstruk_tion finnas vissa av anordningens kompon enter, exempelvis omkopplaren 518 (fig. 22), omkopplarmagneten SS20, vissa kontakter, som styras av namnda magnet osv. inneslutna i en enhet, som kan avlagsnas fran avlasningsanordningen och ersattas med en annan enhet, som innehaller komponenter, vilka styra en annan operationsfoljd i uppteckningsanlaggningen. As stated in connection with the description of the mechanical construction of the unloading device, there are some of the components of the device, for example the switch 518 (Fig. 22), the switch magnet SS20, certain contacts which are controlled by said magnet, and so on. enclosed in a unit which can be removed from the unloading device and replaced with another unit which contains components which control a different sequence of operations in the recording system.

I den i kretsschemat visade och i det foregaende beskrivna utforingsformen av uppleckningsanlaggningen innefattar denna utbytbara inproppningsenhet en trelagesomkopplare 518, sá att varje fullstandig transaktion kommer att ornfatta en expeditnummeroperation, en kundnummeroperation och en varuoperation. In the embodiment of the pick-up plant shown in the circuit diagram and described above, this interchangeable plug-in unit comprises a three-layer switch 518, so that each complete transaction will comprise a clerk number operation, a customer number operation and a goods operation.

Om man onskar anvanda uppteckningsanlaggningen i ett speciellt samband, vid vilket endast tva distinkta operationer, exempelvis kundnummer- och varuoperationer, aro onskvarda vid varje transaktion, maste originalenheten dragas ut och en enhet med en tvalagesvaljare inskjutas. Operationsfoljden med en sadan omkopplare kommer att vara lage 1 till lage 2 och tillbaka till rage 1, varigenom foljden f8r tva skilda operationer av godtycklig karaktar erhalles. If you wish to use the recording system in a special connection, in which only two distinct operations, such as customer number and item operations, are required for each transaction, the original unit must be pulled out and a unit with a two-layer selector inserted. The sequence of operations with such a switch will be layer 1 to layer 2 and back to rage 1, whereby the sequence for two different operations of any nature is obtained.

Det kan aven vara Onskvart att utnyttja uppteckningsanlaggningen 1 samband med exempelvis inventering, varvid varje transaktion omfattar en enda operation. Den ursprungliga enheten maste aviagsnas och ersattas med en for transaktionen lampad enhet. I detta senare fall kan omkopplaren helt utelamnas och enheten kommer huvudsakligen att bilda ett kopplingsorgan for de olika ledningarna. It may also be unwise to use the recording facility in connection with, for example, an inventory, whereby each transaction comprises a single operation. The original device must be discarded and replaced with a device lit for the transaction. In this latter case, the switch can be completely omitted and the unit will mainly form a connecting means for the various wires.

Det är tydligt att utbytbara inproppningsenheter, av vilka tre, sasom exempel, beskrivits ovan, medgiver stora anvandningsmojligheter for uppteckningsanlaggningen och mOjliggOr att en enda uppteckningsanlaggning kan anvandas i ett flertal olika sammanhang blott och hart genom utbyte av enheter. 1 - -39 It is clear that interchangeable plug-in units, three of which, as examples, described above, allow great uses for the recording system and make it possible for a single recording system to be used in a number of different contexts simply by exchanging units. 1 - -39

Claims (11)

Patentansprak:Patent claim: 1. I. Databehandlingsanlaggning, innefattande en manuellt installbar raknemaskin for registrering av en forsta dataklass, en mediuma-vlasningsenhet for avkasning av en andra dataklass frail inforda handlingar samt en uppteckningsenhet, anordnad att uppteckna bada dataklasserna fran avlasningsenheten och raknemaskinen, varvid for avlasningen och uppteckningen av ett flertal olika grupper av namnda andra dataklass fran var och en av ett flertal inforda handlingar, vilka infOrts i forutbestamd foljd, finnes en avlas- ningskontrollanordning(SC25a1-SC29al, L22A, L22B), vilken sá styres av en. mediumidentifieringsanordning (171, 315-321, 428 -445), medelst vilken de infOrda handlingarna (103, 108, 116) ,identifieras, i samverkan med en. foljdkontrollanordning (518-556), att avldsningsenheten (101) fOr avlasning av namnda inforda handlingar hindras att arbeta, om en av mediumidentifieringsanordningen (171, 315-321, 428 445) identifierad hand- ling icke inforts i avlasningsenheten (101) i den av foljclkontrollanordningen (518-556) bestamda foljden, kannetecknad av att foljdkontrollanordningen (518-556) innefattar en stegomkopplare (518) med efter varandra anordnade kontaktlagen, av vilka vartdera ãr elektriskt forbundet med var sitt av en foljd individuella kontaktpar (SC25a1-SC29a1), av vilka kontaktpar vartdera samverkar med en avkanningsanordning (171), vilken är anordnad att avkanna identifieringsuppteckningar i olika indexlagen pa de inforda handlingarna (103, 108, 116), sâ att en elektrisk krets till en drivmotor (333) for avlasningsenheten (101) endast slutes dá ett av kontaktparen SC25al-SC29a1) slutes medelst tillhOrande avkanningsanordning (171), vilket kontaktpar samverkar riled det speciella kontaktlage, i vilket stegomkopplaren (518) installts vid varje sarskilt stadium under en databehandlingsoperation.I. A data processing plant, comprising a manually installable shaver for recording a first data class, a medium de-unloading unit for rejecting a second data class from input documents and a recording unit, arranged to record both the data classes from the unloading unit and the shaver, the recording for unloading and the shredder. of a plurality of different groups of said second data class from each of a plurality of input documents, which are entered in predetermined sequence, there is a relief control device (SC25a1-SC29al, L22A, L22B), which is controlled by one. medium identification device (171, 315-321, 428 -445), by means of which the entered documents (103, 108, 116) are identified, in cooperation with a. follow-up control device (518-556), that the unloading unit (101) for unloading said imported documents is prevented from working, if an action identified by the medium identification device (171, 315-321, 428 445) is not entered in the unloading unit (101) in the the follower control device (518-556), characterized in that the follower control device (518-556) comprises a step switch (518) with successively arranged contact layers, each of which is electrically connected to each of a pair of individual contact pairs (SC25a1-SC29a1), of which contact pairs each cooperate with a scanning device (171), which is arranged to scan identification records in different index layers on the input documents (103, 108, 116), so that an electrical circuit to a drive motor (333) for the unloading unit (101) only is closed when one of the contact pairs SC25a1-SC29a1) is closed by means of the associated scanning device (171), which contact pair cooperates with the special contact layer, iv as the step switch (518) is installed at each particular stage during a data processing operation. 2. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraket 1, omfattande ytterligare avkanningsorgan, anordnade att successivt avkanna datakolumner pa de inforda handlingarna samt en koppling till motorn, vilken koppling sattes i funktion varje gang en datakolumn upptecknas av uppteckningsenheten, sá att en foljande datakolumn forberedes fOr avlas/ling genom att en kamaxel i avlasningsenheten vrides ett steg, kannetecknad av att omkopplarkontrollskivor (384-388) aro install-hart anordnade pa kamaxeln (359), varvid upprepad paverkan av kopplingen (362) kan astadkommas, sedan ett forutbestamt antal kolumner pa varje sarskild handling ha avlasts, sá att namnda kamaxel (359) darvid kontinuerligt och stegvis vrides till utgangslage, fOr avlasning av en foljande handling (103, 108, 116).A data processing plant according to claim 1, comprising further scanning means, arranged to successively scan data columns on the entered documents and a connection to the engine, which connection was put into operation each time a data column is recorded by the recording unit, so that a subsequent data column is prepared for reading by that a camshaft in the unloading unit is rotated one step, characterized in that switch control discs (384-388) are arranged hard on the camshaft (359), whereby repeated actuation of the coupling (362) can be effected, since a predetermined number of columns on each particular action have unloaded, so that said camshaft (359) is thereby continuously and stepwise turned to the starting position, for unloading a following action (103, 108, 116). 3. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraket 2, kannetecknad av att en fast onikopplarliontrollskiva (393), som är anordnad pa kamaxeln (395), bringas till verksamt lage, sedan kamaxeln (395) vridits frail utgangslaget, sa att en eIektrisk krets slutes till en stegningsmagnet (SS20), varigenom framstegning av f5ljdkontrollomkopplaren (518) till nasta kontrollage astadkommes.Data processing system according to claim 2, characterized in that a fixed onicoupler ion control disk (393), which is arranged on the camshaft (395), is brought into operative position, after the camshaft (395) has been rotated from the starting stroke, so that an electric circuit is closed to a stepping magnet ( SS20), whereby advancement of the flow control switch (518) to the next control is effected. 4. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraket 1,•kannetecknad av ett reld (K20), vilket paverkas, da en bestamd handling (116) av de inforda handlingarna (103, 108, 116),Data processing facility according to patent claim 1, • can be characterized by a fire (K20), which is affected when a certain document (116) of the imported documents (103, 108, 116), 5. identifieras av mediumidentifieringsanordningen (171, 315-321, 428-445) och darvid frigor raknernaskinen (102) sá, att endast en bestamd tangent (varutangenten MDSE) av ett antal kontroll- och utlasningstangenter (751) kan paverkas.5. is identified by the medium identification device (171, 315-321, 428-445) and thereby releases the rake machine (102) so that only a certain key (the MDSE item key) of a number of control and readout keys (751) can be affected. 6. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraket 4, yid vilken raknemaskinen omfattar en summatagningsmekanism saint en motorspak, medelst vilken summtagningsmekanismen utloses f Or att utfOra en summatagningsoperation, kannetecknad av att vid nedtryckning av namnda motorspalc (756) aterstallningsanordningar (SS20a5, SS20a7, SC45a2) sattas i funktion och aterstalla foljdkontrollomkopplaren (518) till utgangslaget.6. A data processing plant according to claim 4, wherein the shaver comprises a summing mechanism saint a motor lever, by means of which the summing mechanism is triggered to perform a summing operation, characterized in that upon depressing said motor gap (756) recovery devices SS57a (SS220a5, and resetting the sequence control switch (518) to the output layer. 7. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraVt 3, kannetecknad av ett par nor-malt slutnii kontrollkontakter (SC47bc1), vilka aro elektriskt forbundna med ett av foljdkontrollomkopplarens (518) kontrollagen saint med stegningsmagneten (SS20), vilka kontakter (SC47bc1) aro anordnade att Oppnas vid nedtryckning av en bestamd transaktionstangent (fl3ebiterinp-tangenten 754) pa raknemaskinen (102), sá att de icke kunna paverka namnda stegningsmagnet (SS20) genom att sluta en stromkrets, medan daremot vid nedtryckning av en annan transaktionstangent (»Kontant-tangenten 754) namnda kontrollkontakter (SC47bc1) forbliva slutna och naagneten (SS20) magnetiseras i namnda krets, sá att fdljdkontrollornkopplaren (518) framstegas till nasta kontrollage, trots att den fasta kontrollskivan (393) kvarstar i utgangslaget, beroende pa att en viss (108) av handlingarna (103, 108, 116) icke inforts. 8. Datahehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraket 2, kannetecknad av en manuellt paverkbar anordning (490), anordnad att sluta en alternativ stromkrets fOr aterstallning av karnaxein (359) for den handelse, att en avlasningsoperation avbrytes, innan den fullborciats.Data processing system according to claim 3, characterized by a pair of normally closed control contacts (SC47bc1), which are electrically connected to one of the control layers of the follower control switch (518) with the stepping magnet (SS20), which contacts (SC47bc1) are arranged to be opened. of a certain transaction key (fl3ebiterinp key 754) on the razor (102), so that they can not act on said stepping magnet (SS20) by closing a circuit, whereas when pressing another transaction key (»Cash key 754) said control contacts (SC47bc1) remain closed and the magnet (SS20) is magnetized in said circuit, so that the sequence controller coupler (518) is advanced to the next control layer, even though the fixed control disk (393) remains in the output layer, due to a certain (108) of the actions (103) , 108, 116) icke inforts. Data processing plant according to claim 2, characterized by a manually actuatable device (490), arranged to close an alternative circuit for restoring the carnax (359) for the purpose of interrupting a unloading operation before it is fully borciated. 8. * 8. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraket 7, kannetecknad av en elektromagnet (L20), vilken paverkas Over omkopplarkontakter (SC23a1), som slutes vid manuell inforing av flagon av handlingarna (103, 108, 116), varigenom inriktningstappar (173 -175) bringas att rora sig in i hal i namnda — — handlingar for att lasa de senare i avlasningslaze samt ytterligare kontakter (SP24b1), vilka paverkas dá namnda manuellt paverkbara anordning (409) sattes i funktion, for att avmagnetisera namnda elektromagnet (L20), sá att inriktningstapparna darvid frigoras, varigenom en i fel fOljd inford handling kan avlagsnas.8. * 8. A data processing plant according to claim 7, characterized by an electromagnet (L20), which is actuated via switch contacts (SC23a1), which is closed by manual insertion of the flake of the documents (103, 108, 116), whereby alignment pins (173-175) is moved into the hall in said - - documents to read the latter in unloading laser and further contacts (SP24b1), which are actuated when said manually actuatable device (409) was put into operation, to demagnetize said electromagnet (L20), so that the alignment pins are thereby released, whereby a wrongly executed document can be removed. 9. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt nagot av forega.ende patentansprak, kanne1ecknad av att foljdkontrollanordningen (518-556) är anordnad att kunna avlagsnas och ersattas med en annan foljdkontrollanordning, som styr en annan operationsfoljd.Data processing facility according to any one of the preceding patent claims, characterized in that the sequence control device (518-556) is arranged to be removable and replaced with another sequence control device which controls a different sequence of operations. 10. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt nagot av foregaende patentansprak, kannetecknad av inre sparranordningar, vilka sa styras saval av foljdkontrollanordningen (518-556), da denna är installd i ett visst (3) av sina lagen, som av mediumidentifieringsanordningen (171, 315-321, 428-445), att ytterligare operation av avlasningsenheten forhindras, till dess data registrerats i raknemaskinen (102), och vilka inre sparranordningar aro anordnade att sattas ur funktion. (stegvaljaren SSI, kontaklerna SS21bc1), sedan en raknemaskinoperation startats.Data processing plant according to any one of the preceding patent claims, characterized by internal sparing devices, which are controlled by the tracking control device (518-556), as this is installed in a certain (3) of its laws, as by the medium identification device (171, 315-321, 428-445), that further operation of the unloading unit is prevented, until data has been registered in the shaver (102), and which internal saving devices are arranged to be deactivated. (step selector SSI, contacts SS21bc1), after a shaver operation has been started. 11. Databehandlingsanlaggning enligt patentanspraket 1, kannetecknat av uppteckningsanordningar (SC25a2—SC29a2, 1336) for identifieringssymboler, vilka anordningar paverkas, da flagon av identifieringsavkanningsanordningarna (171) avkanner en iden.- tifieringsuppteckning pa en inford handling (103, 108, 116), for att bringa uppteckningsenheten (100) att uppteckna en symbol, som är karakteristisk for den avkanda handling.. en. Anforda publikationer: Patentskrif ter [ran Tyskland 583 598; USA 2 540 029.Data processing facility according to claim 1, characterized by recording devices (SC25a2 — SC29a2, 1336) for identification symbols, which devices are affected when the flag of the identification scanning devices (171) scans an identification record on an input document (103, 108). to cause the recorder (100) to record a symbol characteristic of the deciphering action. Request publications: Patent patent ter [ran Germany 583 598; USA 2,540,029.
SE190823D SE190823C1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
SE190823T

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
SE190823C1 true SE190823C1 (en) 1964-01-01

Family

ID=49766712

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
SE190823D SE190823C1 (en)

Country Status (1)

Country Link
SE (1) SE190823C1 (en)

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US1927556A (en) Automatic auditing and merchandise control system
GB443840A (en) Improvements in or relating to statistical recording machines
US2002437A (en) Mechanical method of preparing statements, bills, and the like
US3006538A (en) Combination of a cash register
US3105636A (en) Computing and recording apparatus
US2703048A (en) Insurance policy vending and validating apparatus
DE1144033B (en) Data processing system
US2740581A (en) Device for dispensing tickets
SE190823C1 (en)
US1994524A (en) Printing device
US1965981A (en) Printing control mechanism
US2781847A (en) Selectively programmed perforating apparatus
SE190824C1 (en)
NO119808B (en)
SE192136C1 (en)
US1658022A (en) Record-card-controlled statistical machine
US2129743A (en) Automatic auditing and tabulating system
DE4103415A1 (en) Card operated goods dispenser e.g. cigarette machine - has display which indicates amount used and amount available on card
US2080758A (en) Automatic accounting and checking system
US2161649A (en) Card selecting machine
US1930253A (en) Accounting means
DE916477C (en) Booking machine for the simultaneous and consistent booking of several documents
DE1137586B (en) Data processing system with a receipt scanner, a cash register and a strip punch
SE203091C1 (en)
US1954053A (en) Tabulating machine